Fredric Shernoff

ATLANTIC ISLAND

To Ty and Anna: You are my purpose.

Book 1: The Event

Chapter 1

Theo had never expected life to be so unsatisfying. It wasn’t as if he felt entitled to anything in particular; no brass ring being held extra low for him to grab or crown to be placed on his head. It was that he always assumed he would know his purpose when the time was right.

As a cool Philadelphia spring gave way to the heat of summer, the students of the junior class at Mifflin High School filled the halls with talk of SAT scores, campus visits and summer plans to pad the ever-important college application. Theo walked among these conversations not quite eavesdropping, more like observing with a goal of understanding.

It wasn’t that Theo’s grades weren’t up to snuff. Although he had floundered in middle school, he had redeemed himself over the past few years and now held a strong B average. He knew that he would be applying to colleges after what would most certainly be an embarrassing series of school tours with Mom and Dad along for the ride. The problem was that Theo didn’t care about anything in particular.

He had briefly considered the notion that he may be what the school counselor called “clinically depressed.” Theo didn’t agree. He had seen depression personified among the outcasts in school trying to “express themselves.” That wasn’t him. Black wasn’t his color.

No, depression wasn’t the diagnosis here. If he had to label himself, Theo would go with “disappointed.” He had spent his seventeen years believing that he was following a pre-determined course. True, he didn’t know where that road was leading him, but he was resigned to follow. Now, when it seemed everyone else was taking charge of his or her destiny, Theo had turned to his trusty muse and found that his travel guide had abandoned him.

Theo’s friends shared his habit of dabbling in school activities without being too involved in any one thing. They also shared his confusion and uncertainty about the future. What they seemed to lack, Theo reckoned, was his frustration. They appeared content to say, “screw it, life makes no sense and we’ll figure it out when and if we can.” Theo’s difficulty was that he expected to know the answers. He thought the goals would be self-evident and he would just have to strive for them. No such luck.

When summer break finally arrived, Theo did what any teenager without any particular plans would do. He met up with his friends for pizza. Bill, a baseball player who dabbled in the world of the “cool” crowd but spent most of his time out of it, sat down at the table with his two slices of cheese steak pizza. It was Wednesday afternoon late in June and the shop was busy serving the liberated high schoolers. Theo and Bill sat at a table for four. Soon Mark and Ryan would join them. Mark always drove Ryan, and Mark was always late.

“Don’t you think we should go to the shore?” Bill asked.

“Why the shore?”

“Well, for one, it’s ridiculously hot out here. For another, the girls are ridiculously hot down there. It’s a no-brainer.”

Theo thought about it. “Well, we could stay at the motel near where my grandparents have their condo.”

“Why can’t we just stay at the condo?” Bill asked. “It’s cheaper.”

“Dude,” said Theo, ” it’s my grandparent’s place. I don’t want their friends checking up on us and reporting back.”

“Fair enough. The motel it is then.”

The door jingled as it was opened. Mark and Ryan made their way to the table.

“What’s up boys?” Mark said.

“We’re going to the shore.” Bill said. “We’re going to stay in a motel, and there will be girls, and Ryan will remember what it’s like to be touched by a woman.”

“Hey,” Ryan laughed, “I had a girlfriend more recently than the rest of you losers.”

Theo grinned. “He does have a point, Bill. Why don’t you guys sit down? We were just laying out the details.”

The four boys spent the next hour consuming too much pizza and vast amounts of soda while plotting their conquest of the New Jersey shore. They agreed to stay in Ventnor, just south of Atlantic City but on the same island. One night would absolutely have to include a trip to Ocean City on the next island down because, as Mark put it, “that’s where the action is.”

Ryan, who was never without his smartphone, clicked away as he researched what it would cost for this little adventure. He had not actually had a girlfriend recently or at all. His friends didn’t know this because Ms. Linda Fine attended Jenkintown High. Although Linda, like everyone else, had a Facebook page, the other guys couldn’t see her profile because the whirlwind romance had imploded quickly and friends don’t “friend” their boy’s ex. In reality, Ryan and Linda had met at a programming competition and he had been too nervous to ask her out (though not too nervous to send that one-click request for friendship).

That weekend, the guys all piled into Mark’s Honda Accord and hit the road. As they approached the rest stop on the Atlantic City Expressway, Bill asked if he could visit the men’s room. All four were in agreement that this was a great idea, so Mark pulled into the rest stop parking lot.

The facility, recently remodeled, was the only place to take a break along the Expressway without bailing at one of the exits. Families and groups of teens and young adults streamed in and out of the doors, filled the tables in the rest stop’s main cafeteria and waited in long lines for the artery-clogging goodness that one finds along the country’s highways and byways.

Theo went to the bathroom with the other guys and spent a little extra time at the sink examining his reflection in the mirror. This was the last chance to make some appearance adjustments before arriving at the shore. He listened to the conversations around him. A trucker at a urinal argued with his buddy about whether the President should do more to protect the “danged homeland” instead of worrying about “all them Arabs in Iraq and them places.” He pronounced “Arabs” like “Ayrabs.”

“I’m telling you Lennie, one of them brown skinned sons of guns is gonna blow this whole country straight to hell and that damned President will be sitting twiddling his thumbs.”

Lennie grumbled his agreement and Racist Trucker adjusted his zipper and made his way to the door. He did this, Theo noticed, without bothering to stop by the sink. Lennie, who had to be six foot six and three hundred pounds, also showed his disdain for personal hygiene on his way out of the men’s room. Theo had a passing thought about Racist Trucker and Lennie swapping germs with a big high five, maybe after Lennie made a great point about those “brown skinned sons of guns” running wild in the homeland. He chuckled as he turned back to the mirror.

Theo dried his hands after putting the finishing touches on his short hair. The music playing from the restroom speakers ended and a news report came on. “Scientists warn that a comet the size of Manhattan has a one in ten thousand chance of hitting the Earth.”

Good Lord, Theo thought, do they ever come up with anything positive to report?

“Let’s go buddy, the chicks are a-waiting.” Mark came up behind Theo and shocked him out of his thoughts.

“Alright, I’m ready, just want to grab some coffee before we go.”

Back on the road, Theo stared out the window thinking about the trucker and the announcement on the radio news. Mark fiddled with his iPhone and soon the sounds of Maroon 5 blasted from the Accord’s speakers.

As the car passed Exit 6, Theo thought, “The exits count down because we are heading to the edge of the world.” He shuddered. What the hell kind of thought was that? Just then, a blue Mazda 3 sped by giving just the flash of what appeared to be young, female occupants. “Whoa,” Bill said, “speed up and let’s see what we’ve got here.”

Mark stepped hard on the accelerator and the Accord moved up until it was neck and neck with the Mazda. Sure enough, the driver and two passengers were all teenage girls. Bill waved, and the girl in the rear driver’s-side seat waved back with a smile. She had long brown hair and judging from the waving arm was on the skinny side.

The driver was blonde and gorgeous in profile. She kept her eyes firmly on the road in a way that said “Yes, I know there are boys to my left, so I’m going to ignore them. So there.” The front passenger was hidden from view.

“My friends,” said Mark, “These girls are headed to the same place as us.”

“Mark,” said Ryan, “We still have a couple more exits and even then we are heading to an island of three different towns and a city. What makes you so sure we’ll ever see them again?”

Mark sat back and smirked. “When you know, you know. Those ladies are ours.”

“Works for me,” said Bill. Theo doubted Mark’s prophecy, but thought it would be interesting to see how far they travelled the same route as the girls.

The green sign for Exit 2 (Atlantic City via Black Horse Pike) approached and Mark turned on his signal to shift lanes. Theo was not surprised to see the Mazda, now a few car lengths ahead of them, do the same. After rounding the exit ramp, the car came out on Route 322. From there, it was just a mile or so to West End Avenue. West End was a brief trip past the wetlands and bay of Ventnor Heights. As a child, Theo had passed these sights many times. His mother used to encourage the kids to sing “Down by the Bay” each time they drove by. Theo and his two older sisters had always obliged.

Ventnor Heights was home to a small shopping center that stood three quarters abandoned. The economy had taken its toll, but things had rarely ever been good here. Businesses couldn’t survive when most of the action only happened three months out of the year. Atlantic City and its suburbs were supposed to have been rejuvenated years ago by the Casino industry, but instead the big corporations got richer and the city became more depressed.

The Accord crossed the bridge to the Ventnor mainland and soon pulled up next to the Sea Sons Motel. Theo thought the play-on-words was ridiculous. The motel took its blue and white color scheme to an extreme, though some of the blue was wearing away and in need of a fresh paint job. The town’s battle with the infamous Hurricane Sandy probably hadn’t helped maintain the buildings.

The guys took their bags from the car and entered the small lobby. The manager, an older Hispanic man with greying hair and a small scar on his cheek fixed his gaze on them and frowned. He continued to stare as they approached as if to say, “Oh yes, I’ve seen your kind before. I know what kind of mischief teenage boys are all about.”

Mark stepped forward. “Top of the morning, good sir! My colleagues and I request your finest room.”

The manager scowled but said nothing, shifting his glance to the computer monitor on the desk. He found a room and took Bill’s credit card. The others would split the charge at the end of the trip. And so, Theo thought, the ritual of the motel check-in is complete. He wondered how many strangers the manager had seen pass through the lobby doors. Families seeking easy access to the beach, co-ed groups of teens seeking easy access to each other. This made him think of the girls in the Mazda. They should have been here by now, if they were actually staying at the Sea Sons. Clearly Mark’s intuition was off, not that that came as a surprise.

Their room was on the second floor on the far side of the building. It faced the street but the ocean wasn’t far away. The second floor walkway wrapped around the whole building. Theo had once been visiting his grandparents and had seen kids jumping off the top of the motel into the pool. Someone called the police and the nonsense was resolved. Theo always enjoyed seeing obnoxious people get their comeuppance.

Bill slipped the key card into the scanner, saw the light turn green and opened the door. They entered a small living room with a sofa bed along one wall. A small television sat on a shelf, and a comfy red chair (just a shade darker than the red of the sofa) nestled in the opposite corner. A small hallway led to a back bedroom with two twin beds.

The group quarreled briefly over sleeping arrangements before agreeing on a rotation that forced each boy to have to share the sofa bed at least once. Ryan grabbed the remote from on top of the television and pressed the power button while he walked backwards toward the chair. The television, a thick, old-fashioned model, came on and he flipped through the channels.

Ryan paused on CNN, which at the moment featured Anderson Cooper interviewing a seismologist about some suspicious tremors somewhere in Iowa. “So you’re saying the American people don’t have any reason to be concerned?” Cooper asked.

The scientist, wearing thick spectacles beneath his greasy hair, stared into the camera. “I’m saying that we have no evidence to suggest that anything significant is happening. What we have seen are a few minor incidences that barely register on the scale.”

Bill reached over and grabbed the remote from Ryan. He turned the television off. “Enough of that crap. Let’s get changed and hit the beach while the sun is still good.”

The four teenagers, now dressed in swim trunks and flip-flops, walked down to ground level and crossed over the boardwalk onto the sand. The beach was crowded and Theo had to carefully avoid a minefield of sand castles and kid toys as he ran to the ocean’s edge.

Theo sat down on the wet, hard-packed sand and allowed the waves to lap around him. He looked out into the great expanse in front of him. Off to the side, the Pier Mall was visible even here, miles away from Atlantic City. Beyond that, nothing. Theo loved that about the ocean. Sure, he knew that Europe or Africa or whatever was somewhere on the other end of that vastness, but for all intents and purposes, this was the edge of all things. There was a strange peace in that thought.

“You know, you might want to look around you and check out the girls instead of the fish.” Bill spoke from behind Theo. He wore a sleeveless shirt, though he was the only one of the four with a defined six-pack.

“Hey man,” Theo said, “If you want to go and be a creeper that’s fine but I’m good right where I am.”

“Alright bro. You and Ry can do your thing. More for Mark and me.”

They stayed on the beach for three hours. Bill and Mark spoke to every girl they could find and Theo eventually joined them in tossing a Frisbee. Exhausted, they made their way back to the motel to shower and change for the night.

At 6 PM, they piled back into Mark’s car for the half hour drive to Ocean City. They settled on one of the numerous pizza parlors for dinner, choosing one by the entrance to the boardwalk. Walking up the wooden ramp, Theo was swept up in the atmosphere. The boards were packed with people, mainly teens of both genders. Theo felt his eyes drawn from one girl to the next. The bright lights of the signs above the shops hypnotized him.

The pizza parlor was different from the usual hangout at home. With its doors wide open, the oceanfront shop filled with the scents and sounds of the boardwalk. The guys ordered a giant pepperoni. Mark wanted to discuss the plans for the evening. Bill had his heart set on going to the Surf Mall, a collection of shops selling t-shirts, collectibles and other, unusual items. Ryan and Mark insisted on hitting up at least one arcade. Theo didn’t really care where they went. He was enjoying himself and drinking in the experience.

As Theo reached for a second slice, Ryan changed the subject. “Have you guys figured out where you want to go to school?”

Bill faked a yawn. “Really? You want to talk about this now?”

“Well,” Ryan said, “I just think it’s important that we focus on the future. We aren’t going to be young forever.”

“And I think,” Bill said, “that you’re killing me. Can’t we focus on the present?”

Ryan shrugged and went back to playing with his iPhone. Theo heard female laughter and looked up toward the entrance. Leaning against the counter was the blonde from the Mazda. Next to her were the thin brunette and a short, Asian girl. She was almost definitely the girl from the passenger seat.

“Guys, we’ve got company,” Theo said. The others looked up.

“I can’t believe it,” said Mark, “this is fate.” He was already getting up and making his way over to the girls. Theo and the others followed. Mark introduced himself and his friends.

The blonde girl (whose name was Jamie) clicked with Mark right away. She invited the guys to sit with them. Over the course of the next hour, Jamie and Mark laughed it up while Bill awkwardly flirted with Michelle, the Asian girl. Ryan seemed more interested in his phone, so Theo had no trouble focusing on Kylee, the brunette.

Kylee was beautiful. She had her hair styled so that a chunk of it fell over one eye and she continuously brushed it back with her hand as she talked. Theo was entranced. The girls were all from the town next to Mifflin and were about the same age as Theo and his friends. Jamie and Michelle had been friends since childhood, much like Bill and Ryan. Kylee had met them in middle school and they had been close ever since.

Theo found himself second-guessing almost everything he said. For someone who had spent a good amount of time drifting through life, he was suddenly quite focused. He wanted Kylee to like him, and it seemed like she did. Of course, Theo thought, it’s not like he hadn’t misread those kinds of things before.

The girls followed them to the arcade. Bill wowed Michelle by defeating the robotic arm wrestling game, while Theo and Kylee played skee-ball and air hockey. Ryan went from machine to machine, playing all the fighting games he could find. Mark and Jamie were nowhere to be found. Theo knew what that meant; Mark was not known for wasting time when he found a girl he liked.

Theo was one point away from defeating Kylee in air hockey. He intentionally gave up the next two points. “Are you letting me win?” Kylee asked with a smile.

“No…” Theo couldn’t help but smile back. It was amazing just how much he liked Kylee. She was gorgeous, sure, but he actually wanted to talk to her and not let himself drift away into his thoughts like he usually did.

Kylee won the last point without any help. Theo walked around the table and high-fived her in a show of good-sportsmanship. As the group all headed for the exit, Theo made a calculated gamble. He stuck out his hand, intentionally brushed it against Kylee’s, and breathed a sigh of relief when she closed hers around his.

On the walk back to the parking lot, Theo took time to marvel at how much fun he was having. Mark and Jamie had found them outside the arcade and were laughing it up loudly. Mark’s arm was around Jamie’s waist. By contrast, Bill walked next to Michelle, keeping a small distance between them. Bill was always so nervous when he met a girl he liked. Theo couldn’t help but smile.

The girls were staying at Jamie’s mom’s place not far from the Sea Son’s Motel. Somewhere in the conversation it was decided that they would all go back to the motel to hang out and see where the night went.

Theo sat in the back of Jamie’s Mazda with Kylee. Mark sat up front in the passenger seat. Ryan drove the Accord, with Bill and Michelle in the backseat. Bill kept the same small gap between him and Michelle.

Kylee leaned over and whispered in his ear. “Let’s go for a walk when we get back.” Theo looked at her as she brushed back that errant piece of hair. A walk sounded like a very good idea.

When the cars were parked, Theo and Kylee walked up on the boards leaving the others to their own fun. “So,” Theo said, “tell me something interesting about you.”

Kylee shrugged. “I don’t know; I’m not really all that interesting.”

Theo took her hand. “I can’t imagine that. Well, what are you planning to do this summer?”

“I have a job at the pharmacy a couple minutes from my house. I do gift-wrapping and help people find greeting cards. See? You’ve found a really interesting girl.”

Theo smiled. “I happen to think it’s fascinating. I mean, I’ve always wanted to know how to tie one of those fancy curly bows.”

“Oh it’s very simple, you take scissors and…” Kylee raised an eyebrow. “Are you making fun of me?”

“Maybe…a little?”

Kylee grinned. “Okay, I’ll remember that.” She walked over to the railing and pulled herself up on top of the metal bar. “So what do you do, funny man?”

Theo looked toward the water. “I don’t really do much right now, I mean, I hang with the guys and I’m obviously thinking about college. I just haven’t figured out exactly what I want to do.” He turned back to Kylee. His eyes wandered over her body and focused on her lean legs in short jean shorts, perched on the railing. He returned his gaze to her face. Making eye contact with Kylee was a challenge he hadn’t expected.

“You’ll get there,” Kylee said. “Just enjoy the summer.”

“Oh I am,” Theo said. “It’s off to a great start.”

Theo stepped in front of Kylee and she nudged him playfully with her foot. He wrapped his arms around her and lifted her off the bar. With a grin she shoved him backwards and ran for the stairs leading to the beach. “Come on!” she called.

Theo, captivated, shed his sandals and followed Kylee on to the sand. He chased her down to the water where she splashed in the edge of the tide. Kylee’s silhouette in the moonlight beckoned to him. He reached out and pulled her around. This time she didn’t push him away.

Chapter 2

Theo felt Kylee’s lips against his. His arms were secure around her waist and she wrapped hers around his neck. He was so lost in the experience, so overwhelmed by the force of nature that was this new girl, that he didn’t hear the low rumbling on the horizon.

A louder series of booms in the distance made Kylee pull away. “What was that?”

“I have no idea,” Theo said, pulling her back toward him. “Maybe a plane breaking the sound barrier or something. I think there’s an airport near…” A massive, echoing bang interrupted him.

The sky lit up with a series of flashes emanating both from miles behind the condos along the boardwalk and far out over the ocean. The rumbling continued and began to intensify. Theo’s ears were ringing. “Okay, not a plane!”

Kylee was holding her head. “What? I can’t hear anything!”

Well, thought Theo, the noise took her hearing too, so at least I’m not having a stroke or something.

The ground began to shake, vibrating like a massive motor. The sand shifted around Theo’s feet as he stumbled toward Kylee who was struggling to stay upright. The ocean began to churn and the waves rolled higher up the shore. Theo looked at the frothy surf reflecting the flashes of light in the sky. He took Kylee by the shoulder and pointed to the boardwalk. Run.

They took off together, bobbing and staggering through the agitated sands. Small explosions and booms intermingled with pulses of light as they ran, and through it all, that roar of an ancient machine suddenly and angrily awakened. They made it onto the boardwalk, which seemed to be holding strong against the shaking ground.

Kylee leaned with her hands on her knees as she caught her breath. Theo was fascinated by how calm she was continuing to be in what was, clearly, a pretty messed up situation. He spun around to face her and the beach and gestured with arms wide. “What the hell is going on?” he asked.

Kylee read his lips and began to answer when her eyes suddenly widened. “Look out!” She dove toward him and tackled him onto the boards. Composing himself on the shaking wooden structure and not ignorant of the light but firm weight on top of him, Theo looked to the left. Where he had been standing a second earlier a deck chair was on its side, bent out of shape. The chair and the boards around it were covered with a crumbled concrete. Looking up, Theo saw the missing piece of the third floor balcony.

His mind fought to process what he was experiencing. Somehow, this earthquake, or whatever it was, had torqued and bent the motel enough to crack the concrete, surely in many places. The fact that the chair had tumbled through the opening and fallen forward seemed to imply that the land was tilting toward the ocean, yet the waves were coming closer with increasing ferocity.

Theo looked into Kylee’s eyes and mouthed “thank you.” She nodded and rolled off him. The two of them sat side-by-side, afraid to stand as the shaking increased. Theo had been able to hear, or maybe it was feel, the bass of the rumbling, but now he could hear the rumbling more clearly, and other sounds. Sirens in the distance mingled with an electrical crackling.

“It’s an earthquake, right?” Kylee asked. She was surveying the scene with an impressive calm but her eyes conveyed concern.

“I don’t know; I’ve never been in one before. It seems like there’s a lot more happening.”

“Yeah, I noticed.” She pointed down the boardwalk to where the casinos and the Pier Mall flickered and sputtered in the distance. “Whatever’s happening is going to blow the power out soon.” As if she had magically decreed it, the lights went out one by one.

“Great. What we needed was some darkness. At least we’ve got the weird lights in the sky.”

Theo stood up and offered Kylee his hand. “We need to get off the boards. We have to find the others.”

“Yeah, you’re right. Let’s go.”

Holding on to each other, Theo and Kylee left the boardwalk and wandered down the side street to Atlantic Avenue. The main street was a disaster. Cars were abandoned in the middle of the road, though some had rammed into buildings and poles along the sides of the street. Fire hydrants spouted water into the air. “Oh my God,” Kylee said. “Look at the people.”

There were people lying unconscious or worse in the street and on the sidewalks. Others, clearly alive, clung to the ground in fear. Still others wandered aimlessly, stumbling against the roll of the earth. A middle aged Hispanic man, his eyes wide saucers of panic, approached them. He muttered, “No, no, no…” over and over. He was bleeding from a cut on his shoulder and his tanktop was stained red. As he passed Theo and Kylee, he tripped and fell. The man scrambled to his feet and ran on, continuing his refrain. “No, no, no…”

Theo put his arm around Kylee. He still hadn’t quite processed everything that had happened, certainly not the part where he was almost killed and had been saved by this amazing girl he had just met hours earlier.

“So what do you think? Is this Hell?” the voice behind them was shaken but still definitely Bill. Theo turned around and was relieved to see that his friend appeared to be unharmed.

“I don’t know,” said Theo. “It’s something bad, that’s for sure.” Just then something occurred to him. “I left my cell phone in the car! Maybe we can call somebody and find out what’s going on.”

“Oh crap,” said Kylee, “I left mine on the beach. It’s underwater by now.”

“Wouldn’t help anyway,” said Bill, holding up his phone. “There is absolutely no service. Not even one bar. Even the GPS signal is all wonky. Last time I tried it said I’m in the middle of Springville, Utah.”

“I’d take Utah right about now,” said Theo.

“Well, ok, so what other option do we have?” asked Kylee. She gestured to the wreckage all over the street. “We can’t drive anywhere while the ground is shaking. Besides, there are too many people all over the place.”

Bill hunched down as another small, concussive blast sounded “Ryan had this idea that he could get a signal from on the roof. He tried the motel and got nothing. He and Michelle are trying the building next door. It’s much higher.”

Theo nodded. Leave it to Ryan to come up with some tech idea that might actually work. “And Mark and Jamie?”

“Won’t leave the motel. Mark thinks the world is coming to an end. It’s that crap we saw on television earlier.”

Theo shrugged. “Look around you man, can you honestly say he’s wrong?”

The rumbling intensified again. “Get down guys,” Bill said, “I think another shockwave is coming.”

The three of them hit the ground and covered their ears. Theo closed his eyes but could still see the light of the biggest flash yet blooming in the darkness of his eyelids. A second later the boom arrived. Even with his hands over his ears, he could feel his poor, battered eardrums take a hit. Suddenly the ground kicked up. Theo felt himself tossed into the air at least a foot and tried hard to roll when he landed. He bumped his shoulder a little but was otherwise fine.

Theo sat up and saw Bill and Kylee looking horrified in the direction of the motel. The old building had shaken loose from its foundation in the sand and now the slow, continuous shaking of the earth was releasing clouds of dust and chunks of concrete. The building swayed methodically.

Bill got to his feet and Theo and Kylee followed. Bill ran toward the motel. “We have to get them out of there!” He made it ten feet when a massive wave slammed over the boardwalk and struck the buildings along the shoreline. The Sea Sons motel groaned and finally gave in to the elements. Theo felt time slow to a crawl. He saw the motel lean away from the wave and fall, imploding in a cloud of mud and dust.

Kylee screamed and Bill dropped to his knees. Theo grabbed the back of Bill’s shirt and, with strength he didn’t know he possessed, lifted his friend to his feet and dragged him away from the collapsed building. Bill snapped to his senses and the three of them ran across Atlantic Avenue to the far side. The wave flooded the street and then sucked backwards toward the ocean. Though some dust rose high into the turbulent sky, most of the debris was stopped by the building behind where the motel had stood, or fell into the retreating wave.

Similar dust clouds in the distance told of other collapses and a vast destruction that they had only begun to experience. Theo kept his arms around Kylee as she wept. Bill only stared toward the former motel with a blank expression.

Just then, the ground stopped trembling. Theo looked around and saw other people shaking themselves off and taking cautious steps. The grinding motor sound lessened until it appeared that it too had ceased. Though sirens and car alarms still rang out far away, the overall lack of sound was a shock to his ears. Theo stepped in front of Bill and Kylee. He had to speak; had to do something to break the silence.

“Guys, I don’t know what happened here. I’m not sure anybody knows. I don’t know if this is over or just the beginning. We don’t know for sure what happened to Mark and Jamie. We don’t, Bill! But what I do know is that we need to find some place to hide for the night. Some place safe. Bill, you said Ryan and Michelle are at the building down the street. We know that damned wave hit it too, but maybe it’s ok. I think… I think we should go there now.”

Theo paused and watched astonished as Kylee and Bill got up and started to walk in the direction of the tall condominium. His experience being a leader was somewhat nonexistent. He had felt compelled to say something but truly hadn’t expected the others to jump to follow his suggestion.

The condo building was much larger than the Sea Sons motel had been before its collapse. It had, as Theo suspected, also fared much better. Theo figured Ryan and Michelle had entered through the parking garage but the entrance was partially blocked by a large, yellow bar with “14’ maximum height” printed in large black type. The bar had fallen off one of its two chains and landed on a car that was stopped in the entrance. The water reached to the top of the car’s tires, but the vehicle appeared to be empty.

“Should we move that bar out of the way?” Bill asked as he walked to the entrance.

“No,” Theo said, surprising himself again with his quick and decisive reply. “It’s too dark in there and we don’t know what we’d be stumbling into. We need to find another way to get to the stairs.”

“Well this won’t work,” said Bill as he pulled on the lobby door. Locked.

“I have an idea,” Kylee said, “if one of you gentlemen would give me a hand.” She ran toward the boardwalk side of the building, slowing as the pooled water from the monster wave got deeper.

Bill and Theo followed. Kylee reached the end of the building where some fortunate condo owners had balconies that looked out over the beach. Not so fortunate anymore, Theo thought.

“Ok, someone needs to help me up here.” Kylee pointed to the second floor balcony. Bill splashed over to her and positioned himself to launch Kylee upwards. She jumped off his hands and grabbed the ledge of the balcony. With impressive strength she pulled herself to a crouching position. The balcony door was shattered, as were most windows and doors they could see. Kylee disappeared into the darkness of the condo. Theo had enough time to start to think this was a very bad idea. They had no clue who or what was in that apartment.

There was a click of a bolt rotating and Theo turned to see Kylee emerge from the lobby door. “I know,” she said, “I’m awesome.” Theo smiled. He had to agree.

Emergency lights had powered on in the stairwell, but several had failed either from the damage to the building, the moisture from the wave or just lack of maintenance. Either way, there was just enough light to make sure they didn’t fall on the slippery concrete.

The stairwell seemed endless. Theo lost track of the number of floors as they climbed. Glancing at the building from the outside he had guessed there were maybe twenty but as exhausted as he was it seemed like more.

Finally, they arrived at the door to the roof. Theo had a moment to consider what they would do if the exit was locked, or maybe sealed by damage, but then Bill pushed on it and it clicked open.

The roof was shockingly free of debris. The wave had only reached the first few floors of the building, and the earthquake seemed to have had little effect. Theo tried to spot Ryan and Michelle but could see very little. The stars had been subdued by the debris and smoke in the air.

“Oh man I thought you guys were dead!” Ryan’s voice called from the shadows.

“Ryan!” Bill shouted. “Where the hell are you?”

“Behind you.” Ryan stepped out from the blackness. Michelle was hiding behind him. Bill made his way over to them. Theo observed that whatever spark had existed between his friend and Michelle earlier tonight had been extinguished by the trauma of what had transpired. He glanced at Kylee and wondered for the first time where they would go from here. Where would any of them go?

Ryan eyed them with dawning realization. “Where’s Mark?”

“He and Jamie were in the Sea Sons when it…” Bill’s voice trailed off as he turned away from the group.

“Oh no.” Ryan’s face fell.

Theo stepped forward and took Ryan by the shoulders. “We don’t know anything yet. We aren’t even a hundred percent sure they were still in there and if they were there’s a chance they could be okay. We had to get away from the tidal wave and we haven’t been able to go after them.”

Kylee put her arm around Michelle. Bill was sitting on the roof a few feet away. He was lost in his thoughts.

Theo released Ryan once he had determined his friend was processing everything in a reasonable way. “Bill said you came up here to look for a cell signal. Any luck?”

“Not even close. I figure either something is blocking the signal within some radius that we can’t determine yet or something took out the nearby towers.”

“You think?” Kylee said, a little smirk crossing her face, “Maybe it was, I don’t know, the earthquake?”

Ryan didn’t seem to see the humor. “The earthquake may have been the particular culprit, but I think it, and the tidal wave, are symptoms of something bigger at work here.”

“Okay,” said Kylee, sitting down in a cross-legged position, “what do we do?”

Theo saw her deep eyes looking at him hopefully. “There’s not much we can do now but wait for the morning. Ryan, how many people are in this building? Any idea?”

“I’m sure there are a few refugees hanging around, but by and large most of the people are gone. We saw them streaming out when all the craziness started. And besides, the ones on the first few floors, well…” He didn’t have to continue.

“Fair enough,” said Theo. He walked over to Bill and extended his hand. “I think the higher we are, the safer, for now at least. Let’s go down to the top floor and see if we can find a vacancy.”

The group of weary teens made their way down to the highest hallway. Ryan used his iPhone’s LED light to illuminate a few feet in front of them. They all tried various doors and found them locked. Theo was about to suggest that they break in when the edge of the small light found a door that stood partially ajar.

They cautiously entered the apartment. Moving in a tight pack, they explored each room. Pictures had fallen off the wall and shattered on the marble in the living room. Dishes were scattered and broken all over the kitchen. Mostly, though, the place was in good order considering the unusual disaster that had befallen it.

Theo suggested that the residents of this penthouse suite had bolted and forgot to close the door. It seemed a plausible enough explanation. Ryan claimed a guest room down a marble hallway. He left his phone light on in the center of the living room. To Theo’s surprise, Michelle slowly followed Ryan. He turned and saw Bill also watching as Michelle departed. Bill sat dejected on the living room couch and pulled his feet up.

Theo felt terrible for Bill. The night’s events had hit him hard. But then, whatever this was had impacted all of them. It occurred to Theo that he had no way to get in touch with his family. They couldn’t know that he was alive and unhurt and he knew nothing about their safety. Had this thing hit Philadelphia? That thought led itself to another question, one that followed him as he entered the master bedroom with Kylee and curled up in the king size bed with her in his arms.

As Kylee dozed off, Theo stared at the seemingly endless darkness above him. Finally sleep came to him, and as he drifted away that one thought kept floating through his mind. If we are in the midst of a huge disaster, where is the media to cover it? Where are the National Guard helicopters? Where is everybody?

Chapter 3

Waking once in the middle of the night, Theo had considered the possibility that somehow dawn was never going to arrive. Maybe the sun itself had gone out along with the bright lights of the boardwalk. When he woke the next time though, sunlight was trickling through the blinds on the bedroom windows.

Theo slowly got out of bed, making sure not to disturb Kylee, and went to the bathroom. He pressed the handle and the toilet gave a weak, brief flush. Theo shook his head. He should have realized that the plumbing wasn’t likely to work. He turned on the sink and got just enough water out of the pipes to wash his hands before the tap ran out. He walked out to the living room and saw that Bill was already up and gone. Ryan and Michelle’s door was closed.

Theo left the apartment and found his way back to the stairwell. When he emerged on the roof the sunlight temporarily blinded him. He blinked until his vision cleared. Bill was sitting on the edge of the building with his legs hanging in the air two hundred or so feet above the street.

Theo walked intentionally loud to signal his approach. “There’s no way they survived.” Bill spoke without turning.

“You don’t know that,” Theo said. He looked out over the edge. The beach was wet but the ocean seemed to be behaving normally. The boardwalk was damaged in some places but overall not too bad. The buildings along the boardwalk were a mixed bag. Some, especially the taller condos, were structurally intact, at least to the naked eye. Many of the smaller structures had suffered tremendous damage or had been wiped out completely. The dust clouds had settled to a height of maybe twenty feet.

“What I know,” said Bill, “is that Mark was in that building and the damned thing is just rubble and dust.”

“And what if you’re right? That doesn’t change the fact that we need to get home and find out what the hell happened. There’s some reason that nobody is down there digging through the debris. Maybe they somehow just don’t know. That means if we want to save Mark and anyone else who may be trapped or hurt we need to get out of here and get them some help!”

Bill sighed. He looked exhausted. Theo wondered if his friend had slept at all. “I guess you’re right man; I’m just scared. I don’t understand any of this.” He swung his legs back onto the roof and stood up. Theo nodded his agreement. Who could possibly understand what had happened- what was still happening?

When Theo and Bill got back to the apartment, the others were all up. Michelle was clinging to Ryan. Theo locked eyes with Kylee and she ran over to him. “Have you guys figured out what our next move should be?”

“Theo thinks our best hope at saving ourselves and…you know… is to get out of this damned town and get help.” Bill spoke from the foyer and he kept eyeing the door. He was ready to face whatever came next.

The five teens descended the dark stairwell and emerged into the hazy daylight below. Ribbons of dust floated in the current of sea air. The street and sidewalk, built as they were on tightly packed sand, had warped and cracked from the earthquake. Theo led his friends carefully back onto Atlantic Avenue.

They stopped and surveyed the destruction. More than a few bodies lined the streets. Michelle turned toward Ryan and began to cry, but Theo was impressed to see Kylee carefully compose herself and remain calm.

“I thought you said there were people all over the street.” Ryan said. “I don’t see anybody.” He gulped. “Not anybody alive anyway.”

Theo shrugged. “My guess is many of them got themselves to shelter just like we did. By now maybe most of them are on their way home.”

After some debate, they agreed to cut straight back toward the bay side of the island. That way they could get some idea of what was happening on the far end of the wetlands while they walked to the bridge.

They passed by a convenience store. Although the store had survived the earthquake and been nowhere near the tidal wave, the glass door and windows were broken. Bill ran across the parking lot and looked in. “Some of the shelves are empty. People seriously stole from a store in the middle of all this?”

Theo had seen plenty of news footage of looting during chaos. This break-in didn’t surprise him at all. “People do crazy stuff. It’s just one more reason to get out of here. Let’s keep moving.”

They left the raided store behind them and crossed Ventnor Avenue. One more side street would lead to the wetlands. Theo looked at his friends. They all had similar looks of grim resolve. He promised himself that he would see them all to safety and then do whatever he could to get help for Mark and Jamie.

The teens came out of the small street and onto Winchester Avenue. Theo walked in the lead. He scanned the horizon, expecting to see smoke rising in the distance. Surely the damage extended beyond the narrow strip of island. He was shocked that the bright light of the morning sun seemed unimpeded by any smoke. He squinted his eyes against the sun and looked again. The sky was bright blue. Below that…

Theo’s jaw dropped. Ryan walked up next to him. “What’s wrong?” He looked up and the widening of his eyes conveyed that he saw exactly what was wrong. Not only was there no smoke rising from the houses and shopping centers across the wetlands, there were no houses, no centers and no wetlands. The ocean waters lapped against the side of the raised street and in some areas the waves pushed onto the road leaving wet foam.

“I don’t understand, where is everything?” Ryan was backing away slowly. Michelle ran up to him and they embraced, frightened. Bill and Kylee approached Theo. Theo tightened his jaw. He had promised to save his friends, but what could have prepared him for this?

He suggested they walk down to the bridge anyway. They proceeded in silence, each processing his or her own thoughts about the impossible situation. As Theo expected, the bridge was gone. The twisted remnants of the steel beams jutted out of the ground like crooked teeth. Beyond that, nothing.

Bill darted forward. Before Theo could stop him, he jumped off the edge and into the ocean. With no time to think, Theo jumped in after him. As he splashed into the warm water, it occurred to him that his keys and wallet were in his pockets. Well, nothing to be done about that now. Bill was swimming ahead. There was no chance of catching him, especially with a few seconds’ head start. Fortunately, Bill came to a stop. He dropped below the surface of the water and was gone for a few frightening seconds before he emerged facing Theo.

“The ground drops out.” Bill shouted back. His eyes were wide. “It was barely more than waist height for a while and now I can’t even feel the bottom. We are way out in the ocean, man; this is the real thing.”

“Okay, just do me a favor and come back. We’ll figure this out.”

Bill threw his hands in the air as if to say “how exactly will we do that?” but he started paddling back to land.

The teens wandered back toward the center of town. By now other survivors were emerging from the buildings. They were heading in different directions, but Theo felt sure that eventually they would all discover what he and his friends had seen for themselves.

Michelle pointed out that they hadn’t had anything to eat in a long time. Theo hadn’t even noticed how hungry he was. Now that the issue was raised, he could feel the pangs. “Let’s see what’s left in the convenience store before it gets totally emptied.” He took Kylee’s hand. “Then, we can walk to the park and have a picnic.” He smiled, hoping that his forced positivity would be infectious.

The store still had some supplies, but Theo and his friends were hardly the only ones with the idea to do some discount shopping. Other survivors browsed the emptying aisles. Theo noticed that many of the refrigerated units were still full. Nobody had much use for frozen goods that were no longer frozen.

The teens gathered up cans of tuna, loaves of bread and warm sodas. On the walk to the park, Theo took Bill aside. He had decided that while Ryan had more technical knowledge about a variety of things, it might be best to keep Bill focused on a purposeful goal.

“We have some things we’ve got to figure out,” Theo started. He assumed this was better than “We’ve got a serious problem.”

“Yeah,” said Bill. “If the other food stores are being hit like the one we just left, there won’t be enough to last us very long.”

Theo was glad to hear that Bill was thinking clearly. “Agreed. Also, and this may be an even bigger issue, there’s no power. No way to keep food cold, no air conditioning, no lights at night.”

Bill nodded. “What can we do?”

“I don’t think there’s much we can do to fix the bigger problems. My concern right now is our survival. We have to get out of here. I’ve got a few ideas. We know that the bridge across to the bay is gone, and the bay itself is either gone or somehow too far away to see.”

“Right. How the hell is that possible?”

“I don’t know. But just because the one way off is gone doesn’t mean we can’t find another way. The AC Expressway ends in the city and that’s a much bigger bridge. Maybe it’s still working.”

“Ok,” Bill agreed. “Let’s try the city after lunch. But what if that doesn’t work?”

“Not sure.” They had reached the park and Theo sat down on a bench. “I thought maybe we could take a boat?”

Over lunch Theo tried to keep the conversation light, as if none of the craziness around them was actually happening. He asked questions to keep the talk moving. He was surprised to find out that Michelle actually had a fairly good sense of humor. She was one of those people who responded well to direct questions but was hesitant to jump into a conversation without an invitation.

Theo continued to be fascinated by Kylee’s determined calm. He could see that in another situation he would be excited to be her boyfriend. Right now though he needed to focus on making sure they got to safety, preferably before nighttime. If they got out of this, he would think about such normal things as dating.

Ryan was the first to turn the conversation back to the predicament at hand. “So, I hate to be a downer but has anyone figured out how we can get the hell out of here?”

Theo shared his plan of escaping through Atlantic City. As he spoke, he noticed Ryan wrinkling his face. “Something wrong Ry?”

“I don’t know, it’s just… well, your argument about the bridges makes sense. I mean, yeah, the AC bridge is a lot bigger and sturdier construction. But, the thing is, we can’t see the land on the other side! If something sank the coast, I don’t know, like a bomb or something, then no bridge is going to get us to something that isn’t there. I don’t care how strong the bridge is.”

They sat silently and considered Ryan’s point. “I think we should still head down there.” Bill said. “It’s a whole city, there must be some people there who have an answer.”

Theo seconded the plan. After finishing their meal, they cut down to the boardwalk and started east toward Atlantic City. Several minutes later, the casinos emerged from the distant fog. Without any lights, the enormous buildings loomed ominously over the beach like sleeping giants.

It wasn’t long before they came to a part of the boardwalk that was filled with debris. The beach was too wet for travelling so they walked back out to the street. As they passed the sign welcoming them to Atlantic City, a voice called out. “Kids! Hey kids, wait where you are!” As accustomed as they had become to silence, the teens were shocked by this new voice.

A police officer was walking over to them. He introduced himself as Officer Menendez of the AC police department. Officer Menendez’s voice was calm and mildly authoritative but something in his eyes told Theo that the policeman was just as frightened as everyone else.

“Where are you all headed?” Menendez asked. Theo explained the plan to check out the bridge.

“I’ll save you the trouble. There’s no bridge.”

Kylee asked if anyone had tried a boat yet.

“We’ve had the idea,” said Menendez, “but we don’t have any boats. Anything on the bay side got washed away somewhere and anything on the ocean side was destroyed by the wave that hit last night.”

Bill spoke up. There was a hint of panic and more than a hint of anger in his voice. “Well, then what exactly are you doing? We have friends who are trapped in one of the collapsed motels and we’re all stuck on this damned island and you’re the first policeman we’ve even seen. What are you doing to help us?”

Menendez raised his hands, palms out in a defensive gesture. “Whoa, buddy. Let’s not get all aggressive here, okay? I’ll level with you. We have a bunch of people who are hurt, and some who are trapped. Most of the departments from the smaller towns have nobody showing up for work. Even in AC we’re very shorthanded. We’ve got several reports of mischief breaking out and have sent officers to those locations. Others are trying to get in contact with someone on the mainland. So trust me, kid, we’re doing the best we can to keep order and to investigate what’s happening.”

The officer’s radio crackled. A muffled voice spoke through the speaker. “All ACPD required to report to headquarters immediately!”

Menendez gave a weak smile. “You see? Somebody high up has figured something out. Hang in there, kids.”

Theo thought that Officer Menendez was trying to convince himself as much as the rest of them. The teens watched the policeman walk off in silence. Kylee looked at Theo. “So, no bridge and no boats. What next?”

Theo looked at Bill. His friend was lost in thought again and his eyes stared at the ground. “Well,” Theo said, “I thought we might go by the motel.”

The ground around what was once the Sea Sons motel had turned into mud: a combination of flooding from the tidal wave and debris from the fallen structure. Ryan and the girls stayed on the boardwalk as Theo and Bill carefully approached the building.

The wave had knocked the motel backwards and the far side of the building had pancaked as the supports gave out. To Theo’s amazement, the rooms closer to the ocean had avoided total collapse, though they were all very damaged and turned almost on their sides.

Bill led the way, climbing the twisted railings like they were an insane jungle gym. Theo followed, his heart pounding with worry. It took some time to maneuver over to what had been their room. Bill jumped from the railing to the angled doorframe. The door was ajar and gravity held it wide open. Bill disappeared through the opening.

Theo made the leap to the doorway and looked inside. It was like peering into a funhouse mirror. From his position sitting on the side of the doorframe, Theo looked down to see Bill squatting on the couch, which was now resting on the wall. The whole room was turned on its side and the furniture had slid down with some force into the wall below.

“I called for Mark and Jamie but nobody’s answering,” said Bill.

“They could be hurt,” Theo said. “We’ve got to check the back room.”

Bill looked up with dismay. Theo saw the problem: With the room almost ninety degrees on its side, the door to the back bedroom was up near the ceiling. Bill was way too low, and Theo, though at the right height, was way too far away.

“I don’t think I can make it,” said Bill.

Theo studied the room. “There’s one shot. If you lift me up I think I can grab onto the wall unit and from there I can reach the door.”

“Okay, I’m willing to try anything.”

Theo carefully lowered himself down onto the chair below him and hopped to the couch. Bill was already walking along the wall, which creaked and groaned. Theo watched as Bill avoided the remnants of the old television and made sure to do the same. Bill positioned himself and Theo climbed up off him as Kylee had done the day before. He reached out and caught on to the end of the wall unit. Pulling himself up was much more difficult than Kylee had made it look.

Theo worked his way up to the doorway and looked down into the bathroom and the bedroom beyond. There was nobody in either room. Theo turned back to Bill. “They aren’t here. This is a really good thing, man, they could be totally fine…somewhere.”

Bill nodded solemnly. “Okay Theo, come on back down and let’s get out of here.”

Theo sat on the doorframe, and dropped to the wall unit. His feet hit the wood and with a loud crack the side panel of the wall unit broke lose. Theo tumbled forward and fell to the angled floor, falling from there to the wall. The drywall crumbled and tore where his body hit, but Theo came to a stop.

Bill, his eyes wide with shock, helped Theo to his feet. “This place is a deathtrap. We need to leave now!”

Together, they stumbled back across the jumble of broken and misplaced furniture and luggage, and using the big red chair they were able to climb out of the room. Shaken as he was, Theo took extra time and care with each step as he and Bill worked their way down to the ground.

Ryan, Kylee and Michelle met them on the boardwalk. They wore identical expressions of concern as they took in Theo’s battered, dust covered body. Kylee ran to him. “Are you okay? What happened?”

“Just a nasty fall. I’m fine other than some scrapes and bumps. Mark and Jamie are not in there. There’s no sign that they were there when all this craziness went down.”

Theo was surprised when Michelle spoke. “That’s awesome, but where could they be?”

“I don’t know,” he said. “We have to assume they are out there and doing what they can. At this point we need to worry about ourselves. It’s getting dark again.”

The five teens left the motel behind them and returned to their penthouse. After eating some leftovers from lunch, they retired to their rooms. Ryan had kept his phone off all day to conserve battery power, but after the previous night he only had enough juice to run the LED flashlight for an hour. Before long, the teens were plunged into the darkness of night.

Chapter 4

The next morning Theo and his friends left the condo and found that order had begun to reassert itself in the most disturbing of ways. A trash truck was parked in the center of the intersection and people wearing surgical masks and gloves were hauling bodies off the street and tossing them into the truck.

Theo turned away from the sight and the others did the same. He looked at Kylee and saw tears running down her face. With the same composure and resolve she had exhibited since this chaos began, she sniffled once, wiped a hand across her face and walked over to him.

“So,” said Bill, breaking the silence, “it looks like the authorities are finally stepping up and doing something. Maybe we can get out of here today!”

“Not to be a downer,” said Ryan, “but there’s still the small issue of us being in the middle of the ocean.”

“Dude,” said Bill, “that’s what they make planes and stuff for. We aren’t in outer space.”

Theo was happy to see that Bill was regaining a little of his former personality. Finding the empty motel room had given him a little hope. Hope is good, Theo reckoned, but escape would be better.

They walked down to the convenience store on Michelle’s quiet suggestion that finding something for breakfast might be a good way to start the day. Theo still couldn’t quite figure her out. Michelle spoke mostly in whispered side conversations with Ryan or Kylee.

For that matter, Theo didn’t really understand the dynamic of the relationship between Michelle and Ryan. Then again, he didn’t understand whatever there was with him and Kylee. Since the world fell apart at the seams the two of them had stood side by side and comforted each other, and they had shared a bed both nights, but that was it. Did that make her his girlfriend? Theo figured the fact that he was even stopping to consider this was a good sign. Maybe a little hope was helping him, too.

As they approached the convenience store, Theo saw two police cars emblazoned with “POLICE” and “Ventnor City” stationed at the ends of the parking lot. The store itself was boarded up and inaccessible. In the lot, a table had been erected and a line of survivors approached it one by one. Behind the table, two men in jeans and polo shirts were jotting down information on legal pads and sending those at the head of the line around the side of the building. Though the men were not in any uniform, Theo observed, the firearms at their sides gave them away as the officers from the police cars.

Ryan approached a couple at the back of the line. Both of them appeared to be in their thirties. The woman’s curly hair was unkempt and she had a vacant look in her eyes. The man had what might be part of a t-shirt wrapped around his calf. The shirt had red blotches staining the cotton. The man’s face was ghostly pale. He didn’t look well.

Ryan chatted with the man for a minute. The woman appeared not to see him there. The man punctuated his speech with wide sweeps of his arm. Ryan nodded repeatedly and, after giving the man a reassuring pat on the shoulder, jogged back to his friends. “So, here’s the deal. That guy, Evan, says that the cops here are rationing out food. They’ve got stuff coming from down at the casinos and all but it’s all under the control of the authorities.”

Kylee scrunched her face. “How did the Ventnor cops get their hands on stuff from AC?”

“Apparently,” said Ryan, “the departments are all combined now. At least until this all gets resolved.”

Bill scowled. His earlier enthusiasm was waning. “I don’t see how rationing out food is helping the bigger problem of getting us out of here.”

Theo had an idea. “Let’s get some food, and then we can go to the police headquarters and see who knows what’s being done.” He paused. “Anybody know where the headquarters is?”

“Not a problem,” said Ryan, his hand going to his pocket. “I’ll just… oh, wait.” He awkwardly crossed his arms, as his natural habit, to research anything and everything on his phone, was broken. It occurred to Theo that he couldn’t remember the last time he had gone without his phone for two days. He could bet it had been even longer for Ryan.

The teens got in line behind Evan and the silent woman and waited their turn. Twenty minutes later, they reached the front of the line.

“How many in your party?” asked the officer on the left.

Theo had to fight the urge to laugh. The idea of the five refugee teens as a “party,” as if they were about to dine at a five star restaurant, struck his weary mind as hysterical.

“How many?” the officer asked again.

“Five of us,” said Theo.

The officer jotted something down on the pad in front of him.

“Round the corner. Next?”

They followed the officer’s instructions. Around the back of the convenience store, they were treated to an orange, a pack of saltines and a bottle of water each. The teens decided to eat on the way to the city.

Theo looked at his “party.” None of them had showered or changed in days. Considering everything they had been through since the night of the disaster, they looked okay. The one thing he didn’t like was how each of them seemed lost in his or her own thoughts. There was no camaraderie, and something in Theo’s mind told him that survival might depend on this little group’s members supporting each other.

Theo turned to Michelle. “So… Michelle, what do you do when you’re not trapped on an island?” Michelle laughed and the others followed. Theo laughed with them. He could feel the mood lifting.

Atlantic City had suffered tremendously from the disaster. It occurred to Theo that the city might have been at the center of the earthquake. Many of the shops and small apartments were in ruins. The casinos appeared to have mostly cosmetic damage.

The city had been packed with residents and tourists two nights earlier. Now the streets were full of corpses, most of who, it appeared, had drowned as the tidal wave had flooded the streets. Some of the bodies were bloody and beaten. Theo felt light-headed as he considered the probability that some of the survivors had attacked the others.

The police were out in force, both in uniform and out. Trucks were being loaded with the deceased on every street. The casinos Theo and his friends passed were barricaded. Among the contingent manning the barricades outside Caesar’s Palace was Officer Menendez. Bill saw him first and waved as he approached.

Menendez looked more nervous than when they had first met him. He recognized the teens and gave them a weak smile. “Hi kids, listen, you can’t go in the casino right now.”

“Why not?” asked Bill.

“There’s some… government meetings, I guess you’d say.” Menendez’s eyes darted away as he said this and Theo wondered what it was the officer was keeping from them.

Theo gestured out to the street behind him. “So we hear all this is under some combined police force. Does that mean that someone is figuring out how to get us home?”

Menendez shrugged. His eyes were doing their nervous dance again. “Beats me. Look, you guys are in a tough spot, no doubt. I’m gonna give you some advice. Stay clear of the city. If you’ve got a place to hunker down, do it and wait til somebody gets you when all this is figured out. This place is wild right now, and dangerous, and the guys in them casinos…” Menendez’s voice trailed off as he looked away.

“What guys in the casinos?” asked Theo.

“Nothing,” said Menendez, “didn’t mean to say that. Now just get out of AC, you got it?”

With that, he turned and walked back to the other officers stationed at the barricade.

“What the hell was that?” Bill asked as the teens walked up to the boardwalk.

“He’s hiding something,” said Kylee.

“Oh most definitely,” said Ryan. “There’s something in the casinos that’s got him spooked.”

“He seems pretty spooked by everything,” said Michelle.

Theo listened in silence as they walked. Despite Michelle’s valid point, he agreed that Officer Menendez appeared to be keeping something from them. He had almost said too much and then pulled himself back at the last second. Still, what did it matter? As far as he was concerned, Theo thought, the head of North Korea could be holding meetings up there, and if the end result was that he got to leave this place and go home, it would be just fine.

The teens spent the rest of the day exploring the island. There wasn’t much to see. Most of the city had remained but Ventnor was just a thin strip that went a few streets into Margate and then ended abruptly. The broken avenue ran straight into the ocean. If there was anything left of the towns and barrier islands farther south, Theo and his friends couldn’t see it.

The combined police force was everywhere on the island. By late in the day it seemed all the bodies had been removed from the streets and, presumably, from the buildings. More than once, Theo had shuddered as his gaze went out over the ocean and he thought about the likely final resting place of those poor victims.

Dinner that night was fruit, tuna and a bottle of water. Theo wondered how long he and his friends could continue on such a reduced diet. His stomach gurgled as they climbed the stairs back to their penthouse apartment. He climbed into bed and stared into the darkness as he waited for Kylee to arrive. Finally, he felt her climb into the bed next to him.

“Hey,” she said.

“Hey to you.”

“Well this was an exciting day.”

Theo smiled. “They just get better and better. Island living at its finest.”

Kylee laughed. Theo wished he could see her face. He shifted over in the bed and extended his arm to the side. His hand brushed her hair and she rolled toward him, maneuvering so his arm was supporting her neck.

“So,” Kylee said, “what are you thinking about?”

“I don’t really know. I guess I’m still wondering why nobody has found us. We haven’t seen one plane, and you know the military has satellites that could find us no matter where in the ocean we’ve ended up.”

“I don’t even know how this makes any sense,” said Kylee. “I mean, how could we be out in the ocean? How could all this land just float out like that?”

Theo thought for a moment. “It could be that we didn’t go anywhere. Maybe the water just washed over a bunch of stuff, like maybe global warming made the oceans rise or something like you hear people say might happen.”

“But then that comes back to your point,” said Kylee. “Nobody has found us yet. Even this authority that’s fixing things up and has Officer Menendez all twitchy has no clue where anybody else is or how to get in touch with them.”

“I definitely didn’t plan to spend my summer in a mystery novel,” said Theo.

“Me neither,” said Kylee. “I miss my parents.”

She was silent for a while after that. In the dark silences could stretch on for a long time. Theo’s thoughts turned to his own family. He tried to focus on the best possible scenario, that this disaster hadn’t had any impact near Philadelphia and that all his loved ones were okay. He knew they had to be worried about him and the fact that he couldn’t reach out to them frustrated him endlessly. He decided to break the silence before his thoughts consumed him.

“So… where do you want to go to college?” he asked.

“I’m not sure. I’m supposed to go look sometime in the fall. I was thinking of going out west, just to do something a little different. I might major in journalism. How about you?”

“I haven’t given it too much thought,” Theo said. “It would help if I knew what I wanted to study. I like so many things but I don’t love any of them, you know what I mean?”

Kylee laughed. “Have faith, young man, you’ll figure it out.”

“Thanks for the support,” Theo smirked.

Suddenly, the world went white. Theo shut his eyes against the blinding intrusion. When he opened them, slowly, carefully, he saw that the light fixture above the bed was on. He heard his friends stirring around the apartment and his confused brain finally registered that the power was back.

He sat up and Kylee sat up next to him. She was smiling her radiant smile. “Say what you will, whoever’s in charge knows what they are doing!” She got up and walked toward the door.

“What are you doing?” Theo asked?

Kylee raised an eyebrow. Her smile hadn’t faded. “I want to celebrate,” she said. She reached out and turned off the light.

Chapter 5

The next few days went by in a blur. Theo felt more and more of his attention and thoughts shift to Kylee. The craziness and loneliness of the island was lessening, as the repetition of the days became the new “normal.” Each day followed the same pattern: meals at one of the police ration stations set up around town, the rest of the time spent exploring and hanging out. Two days after the return of the power (which appeared to have heralded the return of working plumbing) Bill found a Frisbee. Though it wasn’t the one they had lost and though it made them think once again of their missing friends, the teens were soon lost in the fun of running around the beach, diving in the sand for near misses and chasing each other into the waves.

Two weeks after what the survivors had begun to call “the Event,” the teens lined up for lunch outside what had been a clothing store. A man at the front was conversing with one of the officers. The man’s clothes hung on his slender frame; a testament to the limited calories available for the survivors. He was clearly agitated. The officer answered him calmly but Theo noticed the cop’s hand was in close proximity to his firearm.

“I need more food! I’m hungry all the time!” The man shouted.

“Bob, you need to relax,” said the officer. “I know you’re hungry, but so is everyone and there’s only so much food. There’s a plan in place but you’ve gotta hang in there and play by the rules.”

“Screw you and screw the rules!” yelled Bob. He lunged forward and knocked the clipboards off the table. The survivors in line murmured to each other. The officer looked to his partner and nodded solemnly. The partner drew his gun, walked up behind Bob and cracked the butt of the weapon across the frail man’s skull. Bob dropped in a heap. Two more officers came from inside the store and dragged the unconscious man inside.

Theo looked at his friends. Their eyes were wide and nobody said a word.

“Next in line!” called the officer, resuming his business as if nothing had transpired.

As the line shambled along, Bill drew close to Theo’s ear. “Did you see that crap?” he asked.

“Yeah,” said Theo, “didn’t seem too fair to that guy.”

“Damn right it wasn’t fair,” said Bill. He looked heated. “I’m gonna tell that cop that they can’t treat people like that.”

“Don’t say anything!” said Theo. “You want to get your head caved in too?”

“Dude,” said Bill, “They can’t abuse people like that!”

“Just stay calm for now. You go rushing in and nothing’s going to happen but you getting hurt.”

“Fine.”

Theo breathed a sigh of relief. He didn’t know why it was that his friends seemed to listen to him but if it meant he could keep Bill or any of them safe he was glad to have it be the case.

Sitting down with his food, Theo saw that printed fliers had been distributed with breakfast.

Town Hall Meeting

Boardwalk Hall

Mayor Lucas and Deputy Mayor Tiberius to report on new Developments.

Thursday, 7 PM.

Kylee grabbed a flyer. “Well, I know where I’ll be Thursday night.”

Michelle looked unsure. “You think we should go to this?”

“Why not? Kylee asked. “It’s not like we’d be missing primetime TV. We should know what’s happening.”

Theo, a little reluctant to weigh in so obviously on Kylee’s side, encouraged a discussion. The teens decided it was best to attend, if not for the information, at least to break up the monotony.

As the week passed, Theo’s excitement for the meeting grew. He began to hope that maybe the mayor could tell them what happened, and maybe he even had a plan to get them home. Theo could tell the others were excited too. Even Bill, who had been a little sullen since the incident between the officers and the frail, angry man named Bob, looked optimistic.

Thursday evening, the teens walked off the boardwalk and joined the masses moving toward the entrance to Boardwalk Hall. The population was a wide-ranging sample of races, ages, shapes and sizes. The only constant was loose articles of clothing hanging on frames slightly sunken from the lack of nutrition.

They were ushered by what Theo assumed must be police officers out of uniform into the main hall. As the crowd filled the seats, the hum of excited conversation radiated around the arena. Clearly nobody knew exactly what to expect but all were here on the hopes that some information or plan would be revealed.

A small stage was erected in the center of the arena floor. A single podium was positioned in the middle. On its face were small renderings of the American flag and the blue and white stripes of Atlantic City. As Theo continued to observe the growing crowd, the lights began to dim. The murmurs of chatter were reduced to excited whispers. A spotlight shone brightly on the stage.

“Ladies and Gentlemen,” boomed a voice over the arena sound system, “please welcome to the stage the honorable Mayor Samuel Lucas and Deputy Mayor Paul Tiberius!”

The crowd broke into applause as the mayor, a small African-American man, approached the podium and gave the crowd a warm smile. Paul Tiberius remained at the back corner of the stage. In contrast to the nationally recognized kind demeanor of the man affectionately called “Uncle Sam,” Tiberius was not known to appear at many public events and did not interact much with the locals. He was tall, pale and gaunt, with dark, sunken eyes. Theo, seeing Tiberius for the first time, felt a deep sensation of dislike toward the man that he could not explain.

“My friends,” Mayor Lucas began, “I am so happy that you are here tonight. We have all been through much together and I believe it is long past time that those of us who claim to be running the show tell you what we know.” At this, applause erupted again. Lucas smiled and raised a hand to silence the crowd. “Many of you are referring to the incident of three weeks ago as “the Event.” I think that’s as good a name as any. We were not fortunate enough to have many of America’s finest scientific minds on our island when the Event took place, but those who have some expertise tell us that we experienced an unprecedented bombardment of electromagnetic energy. The seismic activity you all surely felt was likely a result of this pulse of energy. Where it came from, we don’t know.” Murmured conversation rose in the audience at this.

“What the hell do you know?” Asked one angry male voice.

“Please,” said Lucas. “Let me tell you what I can.” He paused and waited as the noise died out. “Thank you. As I said, we do not know the source of the Event. We do not know if it was an attack or a natural disaster. We do not know because we have no communication with the outside world.” Theo fully expected the crowd to roar at this but was stunned by the shocked silence that followed the mayor’s words.

“As many of you undoubtedly know, there is no sign of anyone from the rest of the world. Nobody has been able to contact us, if we are to assume they have tried. We lost access to Bader Field in the Event, and we do not have any airplanes. We do, however have access to a few helicopters. We sent an exploratory mission a week ago. The helicopter went as far as it could before having to turn so it could make it back on the fuel we provided. The helicopter traveled over 100 miles west of our island. At no point did the pilot see anything but the ocean.”

Now the audience was outraged. Screams and accusations came from every direction. A woman rushed out of the crowd screaming, “You lie!” She attempted to climb the stage. Paul Tiberius turned his dark gaze to the Security Forces and pointed at the woman. A team of five officers surrounded the woman and moved her forcibly through the crowd. The attendees became noticeably quieter after that, and Lucas took the opportunity to once more sooth the crowd to near-silence.

“I apologize that my words are unsettling to you. How could they not be? I know we all look to those in authority at times like this. Well, though I cannot explain what happened to us, I would like, at your indulgence, to share with you what we do know and what we have been doing to preserve the well-being of those of us on this island.”

“There were quite a large number of visitors to the shore when the Event took place. Unfortunately, I must report that many lost their lives in the calamity that transpired. We suspect that some survivors are still missing, whether or not by their own choice. If we make some conservative estimates of the missing and combine that with what we do know from those of you who have made regular rounds to obtain rations, we can safely assume that the surviving population on this island is about twelve thousand people. About three quarters of that number are here tonight.”

“The first thing we have decided is to preserve the laws of the United States of America. We don’t know if the country has survived or what shape it is in, but it is the law we as citizens all pledged to obey and so we shall. Having said that, we believe that some organization is important. We have no access to the governments of Atlantic County, the state of New Jersey, or the United States. Therefore we, the elected officials of Atlantic City, and those of Ventnor and Margate, of which some land still remains, have chosen to join our governments together. Until which time the situation changes and we revoke these new orders, all the lands of this island shall be called… Atlantic Island.”

At his words, banners unfurled from the arena ceiling displaying a new flag. Three thick, vertical stripes of red, white and blue comprised the background, while a variant of Atlantic City’s logo was emblazoned in the center with the name of the new territory.

The crowd gasped and again Lucas silenced them with a calm raise of his hand. “Now there will be more information coming to you over time. Some of it will be in large forums like this; other info will be distributed by pamphlets at ration stations. I just have two more issues to discuss and you will be free to enjoy this lovely evening.”

“First, we have carefully allocated food from stores, casinos and hotels to ensure that there will be something for all twelve thousand residents of Atlantic Island, at least for a while. Obviously our supplies are not unlimited. To that end, we will be demolishing all remaining structures in what remains of the region formerly called ‘Margate.’ We are going to turn that land into farmland, so that when our current supply runs out, we will be prepared with an abundance of food. We will need demolition crews and farmers.”

“We will also require demolition crews to remove collapsed buildings and tear down any that have been damaged beyond repair. We need workers to repair almost all the remaining buildings, as the damage has been pervasive. We have other openings with our science crew, police force, and etcetera. We will have signups at ration stations. All are expected to participate and help in some way. Your rations, I’m afraid, will only be provided if you volunteer for some position.”

“And now,” said Lucas, “for the final topic of the evening, allow me to introduce Deputy Mayor Tiberius.” The crowd, having exhausted itself applauding the mayor’s previous statements, still mustered some enthusiasm as Tiberius approached the podium looking grim.

“Greetings,” said Tiberius. He sounded, Theo thought, as somber as he looked. “It is my duty to inform you that I have been chosen the head of the Atlantic Island Department of Law Enforcement. This new department oversees the police force and intelligence groups. As such, I must say that I have been very displeased by the behavior on this island.” Lucas looked uncomfortable at this and made to approach the podium. Tiberius raised a hand in the same manner Lucas had used to calm the crowd. The mayor returned to the back of the stage.

“There have been many incidents of violence against property and persons in our community. Indeed, there have been attacks against our officers. This is unacceptable and will not be tolerated. I trust that I will not have to elaborate further on this matter.” The crowd was silent. Theo felt a disconnect between his brain, which knew that the words Tiberius spoke made sense, and his stomach, which churned uncomfortably with his deep dislike of the deputy mayor.

“The final topic for this meeting is that of residency. Many of you have taken occupancy of homes that are not yours. We your governing officials have graciously decided to overlook this flagrant inappropriateness while the demolitions and repairs are taking place. At a time to be determined, we will assign official and legal residences to all of you. This is all.”

Tiberius stepped backwards from the podium. Mayor Lucas walked around him still looking a bit embarrassed. “Thank you Deputy Mayor Tiberius,” said Lucas. “On that note, we thank you for all being here tonight and giving form to our wonderful new community. These times are scary for us all, but together we can live, flourish and triumph over this adversity. Please know that the government of Atlantic Island is doing all it can to make contact with the outside world and we will notify all of you as soon as we know anything more. Thank you, and goodnight.”

The crowd dispersed back into the streets in torrents of excited conversation. Theo, despite his intense distrust of Tiberius, felt exhilarated at the prospect of things getting better on the island.

“Did you all hear that Tiberius guy?” asked Bill. “He looks like a bat. I didn’t like the threatening kinda crap at all.”

“Maybe it’s good to have somebody in charge who isn’t scared to keep violent people in line,” said Michelle. “I haven’t felt too comfortable with all the craziness we’ve seen, but Tiberius knows how to take control.”

“I’m just excited to sign up for the science crew,” said Ryan. “Finally a chance to help get us off the island!”

“You mean our new country,” said Kylee. “Don’t you think it’s a little fast to be giving up our US citizenship?”

“I think they just want people to feel there is some sense of normalcy,” said Theo. “Mayor Lucas means well, at least.”

They walked on through the masses of people finding their way back to what they now knew were temporary residences.

“What about Mark?” asked Bill, “I didn’t see him or Jamie anywhere.”

Theo considered this for a moment. “We’ll probably have a few days before we have to sign up for any of the committees. Let’s take some time starting tomorrow to really focus on tracking them down. Now that people have been around the island and are over the shock, they might be willing to help us or at least give us an idea if they’ve seen Mark and Jamie around somewhere.” He put a hand on Bill’s shoulder. “We aren’t giving up on them.” Bill nodded soberly.

All in all, Theo thought, it had been an interesting night. He was glad they had attended the meeting. Just to see so many faces, to be part of a throng of thousands of people, made him feel normal again. Even if none of those people had been holding up a smartphone aimed at the podium, it was still a better feeling than he had experienced in weeks. For the first time in a long time, something other than Kylee had given him hope. Just the same, he moved alongside her and put his hand on hers.

Book 2: The Leadership

Chapter 6

The day after the town hall meeting, the teens set out on a mission to find their missing friends. Theo observed that many more survivors were out in the streets, perhaps emboldened by the previous night’s gathering. He had become accustomed to seeing crowds in line for food but it was rare to see many people outside with no particular purpose.

Unfortunately, nobody seemed to have information on Mark and Jamie. Many people they came across had also lost friends and relatives and were at as much of a dead end as Theo and his friends. Bill was slipping back into his moodiness and Ryan’s attempts to liven the atmosphere with humor were falling flat.

At lunch, the teens sat on the beach overlooking the endless blue waves. Every time they sat like this and watched the ocean, Theo became more convinced the water was a brighter blue than it had been prior to the Event. Of course, he had no way to make a direct comparison.

“Hey, kids!” a voice called from the boardwalk. They turned around and saw Officer Menendez waving from a distance. They walked over to him and took positions on the stairs. The officer, his uniform now boasting a small patch in the style of the new Atlantic Island flag (Theo wondered where these things were being printed), looked cheerier than when they had last seen him.

“How are you guys holding up?” he asked.

“We’re doing okay,” Theo said. “Glad to see that the mayor has things under control.”

“You and me both, buddy,” said Menendez. “You all figure out what jobs you’re gonna sign up for? We need some good recruits at the precinct!”

“I figured I might give that a shot,” said Kylee. Theo felt his jaw drop a little and closed it, embarrassed. Menendez’s eyes had widened.

“You?” he asked. “Not what I would have expected, but that’s great! Welcome aboard, kid. So, what brings all of you out to this part of town?”

“We’re looking for our friends who went missing during the Event,” said Bill.

“And no luck?” asked Menendez.

The teens shook their heads. “We’ve asked around town and nobody can help,” said Theo.

“Well, I’ve got some news that might point you in the right direction,” said Menendez. “The hospital near the convention center is finally open to the public.”

“What do you mean?” asked Kylee. “That place has been barricaded since the Event. We assumed it was too damaged and was scheduled to be knocked down.”

“Nah,” said Menendez. “I mean, it had some problems but those have been fixed. A ton of wounded got brought in there after the Event. The deputy mayor thought there’d be too much chaos if people were told to look for the missing at the hospital.” He looked ashamed. “We were told to make it look closed. In the interest of security, you know? Now they’ve got it under control and visitors are allowed. Sorry to say that quite a few they brought in didn’t make it. I hope your friends made it through.”

Theo swelled with hope. He couldn’t wait to get over to the hospital. He saw that his friends were just as eager. They quickly said goodbye to Menendez, who asked them all their names again, paying more attention to them than he had in the past.

“I wish you guys the best,” he said. He turned to Kylee. “I look forward to seeing you around the department. The rest of you all feel free to look me up whenever you want. Just keep your distance from the casinos. I imagine some of them might be operational soon but others are government offices. Either way, Deputy Mayor Tiberius doesn’t want young people getting too close. Worried about troublemakers and all that.” Menendez’s face showed that he himself was not too worried about troublesome teens.

Theo and his friends shook Menendez’s hand and hurried off in the direction of the hospital. When they arrived, a small line had formed in front of the desk. Clearly word had not yet spread that visitors could inquire about the patients. Theo approached the desk when his time came. A heavyset woman sat at the desk. Theo wondered just how large a woman she had been before the reduced rations had slimmed everybody down.

“Who are you looking for?” she asked. Theo gave the names of his friends and she typed some things into her computer. Though he knew the computer was operating on an internal network and had no connection to the Internet, Theo felt a sense of calm at the appearance of a device so rooted in the world he had known before the Event.

“Your friend Mark is in Room 403. Take the elevator at the end of the hall to the fourth floor and make a right.”

Theo felt lightheaded as happiness washed over him. “And what about Jamie?” asked Kylee, looking nervous.

“She was discharged a few days ago. According to this,” the woman pointed at her monitor,” she has been staying in the room with your other friend. They a couple, I take it?” Nobody responded. “Okay, I get it, none of my business. You all go on and see your friends.”

They signed in quickly, thanked the woman at the desk and made their way to the elevator. Theo was concerned to see that the elevator denoted the fourth floor as “ICU.”

The smells of sterility and various cleaning agents filled Theo’s nostrils as he stepped out of the elevator. It was a very short walk down the white tiled floor to room 403. Without knowing he intended to, Theo took a deep breath and held it as he stepped inside.

The beeps of the machines and the ragged sound of artificially controlled breathing told him that his friend was in bad shape before his eyes even focused on the sad form in the hospital bed. Mark’s face was swollen on one side and covered in yellowing bruises. His head was wrapped in gauze. One leg was elevated in a large cast. The rest of Mark’s body was under the blankets but Theo could see the tubes keeping his friend alive. Jamie was sleeping in a chair in the corner. Her arm was in a sling and she also bore fading bruises on her face, but nothing compared to the extent of Mark’s injuries.

Theo and the rest spread out around the hospital bed. Their faces, Theo observed, were all grim. Bill reached out and put his hand lightly on Mark’s arm. Bill’s jaw was tight and Theo knew he was trying very hard to keep his composure. For several minutes nobody said a word. The quiet seemed to stretch on forever, as if time had lost all meaning in that small room. All that mattered was the series of machine noises that collectively meant that Mark was still alive.

After what seemed an eternity, Jamie stirred. She rubbed her eyes and looked confused at the crowd in front of her. “What…who?”

Kylee stepped toward her. “Jamie, it’s Kylee. Michelle’s here.”

Jamie’s eyes opened wide and began to fill with tears. Kylee and Michelle embraced their friend. Theo felt a pang of jealousy as his friend was still unconscious, and immediately hated himself for it.

“Oh my God,” Jamie was saying over and over. “I thought you were all dead!”

“We’re fine,” said Kylee, taking Jamie’s hand. “We’ve been so worried about you.”

“We’ve been here for a long time,” said Jamie, “and Mark’s been like that for a while so it’s just been me and…” she broke into sobs again and her friends held her silently for a while.

When Jamie had composed herself, she looked up at the boys standing by Mark’s bed. “He’d really be so happy you guys are here.”

Theo walked over to her. “Can you tell us what happened to you? I mean it’s okay if you aren’t ready to talk about it.”

“No, no,” said Jamie, “I’m so ready. Just to be able to talk to people other than the nurses and doctors is amazing. Just give me a second to organize my thoughts.”

The teens found places to sit or lean around the room. Bill stayed by Mark’s side. Jamie sat for a minute resting her head on her hand as she recollected her experiences. Finally she spoke.

“I guess the last time we saw most of you guys was when we were back at the motel. We were in the back room and the rest of you were in the front…well, Kylee, I know you and Theo were outside, right?”

Kylee nodded. “That’s right.”

“Okay, so then the Event happened. Did you guys know that’s what they’re calling it around here? The Event?”

“Yes,” said Michelle. “It’s the official term for it now.”

“So the Event started. The building was shaking and that noise… well, you all know that part of it. We sat in the corner behind the bed and waited. After a while, Bill came in and said that Michelle and Ryan had left to try something with cell phones. He really wanted us to leave but Mark was determined to stay put. I thought he was right.”

Theo’s eyes betrayed him and he stole a glance at Mark, motionless on the bed. He felt anger at his friend’s stubbornness and again punished himself internally for his runaway emotions. He looked at Bill and Ryan, and he could tell he was not alone in feeling these conflicted sentiments.

“So we stayed,” Jamie continued. “I don’t really know how long we were there, but it was long enough that the windows along the back wall started to crack from the building shaking. Some of the glass was falling into the room and Mark said we’d better knock the windows outside while we could before they really exploded on us.”

She showed them fading scars on her hand. “He was right, you know. There was already enough glass in the room that I cut myself. I didn’t even see it there.” She paused again, thinking. “Anyhow, Mark tossed a lamp through the window and was pushing the remaining glass outside when we heard a scream through the opening.”

She looked around at the other teens. They were all listening intently. “A woman was screaming. She was in a room down the hall from us and she had a baby. She was scared to death and didn’t think she could leave the room. ” She pointed to Mark. “Mark was so brave. He didn’t hesitate a second. He took my hand and said ‘We need to help her.’ So we did.”

“The woman had yelled to us what room she was in. We left our room and ran down the hall. This was the first time I could really see those lights and the waves and everything.” She trembled as the vivid memory came back to her. “As we reached the room we heard things falling and breaking. Mark was sure that pieces of the concrete were breaking off the motel. Anyway, we reached the woman’s room. She was so scared and her baby was crying. We led her to the stairs and helped make sure she didn’t fall as we all came down.”

“The stairs on the first floor were all messed up. We decided to run around the building and maybe take the stairs on the other side. The poor baby was crying the whole time. It was such a nightmare.” Jamie started to cry again.

“You can take a break now if you want,” said Kylee. “There will be more time later.”

“It’s okay,” Jamie said. “I want to get this all out.” She took another deep breath and continued. “We were right. The stairs on the other side were fine. So we went down and made it to the ground. The woman thanked us and took off running away from the ocean.”

“Did you follow her?” asked Theo.

“No, Mark wanted to sweep around once more and see if anybody else needed help. We called as loud as we could, but didn’t hear anything from anyone. It was so hard to hear anything with all the booming in the sky and the buildings all creaking and groaning. We gave up and walked out into the street. A big…shockwave, I guess, knocked us over and then we saw this insane tidal wave coming toward us. We ran back under the motel into the garage. The wave hit the motel. At first it was just water rushing by on all sides. Then this horrible noise and the walls started to crack and then things were falling.”

Jamie showed them her damaged arm. “That’s when this happened. It’s also how Mark broke his leg…really bad. We got a bunch of other bumps and bruises, and Mark got hit in the head pretty hard. It knocked him out for a few minutes but then he was back.”

At this she stopped speaking. They all remained in silence for a minute while the machines beeped. As much as Theo wanted to know what had led to Mark lying in bed clinging to life, he wanted to give Jamie time to get out what was clearly a painful recollection.

Jamie looked around the room and spoke again. “For a long time we were in the dark. I don’t know how long. I was scared. Mark was too, I think, but he was so brave for me. He kept telling me that everything would be okay. That night was the longest of my life. Mark didn’t move and neither did I; we could barely see anything. Then the daylight came.”

“Mark was… he was stuck under a beam or something. He had been there all night, with his leg crushed under, and he hadn’t even told me. We were in this pocket of what was left of the garage, and there was so much dust and sand and water. It was hard to see but there was definitely light outside.”

“As brave as Mark had been… well as time passed he got sicker and sicker and before I knew it I was the one talking to him, on and on, telling him it would be okay and we would get out of there and go home.” She looked up. “I didn’t think we would.”

“By the time it got dark again Mark was sleeping a lot of the time. I was so hungry and weak and hurting and I just stayed with him. I guess I must have drifted off to sleep, cause this voice called out to me and when I looked around it was light. A bunch of police officers were making their way in. After that everything was a big blur. They got Mark out from under the beam and they took us out of the garage and brought us to the hospital.”

“They separated us then and I didn’t see Mark for a few days. No patients could leave their rooms at first, I think cause everything was still so out of control. Finally I was told I could go see him. The doctors said his leg had gotten infected. They treated it so he wouldn’t have to get it amputated but he had slipped into a coma and he doesn’t seem to be waking up. I’ve stayed with him as much as I can.”

Jamie looked around the room again and smiled uneasily. “I know that I barely got to know him at all, but he was there for me. I didn’t know that any of you were still alive and I was all he had…” She broke down crying again and Kylee held her.

“We’re all here now,” Kylee said. “You aren’t alone.”

They all took turns telling Jamie their story of the past few weeks. She had a fairly good idea of what had been going on around the island from the gossip that had passed among the nurses in the ICU. She seemed relieved overall just to be around so many people. Theo wanted to be happy for her, and for Kylee and Michelle as well, but he couldn’t stop thinking about Mark. Was he going to die? Theo didn’t know much about medicine but he had enough common sense to know that when someone had been in a coma for a couple weeks the odds were not great.

They stayed and talked for hours. When it came time to leave for the night, Jamie didn’t want to leave. “You can stay with us in our apartment,” said Kylee, ” It’s ours for a little while longer.”

“Thanks,” said Jamie, “but I made a promise that I wouldn’t abandon Mark and, well, I’m just not ready to leave yet.”

“I’d like to stay too, if that’s okay with you,” said Bill. “Just for one night.”

Theo wasn’t sure this was the best idea. Bill had looked gloomy as ever the entire time they had sat in Mark’s room. He decided to keep his mouth shut this once and hope for the best.

Reluctantly, the other teens said goodbye to their friends and returned to their apartment. Theo stayed awake a long time that night, staring into the darkness and picturing care-free, wild, ladies’ man Mark, now struggling to survive.

Chapter 7

The next few weeks went by quickly. Routine visits to Mark’s hospital room had replaced much of the teens’ aimless wandering. Mark’s health remained the same, which Theo reckoned was better than getting worse. He was determined to cling to that notion, and he held it especially close when sitting in Mark’s room listening to the regular noises of the life-support equipment.

Bill’s moods had improved since discovering that Mark and Jamie were alive. Theo noticed that this was a combination of a confidence that Mark would get better, which Theo worried was bordering on delusion, and a profound connection that was developing between Bill and Jamie as their shared care and concern for Mark drew them to each other. Theo doubted Bill even realized it was happening, but that blossoming of feelings in the gloom of the ICU was very apparent, and very positive to Theo and Kylee.

There was no shortage of love in the air as July turned to August. Ryan and Michelle went off on quiet walks every day and sat on the beach every night, wrapped around each other in the moonlight. Theo and Kylee had begun spending evenings on the roof of the condominium. They had taken chairs and a small table from one of the lower balconies (Kylee called it “liberating” the furniture) and set them on the roof where they ate dinner every night that it wasn’t raining.

The rains, which fell at least twice a week, often more, were violent and pounding, with driving winds that howled for hours. These torrents usually arrived without warning, and Theo and his friends had been caught in them many times and forced to run for shelter. Theo, though not a fan of being caught in one of these downpours, found that huddling in the penthouse or under a pavilion off the boardwalk was refreshingly peaceful. He especially enjoyed spending those periods of forced shelter with Kylee.

He remained wary of his emotions toward Kylee, still refusing to commit with one hundred percent confidence to the idea that his feelings were natural and not tied to the extreme circumstances of the past few months. Even so, he had no doubt that he wanted her- her body, her hair, and all her mannerisms, even the toss of her hair had grown on him. Theo joked that given enough time his bangs would be long like hers and he promised to imitate her habit of tossing them back. This usually earned him a playful punch in the arm.

He knew, too, that he cherished his time with her. Kylee was funny, smart, and a curious mix of serious concern and a devil-may-care attitude. Their conversations went on for hours and he could trust that she could brighten his mood and set him to fits of hysterical laughter when he least expected it. He couldn’t figure out what she possibly saw in him, and the doubting voice in the back of his mind assured him that their relationship could only exist in this situation where there weren’t many other options.

There were other teenagers around Atlantic Island, but the monotony of post-Event life had served to shrink the groups (as evidenced by how much time Theo’s group spent as couples) rather than combine them. They met others their own age occasionally, but had yet to spend any significant time with any of them.

There was one cluster of teenagers that Theo had noticed several times. Three boys and a girl all covered in tattoos. Every time he saw them from a distance, they seemed to be doing something obnoxious. Sometimes they pushed past others in line, sometimes one would distract a stranger while his buddy would steal some of the stranger’s rations. Theo marked these incidents in the back of his mind. He knew trouble when he saw it and the same part of him that felt compelled to assume responsibility for the well being of his friends continued to bark “warning!” at him every time he saw the thuggish teens even from a distance.

Flyers distributed at ration stations explained the various jobs available for signup. Theo and his friends were surprised to learn that barring any improvement in their present situation a school would be opening in the fall. “I guess teachers were visiting the shore too,” said Kylee.

Theo was disappointed. Not because he didn’t want to go back to school, though he certainly couldn’t say the thought excited him, but because he found the job signups refreshing. He liked the idea that he could sign up for whatever seemed like a good job and then switch to a different path if he wasn’t happy. Fortunately, those of school age were still going to be able to contribute to the various jobs for the remainder of the summer and then on weekends once school began.

On the day of the signups, Theo and the other teens fell into various lines in accordance with the work they wanted to try. Theo noticed that many people seemed to be in pleasant, positive spirits. He guessed that people were happy to have something purposeful to do.

Theo and Bill got in line for the construction squad. Theo thought at the very least he’d have a chance to spend some of his time with his friend. Bill wasn’t happy about having to spend less time at the hospital with Mark. Theo thought Bill also wasn’t happy to be away from Jamie.

Ryan signed up for the science committee; a group that Theo thought had a vague description. It seemed a good fit for Ryan, who was excited at the chance to sit in front of a computer again. Part of the job was to do some kind of secretive work concerned with making contact with the outside world. That was an admirable goal, Theo thought.

Kylee did indeed sign up for the Security Force. Theo felt relieved to see at least a few other women joining the ranks, but he just could not get comfortable with Kylee putting herself in a risky situation, not to mention that the Security Force was under control of Deputy Mayor Tiberius. Theo still couldn’t explain why he didn’t like Tiberius. The man was responsible for restoring order on the island, after all. Still… something just didn’t sit right.

Michelle and Jamie signed up for “Records.” Theo wasn’t entirely sure what that department was all about. He hoped that all his friends would be happy with their new positions. Still, though he understood the necessity of this effort, it was an acceptance of their predicament that Theo couldn’t completely support. There was not one day or night where he didn’t think about his family, his home, and the possibility of a return to the life through which he had once muddled, this time with Kylee.

Work began the next day. Theo and Bill received the same job assignment and after breakfast with their friends they walked down to what had once been the Margate town line. The foreman, a gruff, short man, set them to work dismantling a house. The work was slow and risky. Very little construction equipment was available, so most of the demolition was done by hand. The department bosses wanted to preserve, recycle and reuse as much material as possible. Theo and Bill spent the first half of their first day on the job emptying the house of its former owner’s belongings, and then stripping the drywall while carefully preserving the wooden studs that had not started to rot from water damage.

It didn’t take long for Theo to wish he had been assigned to dismantle a store or a restaurant. As he removed summer clothes from a pink room belonging to a little girl named Sarah, he imagined having to explain to Sarah and her parents why their beloved shore house no longer existed. Would they understand that the Atlantic Islanders needed the land to grow food? Would they know that it was only for survival that Theo was tearing apart their memories?

He had been excited to work with Bill but the two friends worked mostly in silence. Bill had his own demons, but surely he was also haunted by the same thoughts as Theo. The work became a little easier once the personal items were out of the house and it began to look more like a construction site and less like a home.

During lunch break the second day of work, Theo heard shouting from down the street. He, Bill and several other workers ran out to the street to eavesdrop on the commotion. A man was pleading with the foreman of a different crew. “This is my home! You can’t take away my home! I have rights!”

The man continued to shout. Theo couldn’t hear the counter-argument, though he could venture a guess what it might be. Before long the crowd of workers around the streets had grown. A small band of police moved in and seemed to resolve the conflict. The angry man shook his fist at the gathered crew as he stormed off. Theo turned to Bill. As he expected, Bill was looking frustrated again. He simply had not accepted the strict reality of life on Atlantic Island. Theo worried that, with the stress Bill was under, the time was coming when he would reach his breaking point. And then what? Theo didn’t want to think about it.

Two weeks of August passed without much incident. The house belonging to the angry man was reduced to spare parts, as was the house to which Theo and Bill were assigned. Crews dug up the side streets and foundations and turned the soil, preparing the land for the farming department that would take over the job before long. Theo assumed that many of the construction workers would transition to the farming department when the Margate demolition was complete.

During breaks, Theo and Bill often walked to the edge of the island, where Atlantic Avenue broke in the middle and the ocean began. Theo enjoyed the chance to sit with Bill, reminiscing about the days before the Event and the good times they had shared.

One day, Theo and Bill got to talking about other countries (“I guess we’re another country too,” Bill had said) and why nobody from Europe or elsewhere had been able to help any more than the United States. Theo gestured toward the beach as he made a point about Europe. “You know,” said Bill, “we don’t have any reason to think Europe’s still the direction you’re pointing. It could be out here for all you… ah crap!” As his hand stretched out over the ledge that marked the premature end of Atlantic Avenue, his sandwich took leave of his palm and flopped into the ocean.

Theo got down on his stomach and leaned over the edge. The sandwich was floating just out of his reach. As he pulled himself back up he saw something odd: the broken edge of the road seemed to shine. “Did you get it?” asked Bill.

“No, sorry,” said Theo, “but hang on. There’s something weird about the edge of the road.” He bent down toward the water again. Maybe it was just the dampness of the surface reflecting the light? He realized with a shock that the land was not just wet but was actually shiny. The sand that supported the road was fused into glass.

Theo sat back up, astonished. “What did you see?” asked Bill. His curiosity had, momentarily at least, overridden his hunger.

“It’s glass… the whole side going into the water is glass.”

“How can that be? What the hell does it mean?”

“I don’t know.” Theo scratched his head. “I think it means that the sand was, like, superheated or something. Ry would understand this stuff better than me.”

“You mean like if you cut something with a laser?” Bill stood up and wiped his hands on his shorts.

Theo was impressed. “Just like that. I don’t think we broke off from everything else after all; I think we were cut away.”

“How is that possible?”

Theo shook his head. “I really don’t know. I just wonder how much of this the government already knows.”

This thought only had a moment to sit with them before shouting from the distance interrupted their quiet reflection.

“Not again,” said Bill.

There seemed to be many voices chanting, and others shouting over them. Theo and Bill walked in the direction of the sound to get a sense of what was happening.

A group of maybe twenty men and women was standing across Atlantic Avenue. Few buildings remained on either side of the road, and the gang was in a line that bisected the street and led into the dirt lots on either side. It didn’t take long for Theo to realize that these people were angry. In the middle of the group was the man Theo and Bill had witnessed being carried away two weeks earlier. The former Margate homeowner was animated in his protest, and was leading his friends in a call-and-answer routine that brimmed with fury and lacked proper rhythm in its overlapping enthusiasm.

As Theo and Bill watched the dialogue between the man and the construction foremen (they couldn’t hear the foremen, but the man kept shouting “No!” and his colleagues would follow with “We won’t go!”) they saw a contingent of Atlantic Island Security Forces materializing in the distance and moving up behind the protestors.

Theo was relieved that Kylee was not among the arrivals. He assumed that only trained police officers were being called out for this kind of an incident. The protestors gradually became aware of the police presence behind them. They turned so that the two lines of people were face to face. Theo felt goose bumps emerge on his arms as he watched the two groups stand off like a powder keg waiting for a spark to ignite a devastating explosion.

Looking to his side, Theo was concerned to see Bill’s muscles tensed, as if ready to burst into action. He put a hand on his friend’s shoulder to steady him, but Bill wasn’t paying any attention. His eyes were laser-focused on the protestors and the Security Forces facing them.

The homeowner at the center of the confrontation was right up in the face of the lead officer. Undoubtedly, Theo thought, the man was being told to back down. He was not listening. With a crack that echoed in the silence fallen over the construction zone, the man slapped the officer across the face. In a flash, the officer had drawn a baton and hit the man across the temple. Blood burst from the wound as the man fell to the ground. The other protestors rushed in. The Security Forces, not expecting such retaliation, were caught off guard. Several were forced to the ground. Before long, they managed to get the upper hand with sheer brutality against the protestors.

Theo was snapped out of his trance-like viewing of the fight by a motion in the corner of his vision. Bill was off and running toward the fray. Theo called after him but to no avail. Bill was absorbed into the fracas and became just one of the pulsing bodies falling and rising over and over. Theo watched in horror as the security officers began to handcuff the protestors who all appeared to have been injured in some way or another.

Bill emerged from the mass of humanity with his hands cuffed behind his back, his face puffy and bloody, and two officers forcing him to one of the vans emblazoned with the Atlantic Island flag that had arrived behind the conflict. When the protestors had been packed away like sardines and the vans had departed, the foremen ordered their workers back to the job sites. Theo reluctantly returned to work but his heart raced and his mind could not stop worrying about Bill.

Chapter 8

Theo returned to the condo that night trying hard not to convey how much his concern over Bill was eating at him. Kylee approached him and threw her arms around him the moment he walked in the door. She was wearing the pants assigned by the Security Force but had shed her uniform top for a long undershirt she had found a while ago in the master closet of the penthouse.

“I’m so sorry about Bill,” she said.

“What? How…” Theo started.

“I was filing papers at the main precinct in the city when they brought him in with the rest of the protestors. I’m told they are going to be kept overnight for processing and he should be back tomorrow. Theo, there’s going to be a trial. Menendez tells me that the leadership wants to make an example.”

“By leadership you mean Tiberius, don’t you?” Theo asked. “What about Mayor Lucas?”

Kylee sighed. “You’re not the only one saying that. Supposedly Lucas put Tiberius in charge of the security on the island and he’s not getting involved.”

“Still,” said Theo, “he seems like such a good guy. Maybe he can be convinced to intervene here. This is pretty high profile.”

“I hope you’re right,” said Kylee. “I’ll let you know if I hear anything. Try not to let it mess with your sleep tonight. Bill will be back tomorrow and you can agonize over everything then.” She gave him one of her disarming sly smiles and walked into the kitchen to sit with Michelle.

Since beginning work at the “Records Department,” which Theo still didn’t quite understand, Jamie had been making late night visits to the hospital with Bill and arriving late at the condo, where she shared the second bedroom with Michelle. Ryan had tried to be a good sport about exiling himself to the living room with Bill, but Theo knew he was counting the days to the lottery more than anybody.

Theo had mixed feelings about the lottery, which would be taking place at the start of the following week. On the one hand, it served to further restore order to the island, and it was only fair to even the playing field. Theo knew that some of the twelve thousand or so survivors were dealing with living conditions far less pleasant than the penthouse. The teens had been lucky to get their temporary quarters when they did, before the Security Force stepped up to stop quarreling over living spaces.

Still, Theo had come to think of the penthouse as home. As much as he missed his family, as much as he was tired of rotating through the same few articles of clothing over and over, and as much as he wanted above all to return to his little suburban life, there was something charming about coming home from work to his best friends and his girlfriend. In a world with no television to watch (Ryan assured him they were working on that) and no computers or phones to play with, Theo and his friends had discovered the pleasantries of simply talking with one another.

The day of the lottery, the teens packed up their few belongings and departed the penthouse for the last time. They walked in silence. Theo knew they all were thinking the same thing as him: the penthouse had been their refuge in the face of a frightening and terrible disaster. He wished they could take some of the furniture, but in addition to the difficulty of the task the official lottery procedures had stated that furniture must remain in place. Theo wondered how that would go over with those few who were about to leave the homes they had rightfully owned prior to the Event.

The teens arrived at one of the several lottery stations that had been erected in anticipation of the day’s activity. A woman with long gray hair pulled into a ponytail stood on a platform and fiddled with a laptop that seemed to be misbehaving. Finally, she got the results she was looking for and approached the microphone.

“Good day, citizens of Atlantic Island!” she cheerfully intoned. “Today is the day you have all been waiting for…the day you get to go home!” A mixed reaction from the crowd greeted this statement. Theo was taken aback by the woman’s boldness in reminding everyone that Atlantic Island was the new reality. Thoughts of returning to their pre-Event lives should apparently be banished until further notice. He assumed representatives at all the lottery stations were repeating similar sentiments, potentially those exact words.

“Today’s lottery should be very efficient and we’ll get you all to your new accommodations as soon as possible. First the computer will generate a name at random. Then, it will pick from among all the possible choices remaining to us on this island. Do not worry, even with the damage from the Event I have been assured there is enough quality real estate left for everyone! Please remember that only citizens aged sixteen and older may be assigned homes. If you do not have parents with you on the island, you will be assigned legal guardians by the government.”

“When your name has been selected and a home chosen, come to the desk at the side of this platform. You will be told how many citizens may be co-owners and residents of your new home. You may then select others to occupy that home with you. If you do not choose enough other residents to fill that particular space, citizens will be selected for remaining openings at the end of the lottery.”

The woman’s face became very serious. “It is my duty to inform you that there are no trades, no changing of one’s mind, and no “do-overs.” As there is not yet a system of currency in place on the island, sales of homes are not allowed.” She smiled broadly. “But enough of all that dreary legalese. Let’s give out some homes!”

The process proceeded without much interruption or controversy. Theo was selected toward the beginning of the process and assigned a one-bedroom apartment on the edge of the city district. He was allowed one co-owner and selected Kylee.

Michelle was assigned to a large, 8 bedroom house in Ventnor; one of the few that had survived the Event without any damage. She selected Ryan and Jamie but found that Bill was not eligible for ownership because of his arrest and Mark could not be assigned because of his continued incapacitation at the hospital. Ryan promised Bill he could stay with them as long as he wanted. The remaining six rooms in the large house went back into the lottery pool.

Theo and Kylee walked for twenty minutes from the lottery station to their new home. The small apartment had not been well maintained. What little furniture existed was dirty and broken. Theo assumed either the original owner or whomever had occupied the apartment up until the lottery had damaged it out of anger and spite. Kylee saw his expression and tried to be positive. “Don’t worry,” she said, “we will straighten this place up in no time. If this is going to be our future I want to make the most of it.” She maneuvered herself into his arms and kissed him. Theo kissed her back, his mood lifting.

Over the next few days, in between work shifts, Theo and Kylee did manage to pull things together. Theo borrowed tools from the construction site and did some small repairs where he could. Once the place had been cleaned of dirt, sand and cobwebs, it actually held a little charm.

Bill and Jamie began to hang out there regularly when not working or at the hospital. Despite the big shore house offering more luxuries than the humble apartment, Bill said the other residents made him feel “crowded.” Bill’s wounds from the protest and arrest were healing rapidly and he did not seem overly concerned about his upcoming trial, scheduled for the first week of September. Theo worried constantly. He didn’t trust anything attached to Deputy Mayor Tiberius in any way, and Kylee kept bringing home reports of rumors from the precinct that the leadership wanted to make an example of Bill and the other protestors.

The remaining weeks of August went by in a blur. With the Margate protests quelled, at least for the time being, the destruction of the remaining homes and stores along Atlantic Avenue went quickly. By the end of the month, the final debris was being hauled away, and much of Theo and Bill’s work went to breaking up the asphalt of the side streets. Soon, the foreman had told them, they would move to demolishing the buildings around Ventnor Avenue. The two avenues, cut short as they were, would remain to enable faster transport of goods between the new farmland and the rest of the island.

The morning of Bill’s trial, they all went to the hospital to visit Mark. Mark’s condition had not changed, but he looked significantly more wasted and shrunken than when they had first discovered his whereabouts. Bill held his friend’s hand and spoke so softly that to Theo it appeared his lips were moving soundlessly. Perhaps Bill was hoping Mark could lend him some of his confidence. The thought made Theo’s eyes well up and he quickly lowered his head.

The walk to the courthouse from the hospital took a long time. Theo had never been so far into the city. He wondered where Atlantic Island ended on this side. The courthouse was next to a large park that was filled with people waiting to hear what would come from this, the first high profile trial in the short history of the new country.

Bill said goodbye to his friends at the first security checkpoint behind the courthouse doors. Theo whispered, “Just do what the judge says. Be polite. Be respectful. This isn’t the place to make a big statement.”

“Relax,” said Bill. “I’ve got this.”

An armed officer escorted him down the hall. They turned left and disappeared from view. Theo and the rest of his friends followed signs down a series of hallways to an elevator. As the teens waited their turn outside the elevator’s bronze doors, Ryan said what Theo had been thinking: “Bill’s not gonna keep it together.”

“Give him a chance,” said Kylee, “He knows how serious this is.”

“Right,” said Jamie, “Plus, he was only trying to break up the fight. He’s not even one of the real protestors.”

“Well it would help if he doesn’t try to argue the protestor’s case for them,” said Theo. “Bill doesn’t like to keep quiet.”

The elevator took them to the third floor where the doors opened on another long hallway. The floor was covered in marble and the walls appeared to be adorned in some kind of wood. Mahogany, Theo assumed, not that he knew anything about that kind of thing. They passed several doors on either side, but it was clear that they were headed to the giant double doors directly at the end of the hall. Security guards posted on either side held assault rifles across their chests. “Do you see that?” Ryan asked Theo. “They mean business.”

The guards gave cursory inspections of the people entering the courtroom. Theo figured the guards didn’t have to worry much as the visitors had already been subjected to two checkpoints.

Kylee seemed to have a passing acquaintance with the guard on the right. This relaxed Theo a little but made him just the littlest bit jealous. They were allowed to pass into the courtroom, which was bigger than Theo had anticipated. The high ceiling gave a cavernous feel to the room, and Theo felt a chill as he looked at the stand where the fate of his best friend would be decided.

The seats filled quickly. Theo didn’t like the looks of eagerness he saw on many faces. He thought of history class in school where he had learned about the Roman gladiators fighting as people cheered for blood. The sound of a door being unlatched echoed in the chamber and Theo looked up to see the defendants being led to their seats. Bill was in the middle of the line and looked deadly serious. Good, Theo thought.

The defendants were seated. A hush fell over the waiting crowd. Theo looked at Kylee. She was nibbling her lower lip and looked very uncomfortable. “Are you okay?” he asked.

“Why aren’t there any lawyers?” she asked.

“That’s a very good question.”

A voice boomed. “All rise for the honorable Deputy Mayor Tiberius.”

Theo stood with everyone else. Paul Tiberius entered from a door in the corner. He wore a judge’s robes. Tiberius took his seat in the center of the proceedings and banged a gavel. The loud, disembodied voice called out. “Be seated!”

“Citizens of Atlantic Island,” Tiberius began, “we stand today on the brink of a promising new future for our young country. There are those, however, who would stand in the way of what must be done. There are those among us who would fight against the forces of right, the forces of reason, and the forces that must be allowed to succeed if all of us are not only to survive but also to thrive on our island. Some of those who would deny you the lives to which you are entitled are the defendants seated before you.”

So much for a fair trial, thought Theo. He looked around the room. There were many who shifted uncomfortably in their seats as a result of Tiberius’s opening remarks. Still, others seemed to be caught up in the Deputy Mayor’s words.

“Is there anyone among the defendants who wishes to speak in defense of your group’s actions?” Tiberius said. Theo held his breath, willing with all his might that Bill’s hand not be raised. Fortunately, the angry homeowner who had organized the protest volunteered to speak.

“State your name,” said Tiberius, as the man sat in a chair on the witness stand.

“Tom Callahan.”

Tiberius sneered. “When you address me, it will be as ‘sir,’ or ‘your honor.’ Do I make myself clear?”

Tom clenched his jaw. “Yes…your honor.”

“Very well,” said Tiberius, “Mr. Callahan, explain to the court your actions of the past weeks that have led you and your cohorts to be seated here today.”

“I have been a full-time resident of Margate for two decades,” said Tom. “My wife and my kids…” He took a deep breath and exhaled loudly before continuing. “They died in the Event. They were visiting a neighbor whose house got crushed by trees. They… it was… horrible.”

Theo expected Tiberius to offer his condolences, but the Deputy Mayor remained quiet, his cold stare fixed on Tom who was trembling as he recalled losing his family.

“Our home, well it was all I had left of my memories. When I saw the construction crew getting ready to demolish it, throwing my belongings into the street I had to try to stop them. And when that failed I found others who felt the way I did and they joined me. We just tried to stop anyone else’s home from being unfairly seized.”

“You attacked an officer of the Atlantic Island Security Force.”

“I…overreacted. Sure. I was telling him that my home belonged to me. I paid it off long ago. He said that I paid for it with money that doesn’t matter anymore.”

“The officer was correct,” said Tiberius. “Your purchases, your belongings, your claims of ownership have no value in Atlantic Island. You get what the leadership determines you get. If it were not for the leadership you would have all starved after the Event! You have us to thank for your very lives, but you, Mr. Callahan, and the rest of your troublemaking lot would rather see everything reduced to ruin.”

“That’s not true!” said Tom. “I just wanted to keep what was mine.”

“Enough!” yelled Tiberius. “Return to your seat immediately.”

Tom sat back down. His face was a tangle of emotions and his balled fists told Theo what Tom would like to be doing right now rather than sitting down.

“Defendants, rise,” said Tiberius.

“You have all attacked officers of the Security Force of Atlantic Island, direct representatives of the leadership in this country. We have accomplished much in the short life of our nation, but we have much more to do. Interlopers and troublemakers shall not be tolerated. By the authority invested in me as the duly elected Deputy Mayor of Atlantic Island, I hereby sentence all of you to twenty years in prison.”

What? Theo was sure he’d heard incorrectly. The words “prison” and “twenty years” spun in his mind as he struggled to make sense of them.

Tiberius was smiling. “Dismissed.” He banged the gavel three times with emphasis on the final strike. Each strike of the gavel echoed. To Theo they were just small, barely audible sounds in the fog that had surrounded his brain. He thought of Bill and all that he would miss sitting in a cell somewhere while the best years of life passed by.

The room filled with whispers. People were shocked, outraged, even confused, but all were afraid to speak loudly enough to be heard by Tiberius. The message, it seemed, had been received. Jamie wept quietly and Kylee and Michelle had their heads down. Theo knew that they too were crying. The shock of the injustice they had witnessed was overwhelming. Theo’s chest was so tight he could barely breath. Crying was out of the question. Ryan looked angrier than Theo had ever seen him. His fists were clenched so tight that his nails were cutting little half moon shapes into his palms.

The defendants were led out the same door through which they had arrived. Theo wished he could see Bill’s face but he could not. He quickly decided it didn’t matter.

The teens regrouped outside the courthouse. Theo was the first to speak. “I’m going to talk to Mayor Lucas.”

“I don’t think that’s possible,” said Ryan, “only people with a certain level of government clearance have been allowed to see the mayor. I’ve seen some of the software that works all the stuff out.”

“Can it be hacked?” asked Theo.

“In theory, sure,” said Ryan, “but I don’t have access to that kind of thing, and besides, let’s say you got the appointment through my messing around with the system. You walk in to the mayor’s office and they’ll know right away you don’t belong. Then we’ve got much worse problems.”

“What about Menendez?” asked Michelle, “Kylee, can’t you talk to him and see what he can do?”

“I guess I could try,” said Kylee. “I see him pretty often. I can’t guarantee he can get Theo a meeting with the mayor but, I don’t know, maybe he can do something.”

“We have to try whatever we can,” said Theo. “What happened to Bill and the others is beyond unfair. Lucas is a good guy. He will see that this is all wrong and he’ll make it right. I know it.”

Chapter 9

It took the better part of a week for Kylee to have a chance to speak to Officer Menendez. When she returned home that night, Theo saw that she looked happy. “Well?” he asked, “What happened?”

“So, he definitely knew what was going on, and he wasn’t happy about it at all. Most of the people in the Security Force think Tiberius was out of line with his ruling. Of course, most everybody is afraid to say anything. Menendez knows the mayor pretty well and he said he would definitely talk to him about meeting with you. No promises but he’s going to try. I should know something soon.”

It was another week before Theo got the answer that he was waiting for: the mayor would see him that Friday. The day of the appointment, Theo and Kylee walked to Caesar’s Palace, where the self-proclaimed “leadership” had established offices. Theo had not been able to figure out why the government wasn’t operating out of City Hall, but he assumed it had something to do with the opulence of the casino. It truly did resemble a palace, and no casinos were allowed to do business anyway.

“Good luck!” Kylee said as she hugged Theo goodbye. They looked at each other and then kissed for a few seconds before Theo reluctantly broke away. It was time to save his friend.

The level of security at the casino made that of the courthouse seem like a few mall rent-a-cops. Theo passed through five different checkpoints, some more invasive than others, on his way to the mayor’s new office in the largest suite in the casino. Among the many government employees hurrying from place to place was an alarming amount of heavily armed Security Forces.

Theo checked in with the mayor’s assistant and sat in a plush, golden chair. The waiting area had been the living room of the suite and was in the middle of what had been two bedrooms. Now those served as the offices of Mayor Lucas and Deputy Mayor Tiberius. Theo turned and looked out the massive windows that showed a broad expanse of the beach and the ocean beyond. Theo had often sat on the balcony of the penthouse condo, or on the roof of the building and had the same thought that occurred to him now: the water was too clean. Theo had seen water like that on cruises his family had taken to the Caribbean when he was younger.

The assistant startled him out of his contemplation. “Mr. Essex, the mayor will see you now.”

Theo rose from the comfortable chair and followed the assistant as she led him to the dark wooden doors that separated the waiting area from the office. She opened one of the doors and gestured inside. Theo stepped across the threshold. The large bedroom had been transformed into a functional and inviting office space. A heavy oak desk was positioned along the wall directly opposite the doors. Theo was sure that beneath the thick rug underneath the desk the carpet contained the indentations of the king size bed that had once been the centerpiece of this room and had seen its share of high profile visitors and inappropriate behavior.

Across from the desk were two chairs as plush as the ones in the waiting room. It was to one of these that the assistant led Theo. He breathed slowly as he tried to keep his nerves at bay. Seated behind the large desk was Mayor Lucas. He smiled his famous warm smile at Theo and said, “Please, sit down Mr. Essex. Make yourself at home.”

Theo did as he was told. The mayor folded his hands on the sheet of glass that protected the dark leather inlay of the desk. “Mr. Essex, Carlos Menendez said that it was absolutely urgent that you see me. Now I’ve known Carlos a long time, and he is not a man prone to exaggeration and hyperbole. You must have something quite important to say and, by the way, Carlos must like you very much. He wouldn’t do something like this for just anyone. Now then, what can I do for you?”

“Mr. Mayor, sir, I want to talk to you about the ruling the deputy mayor came up with the other day in the trial of the protestors.”

“Ah. Yes.” Lucas rubbed his chin. “I take it you have some connection to the protestors?”

“Not exactly, sir. My friend Bill Mansfield was arrested with the protestors, but he wasn’t one of them. He got involved when the fighting started. He was trying to protect people.”

“I see,” said the mayor. “Mr. Essex…” he looked at a file on his desk. “May I call you Theo?” Theo nodded. “Very well. Theo, I am sure it was not lost on you that this was the first major trial we have had here in Atlantic Island. Deputy Mayor Tiberius has control and authority over the police and judicial proceedings on our island. It would not be right for me to interfere, were I even of a mind to try.”

“But sir,” said Theo, “When you spoke at the arena, you said that the laws of the United States would be what we’d go by here. By those laws, the protestors had a right to protest, didn’t they?”

“They had a right to protest peaceably, Theo. The protestors, and your friend as well, engaged in violence against the officers of the Security Force. You may not want to hear this but they broke the law.”

“I’m not an expert in law, sir, but the one guy, Tom, hit an officer. Then the police started swinging. The others were defending themselves! Bill and I witnessed the whole thing and that’s why he got involved.”

Mayor Lucas raised an eyebrow. “You witnessed the whole altercation?”

“Yes, but nobody ever asked for witnesses. Tiberius just made up his mind to make an example.”

“Deputy Mayor Tiberius, Theo.”

“I’m sorry sir, but it wasn’t a fair trial. And not all the defendants were guilty of the same thing!”

The mayor leaned back in his chair and sighed. “You are an interesting young man, Theo. You are both bold and respectful, a rare combination. I see why Carlos likes you. You also raise an interesting point. I take it you work with the construction crew?”

“Yes, sir,” Theo said. He was curious where this question was leading.

“Do you like it? The work you have been asked to do so far?”

Theo considered this. “I do. It was hard at first, tearing homes apart, even if many of them were damaged, but I understand the situation we are all in, and I know how important the farmland is going to be to our survival.”

The mayor nodded slowly. Theo suddenly recalled sitting in his guidance counselor’s office discussing his post-high school plans. The guidance counselor had not exuded a fraction of the warmth Theo felt in the presence of Sam Lucas.

Mayor Lucas leaned forward again, his hands once again linked on the desk. “You believe in the farming initiative?” he asked.

“Sir, I think it’s a very smart idea. I was thinking that once the construction crew moves on to repairs and whatever on the rest of the island, I might switch to the farm team.”

Mayor Lucas smiled. “Fancy yourself a farmer, do you? Well Theo, what would you think about doing something a little more… cerebral?”

Theo was confused. “I’m not sure I understand what you mean…”

“What I mean is that I am looking to put together a council of advisors representing different groups on the island. I have been wondering if there was anyone with the right aptitude to represent the youth of Atlantic Island, and it occurs to me that you may be the right man for the job.”

Theo had to remind himself to speak. He was thrown off his game. “Sir, I really appreciate the offer, but honestly I’m not sure I’m the best guy for the job. My friend Ryan—”

“Is, I’m sure, a lovely young man,” said Lucas. “Right now we are talking about you. Tell me Theo, you don’t think you’re qualified to be on my council?”

“I don’t know. I guess I’ve never been told I’m qualified to do much of anything.”

The mayor laughed. “I find that fascinating. Have you considered that maybe those who judged you didn’t know what they were doing? I like to think I’m a reasonably good authority on character and qualifications. You’re hardly the first person I’ve offered a position, and my selections usually pan out just fine.

“You don’t have to decide now,” the mayor continued, “just keep doing what you’re doing with the construction work for the time being. But there will come a time when I will call on you and I do hope you’ll seriously consider my offer. Bare in mind this won’t relieve you of your obligation to finish school.”

“Thank you sir.” Theo paused, deciding whether to get back to the issue at hand, and concluded that he had no choice but to press on. “About my friend…”

Mayor Lucas laughed again. “Yes, yes, not to worry, I haven’t forgotten. I may be old but I’m still sharp! I’m also a man who is willing to admit when he’s in error. Allowing such an important case to take place without my oversight may have been foolish of me.”

“Sir, I didn’t mean to say that you were foolish…”

“I know, Theo. I’m simply saying that perhaps until we have a proper judicial system in place our cases, in particular high profile ones, could do with a little…monitoring.”

The mayor reached for a speakerphone on his desk and pushed a button. “Amanda, could you tell Deputy Mayor Tiberius to come in here for a minute?”

The voice of the assistant came through the speakerphone. “Yes sir, I’ll send him right in.”

Theo felt his pulse quicken. He hadn’t counted on any interaction with Tiberius. The mayor saw Theo’s reaction. “Relax,” he said. “You have nothing to fear from the Deputy Mayor. It’s the criminal element that needs to watch out for him.”

A knock at the door signaled the arrival of the deputy mayor. “Come in,” called Lucas. The door flew open and revealed Tiberius, looking menacing in a black suit. Theo always thought of a vampire every time he saw Tiberius, and the deputy mayor’s attire only reinforced that image.

“What do you think you’re doing, Sam?”

Lucas smiled. “Paul, come take a seat.”

Tiberius stood stiff by the open door. “I’ll stand, thank you. I’m not accustomed to being called in when we don’t have a scheduled appointment.”

“I understand,” said Lucas. “Paul, this young man came to me to discuss the case of the protestors. He has made a very valid argument that the sentence was…a tad severe.”

“You mean the sentence that I made in my authority as head of the Security Force.” Tiberius sneered. His penetrating gaze was directed solely at the mayor. It was as if Theo wasn’t in the room at all.

“Yes,” said Lucas, “but you’ll recall that as mayor I have the authority to adjust sentencing.”

Tiberius’s eyes flashed with anger. “You mean to override my sentence?”

“I believe that in your desire to instill the proper sense of command and control in our country, you may have been slightly overzealous in your ruling. I do not question your intention, nor the fact that attacks on our officers cannot be tolerated. I simply wish to be reasonable in our policies. People understand that they must respect our control, but they need not fear us.”

Tiberius was furious. “I can not have my control questioned.”

“No one is questioning your control, Paul. We must look to the bigger picture.”

“And you, Sam, must not be swayed by the desires of children.” For the first time he turned his glare to Theo, who immediately wished he could melt through the floor.

Mayor Lucas stood up. “Paul, my decision is final. I am adjusting the sentences. The leader of the protestors who is the only one to initiate violence will be sentenced to one year in prison. The others shall be given a year’s probation. Any violation of that probation will reinstate the original sentence. I think that should send the message that we believe in fairness and second chances, but our kindness should not be seen as weakness.”

“On the contrary,” said Tiberius, still fuming, “you are presenting our government as weak, malleable and adjustable to suit the needs of its citizenry.”

“Is that so bad?” asked Lucas. “We are representatives of the people and we ought to take their concerns into consideration.”

Tiberius had made his way to the side of Lucas’s desk. “These people would be lost without us! Lost and hopeless without my authority to lead the way!” He made to slam his fist on the desk but caught himself and slapped the glass with an open palm instead.

“I assume you mean our authority, Paul?” asked Lucas.

“You know what I mean. You have made a terrible mistake, and we will all have to live with the consequences.” He turned to leave and Theo had just enough time to let out a sigh of relief when he realized the deputy mayor had paused and was staring directly at him.

“You, boy, what is your name?”

“Theo Essex, sir.”

“Well, Mr. Essex, I don’t know why you have meddled in the affairs of something infinitely above your station, but I want you to know that you have my attention and the attention of my entire department. I will be watching you. If you know what is good for you, you won’t make any mistakes. And I do mean any.”

With that, Tiberius left the room. Theo was frozen to his seat. The mayor came around the desk and put his hand gently on Theo’s arm. “I apologize for what you had to witness there. Deputy Mayor Tiberius is…temperamental, but he has the best interests of our nation at heart just as he always wanted what was best for the city before the Event. Though we may disagree on methods, our goal is the same.”

Theo wasn’t so sure, but he kept silent. The mayor walked back around the desk and sat down. “Theo, I will see to it that your friend is released from custody within the next day. I apologize for all that you and your friends have been through. Please do give strong consideration to my offer. Our country needs bright young minds like yours to give us the proper perspective, as you have done for me here today.”

Theo stood, shook the mayor’s hand and thanked him profusely. As he turned to go, his peripheral vision caught a glimpse of the corner of the desk where Tiberius had made his angry argument. The surface where Tiberius’s hand had slapped down was now a web of cracked glass.

Bill returned the following morning. His arrival was met with celebration, though Kylee fretted that a proper celebration should have been planned in his honor. “It’s fine,” joked Bill, “I’m sure you’ll plan something better the next time I get released from jail.”

Jamie seemed especially happy to see Bill returned, and particularly eager to have him return to the house. Nobody knew when Bill was going to get the opportunity to own a residence since there was still no system in place for sales or reassignments. Theo thought this was probably just the tip of the iceberg when it came to things the new nation was not prepared to deal with.

Despite his misgivings about some of what had occurred in the time since the Event and certainly since they had found themselves as unwitting citizens of Atlantic Island, Theo believed in Sam Lucas and knew the man was doing everything he could to lead the thousands of survivors through an unprecedented disaster. Even so, there was no way things could be perfect right from the start. Ryan frequently referred to the mayor’s first round of decrees and decisions as “Atlantic Island: Version 1.0.” Theo thought this was probably true. There would be refinements, improvements and new ideas as the country developed. Of course, there remained the small glimmer of hope that this whole thing would turn out to be a temporary arrangement before everyone could be returned home.

The more he thought about it, the more he realized there may be some value to Mayor Lucas’s offer that he join the advisory council. He certainly held strong opinions about the operation of the new government. For Theo holding strong opinions about anything was a new sensation.

The next week was the best fun Theo had had in a while. Bill was back with the construction crew and he seemed more like his old self than since before the Event. Theo suspected Bill’s lifted mood was not only because of his sentence being changed but also because of something brewing between him and Jamie.

Theo tried to broach the topic of Jamie but Bill would do everything he could to change the subject. On Bill’s third day back on the job Theo decided to take a more direct approach. The crew was working on the west side of the deconstruction zone along Ventnor Avenue and Theo and Bill were enjoying lunch consisting of some kind of fish sandwiches (courtesy of what Theo assumed must be the “fishing crew”) and canteens of desalinated ocean water.

“So what’s going on with you and Jamie?” Theo asked.

Bill tensed defensively. “What do you mean?”

“I’m not blind, buddy, I’ve seen the way you two look at each other. I saw how upset she was when you were convicted and how excited she was when you came home. I know there’s something between you.”

“Okay, I’m gonna stop you right there. Jamie’s awesome. We get along great and she’s hot and like, yeah, in another lifetime maybe. But Theo there can’t be anything with me and her. She was with Mark. She’s still with Mark.”

“Mark’s in a coma,” Theo said. He knew that speaking so harshly would hit Bill hard and he knew from the wounded flash in Bill’s eyes that he was right. Theo decided to press on. “Mark’s in a coma and we don’t know when he’s getting out or if he’s going to get out. I think Jamie’s been pretty amazing the way she’s stayed by his side. But let’s look at the facts. They only knew each other for one night, and you have to think that some of her dedication comes from the fact that he saved her life. They weren’t in a relationship and if the Event hadn’t happened for all we know it might have just been a one night hookup.”

Bill looked incredibly conflicted. “So you’re saying that I should move in on Mark’s girl while he’s… knocked out.”

“I’m saying that happiness since the Event seems to be in short supply. If you’re lucky enough to have found someone who makes you happy… I think you should go for it. I honestly think Mark would understand… will understand.”

Bill wasn’t entirely convinced. “I’ll think about it, man. But you know she has to agree to be my girlfriend, it’s not all up to me.”

“Yeah, I get that,” said Theo. “The fact that you’ll think about it is good enough for me.” They sat silent for a while.

“I think you should join the mayor’s group,” said Bill.

“Really? Why?”

“You’ve got a great way of looking at things. You help all of us see stuff we wouldn’t figure out on our own.” Bill picked up a small piece of gravel and hurled it into the water. “I think this place needs somebody who can figure things out.”

“I don’t know,” said Theo, “isn’t Ry’s science team supposed to be the ones doing all that?”

“It’s different,” said Bill, “Ry’s geeks are trying to make contact with strangers and study the Event and get TV and all the other stuff we miss… but you know that. It’s the other issues. You know, like the ones where people get thrown in jail for the wrong reasons?”

Theo laughed. “Okay, I see your point. I told Mayor Lucas I’d consider his offer when the time came. Right now we’ve got our jobs to do here and school is starting up soon.”

Bill’s eyes widened. “Oh crap! I totally forgot about that. What do you think they’re gonna expect us to do?”

“No clue. I’ve been thinking about it. If everything here is all tied to working in these different departments then what we need is more like on the job training or internships or something. School isn’t going to do much, especially for those of us who are old enough to already know how to read and do math and whatever.”

“So why make us go to school?” Bill asked.

“I don’t know, I think part of it is to keep up the sense of order and normal life. I also think maybe Mayor Lucas still holds out hope of rescue. He’s a reasonable man and I think he knew what had to be done to prevent total chaos but I doubt any of this Atlantic Island stuff was his idea, or that he likes it all that much.”

“What about Tiberius?” asked Bill. “He didn’t strike me as reasonable at all.”

“No, I don’t think he is,” said Theo. “The mayor keeps him in check as best he can but I’m nervous that overturning his ruling offset some kind of balance, some agreement they had in place. Tiberius was furious and he doesn’t seem like a guy who can let things go.”

“So he’s like an angry dog that Lucas keeps on a leash,” said Bill

Theo considered this. “Something like that. But if he’s a dog, he’s a pretty damned smart one. He’s incredibly dangerous, and the only thing Atlantic Island has going for it is that Sam Lucas knows how dangerous he can be.”

Chapter 10

Theo and his friends walked into the auditorium in the heart of the casino that was now being casually referred to as “the Palace.” In Theo’s last trip here to see Mayor Lucas, he had bypassed much of the casino and so had missed the extensive construction that was taking place to renovate spaces on the lower levels for the new Atlantic Island school. He and the others were shocked to see the array of classrooms that had been carved out of ballrooms in anticipation of the new school year.

The auditorium remained unchanged from its previous life hosting a range of acts from musicians to comedians to Broadway-quality musicals. Now the stage was bare save for a podium with the Atlantic Island seal, the same logo that adorned banners to either side of the room.

The students filed in. Signs demarcated areas for each grade, from grade one to grade twelve. Theo’s group entered the area reserved for the twelfth grade. Theo knew there wouldn’t be many students in his section. He hadn’t seen many people his age around the island and he knew that students were allowed to drop out and return to full time work responsibilities upon turning eighteen. Jamie wasn’t there for that very reason. Theo thought sadly that Mark, who turned eighteen in June would have enjoyed getting to skip out on school.

Sitting in the section set aside for the eleventh grade, the tattooed kids Theo kept noticing around town were looking miserable, like they would rather be anywhere else but school. The one in the middle, tall with a bald head, seemed to be the leader of the gang. He had his feet up on the seat in front of him, and on the whole didn’t seem nearly as annoyed as his friends. In fact, Theo thought, he looked like he didn’t have a care in the world.

As the seats continued to fill with students of all ages, Theo tried to do a rough head count. Doing some quick multiplication told him that there were at least three thousand students, maybe more. He shared this fact with Kylee. “Pretty big chunk of the population, don’t you think?”

“Actually,” she said, “it’s less than I’d have expected. I mean lots of kids were at the shore when the Event happened. I guess many of them were in Ocean City though so… they’re not here.”

She blushed with embarrassment at having brought up the whereabouts of other shore visitors from before the Event. In the months since, though discussing families and friends on the mainland had been discouraged, talk about those who died on the island or had been on the neighboring islands had become practically taboo.

When it seemed all but the latest stragglers had been seated, Mayor Lucas arrived at the podium and greeted everyone with his typical cheerful demeanor. Tiberius, Theo noted to his delight, was not in attendance.

“Welcome, welcome, students of Atlantic Island!” began the Mayor. “I am so very happy to see you today. I have spoken previously of our island’s bright future, born out of the darkness of the Event. You who sit before me are the lights that provide that brightness. You are the key to our future and I have every bit of faith imaginable that you will do all of us proud as you move through the process of your education and journey forth into the world.”

“Now, we have some logistics to deal with before you can all head off to your classrooms and truly start the school year. To handle all those messy details,” he laughed, “it is my great pleasure to introduce you to Mrs. Limpua, formerly principal of a wonderful school in upstate New York and now principal of Atlantic Island Academy.”

The mayor led everyone in applauding as a thin woman with short, dark hair took the stage and shook his hand at the podium. She smiled at the crowd of children and teenagers. “Good morning students! Let’s all applaud Mayor Lucas for all the hard work he has been doing to help all of us!” Most of the students applauded. Theo noticed that baldy and his buddies were not applauding but were focused on harassing the kids in front of them.

“I think,” continued Mrs. Limpua, “that we have so much potential in this room just ready to be unleashed. Of course, we don’t know anything about you yet. We don’t know what schools you went to, what grades you earned and what courses you completed. That’s why our first order of business today is going to be to administer some diagnostic tests.” She looked down at the youngest kids. “That means we are going to see what you’ve learned. Don’t worry about doing poorly on the test. We are only trying to make sure you are at the right grade level. Some of you may be adjusted up or down. Just do your best and let us worry about the rest!”

After some more talk about the rules and regulations, Mrs. Limpua dismissed the students to their testing stations. Theo and his friends left the auditorium and followed a winding hallway. Construction crew members were painting touchup coats of what Theo guessed was a shade of peach. He realized that this hall must have been newly built and wondered why they couldn’t have built it in a straight line.

Theo and Michelle were assigned to the same testing room. He wasn’t surprised to see chairs and tables, as he had no idea where anyone would find a large number of classroom desks on the island. He took a seat next to Michelle. “Do you think this is going to be really hard?” she asked.

“I don’t see why it would be. They just want to make sure we are at the right grade level. I’m not sure if they even think all our normal subjects are that important.”

She looked stunned by this. “You think they aren’t going to let us take all the subjects?”

Theo laughed. “I don’t know! It’s not like we have to worry about getting into college. I’d guess they are prepping us for the different departments.”

Michelle frowned. “Right… no college.”

“Well, at this point it would just be so hard to pull off and I think they need as many young people working as possible. Our population is so small we can’t afford to have thousands of people sitting in classes all the time.”

“I know you’re right,” she said, “it’s just… my parents were always so crazy about college. Had to get into the best possible school, had to be top of the class… I know it doesn’t make any sense but I feel like they’d be so disappointed in me.” She turned away, tears in her eyes. “I miss them.”

“I understand,” Theo said.

A woman came around and distributed test sheets and pens. Theo was surprised to see pens instead of pencils, and then realized the government probably had been able to find many more of the former from various offices around the island. He wondered for a moment what would happen when the pens ran out.

He looked down at the test sheet. The questions covered a wide variety of topics, from grammar to math to hypothetical, “what would you do in this situation” type questions. The questions ranged from so easy Theo expected that just about everyone would get them correct to challenging, high level problems that were way above his education level. Noticeably absent were any questions about history.

Theo thought he made a good showing for himself on the test. As he checked his answers he got a feeling that the test was looking not only to judge grade levels but also to get a sense of the students’ aptitude for the many work crews on the island.

After the test Theo and Michelle went down to the cafeteria to meet their friends. Lunch at school was going to be just as bland as lunch on the job site. Theo could not wait for the farms to be up and operating. He knew the citizens of Atlantic Island were lucky to have access to so much canned and dried food, but there was something about fresh produce that was sorely lacking. He suspected too that eating all this dried stuff wasn’t so good for his health, though Theo hardly had the knowledge to back up that theory.

“Did anybody else think that was a huge waste of time?” asked Bill.

“What do you mean?” asked Ryan.

“I mean most of us already know what we want to do. Hell, most of us are already doing it. This isn’t the old world. School, college, whatever, I don’t think it matters anymore.”

“So,” said Theo, “What does matter?”

“Work,” said Bill. “Working your ass off, making a difference and getting to live, be free and enjoy fine food like these crackers I can’t get enough of.”

“Being stuck in that prison gave you this new perspective?” asked Kylee. She looked genuinely concerned.

“I guess, maybe, yeah. I think I’m just being realistic. This is our life now. When I’m working, even just lugging stones and stuff, I feel like I’m really living. What good is it going to do for me to sit in a class? Thank God I’m getting out in January.”

Theo had to admit that Bill made some valid points. “Maybe this is all part of them testing out some new ideas. Maybe they will reevaluate things after this school year?”

“So they are beta testing us?” asked Michelle.

“Something like that I guess,” said Theo. “Bill’s definitely right that without college we probably should spend the last year of school focusing on our particular trade in some way. They must not have all of that figured out yet and just want to keep us getting some kind of education. It’s all part of keeping people calm.”

“Keeping them controlled, you mean,” said Bill.

“I bet Theo will have some information for us when he starts meeting with the mayor,” said Kylee.

“Hey,” said Ryan, “speaking of information, I’ve got some cool news to report from the science committee!”

“You mean the nerd squad,” said Bill with a smirk.

Ryan laughed. “Say what you will, but I’m telling you man, we are doing some interesting work. We are presenting some stuff to the mayor next Wednesday night!”

“Okay, let’s hear it,” said Bill. “What have you got?”

“Alright. Check this out. I’m on a team that was …”

A voice yelled across the cafeteria, cutting Ryan off. “Attention please! Would the following people come join me at the front of the room immediately? Bill Mansfield, Kylee Blair, Michelle Cho, Ryan Adini and Theo Essex.”

The teens looked at each other with concern. Slowly they rose from their seats and walked to the cafeteria’s entrance where a stocky security officer waited.

“Do you know this guy?” Theo asked Kylee. She shook her head.

They stepped in front of the officer and gave their names. “Are we in some kind of trouble?” asked Michelle.

“No, no, you’re not in any trouble,” the officer said. He spoke quietly so as to not be overheard by the other students looking with great interest at the front of the room. “I’m afraid your friend Mark’s condition has turned grave. Mayor Lucas has asked as a courtesy that you be provided government transport to the hospital. I suggest we move quickly.”

Theo and his friends moved in a silence that had become all too common the past few months. Theo looked at the sad faces around him and was angry. They were too damned young to have to go through all this! It didn’t matter how tough or smart or creative any of them were. He didn’t care how much leadership quality Mayor Lucas saw in him. At that moment Theo was a scared, angry boy who just wanted his old life back. He felt his hands clench into fists as he walked. This shouldn’t be happening to any of them, but Mark? Certainly not Mark who was always joking, always playing around, always looking for a new girl to hook up with. Mark shouldn’t be “grave.”

The officer led them out a back passageway to the parking garage of the building. A black SUV was waiting for them. Theo knew how rare it was for even the government officials to travel by vehicle given the limited supply of fuel. He appreciated the gesture from the mayor, but nothing could ease the vice that was tightening around his chest.

The car pulled away from the rear door of what Theo still thought of as a casino and wound around the several floors of the parking garage. Theo and his friends hadn’t said a word. He held Kylee’s hand and wondered what was happening to Mark. He hoped that if Mark were truly dying that they would get there in time to have one last chance to see him.

There was no need for the SUV to turn on its siren or lights to clear a path. Almost nobody ever drove on the island, and at this time of day everybody was at his or her jobs, home with little children or in school. The drive was brief. The hospital approached quickly and the government car drove right up to the entrance. The officer turned back to the teens from his front passenger seat. “They know you’re here so just go right in. You know the way to your friend’s room, right?” For the first time in what seemed an eternity, they spoke to say that yes, they knew how to get to Mark’s room.

They thanked the officer and the driver and left the big car. The automatic doors to the hospital parted in front of them and they moved swiftly toward the elevators, once more embracing silence and the shelter of their own thoughts.

Theo’s brain barely registered the walk across the lobby, the ride in the elevator or the brief distance to Mark’s room. The next thing he knew, he was standing with his friends around Mark’s bed. Jamie was already in the room, tears wet on her face. The beeping of the machinery in the room had become an all-too-familiar sound in recent weeks. A doctor was standing by Mark’s head, jotting something in a folder. He looked up at the teens.

“The mayor said you are the closest thing to next of kin this young man has on the island,” the doctor said.

“What happened to him?” asked Theo. “He’s been stable all this time.”

“He was stable, yes,” said the doctor, “but his brain functionality has been minimal and his body has not been recovering the way we’d hoped. Instead it has been slowly breaking down over the past few weeks. We nearly lost him last night and performed an emergency surgery to drain some fluid and relieve swelling, but even so… I’m afraid there’s very little time left.”

“Can he hear us?” asked Bill, his voice choked with emotion.

“I’m sorry but he’s lost almost all brain function,” said the doctor. “It’s doubtful anything you say will register, but I certainly don’t want to discourage you from trying.”

“How long does he have left?” asked Ryan.

“It’s hard to say,” said the doctor. “Minutes? Maybe hours? If there’s anything you want to say to him, even if it’s only for your own benefit, you should say it.”

Kylee and Michelle walked over to Jamie and hugged her. Kylee whispered something to Jamie and the three girls began to walk toward the door. Jamie squeezed Mark’s limp hand as she passed his bed. When they were out in the hallway, the doctor said “I’ll let you have time with your friend.” He took his chart and left the room.

The three friends stood around Mark’s bed. Bill moved his mouth like he was going to say something but the words seemed to catch in his throat. Ryan put his hand on Mark’s frail arm. “Hey Mark,” he said, “We’re all here.” He looked at Theo and Bill for encouragement and they nodded. “It’s been pretty sad on this island without you man,” he continued, “I mean Bill tries to make jokes but he sucks at it. You’d really enjoy making fun of some of the crazy crap that goes on here. Damn it Mark, we aren’t going to be the same without you. Like, one day they might even bring cars back and I might actually have to drive without you to …” he trailed off, tears streaming down his face. He grasped Mark’s hand and squeezed it, thumping it against his own chest. Slowly, Ryan put Mark’s hand back down and stepped back.

Theo felt his own tears leaving wet tracks down his cheeks. He took Ryan’s place next to Mark. “Mark… I don’t know how we’ve made it this long without your crazy spirit keeping us going. I… I know you don’t want us to remember you like this. Lying here like you are, that’s not even the real you. So I’m not going to think of you like this. I’m going to remember all the good times. I’m going to remember when we were ten and you convinced all of us to go check out that creepy house that we thought was abandoned. That stray dog barked and scared Ry so much he fell over! When I think of you I’m going to remember the way you laughed that day, the way you were always laughing.”

Theo paused to compose himself. He concentrated on his breathing until he felt he could continue. “I’m also going to remember what a hero you were to save Jamie and that other woman. You were friggin’ amazingly brave and I can’t tell you enough how impressed I am. How impressed we all are. I promise you… we are going to honor your memory and what you sacrificed. The mayor said that the future is bright. Well, we’re going to make sure it is. We owe it to you. I’m never, ever going to forget you Mark.” He wiped the back of his hand across his eyes and made way for Bill.

Bill was silent a while as he composed his thoughts. Theo knew Bill had said much of what he wanted to say in the weeks he had sat at Mark’s bedside. He knew Bill was searching for something especially profound and worthy of the moment. “Mark…” Bill began, “you know you’ve always been my brother. From the day you first came to our elementary school, you’ve been the guy I could tell everything to. You knew me better than anyone. I have so many good memories of doing crazy things with you. You really knew how to have fun and I’m gonna miss that so much.” He put a hand over his face and slammed his fist on the cart next to the bed. “Damn it! It’s so goddamned unfair!” Theo and Ryan came around and each put a hand on Bill’s shoulders as he fought to control his emotions. Finally, he was calm enough to continue.

“I don’t want to end this… I don’t want to say goodbye. I’m just gonna tell you that I’m never gonna forget you… I’ll think of you in everything I do. I love you, bro.” Bill lowered his head into his hands and was eerily still. Theo and Ryan took seats. They sat in silence, revealing nothing more with their voices but telling all through their tears. Time lost all meaning in that quiet room. Theo knew that hours passed but had no real sense of when it was that Mark began to fade away. The stream of doctors and nurses and equipment seemed to be moving in another world far distant. Theo was aware of the commotion as Mark was covered with a sheet and removed from the room, but it existed in a silent void.

It took him a while to regain focus, to realize that Kylee was there with her arms around him. Bill, Ryan, Jamie and Michelle were there too. Theo realized that these were the only people left for him in this new world. They were his friends and they were his family too. He reminded himself of his promises to Mark. That saddened him but anchored his concentration and strengthened his resolve at the same time. Theo reached for Kylee’s hand. He panned the room, looking at his friends. “Guys, I think it’s time to go.”

Chapter 11

The residents of Atlantic Island had grown all too accustomed to burying lost loved ones. Though Theo and his friends tried as best they could to make time and space for mourning Mark’s passing, the forces of necessity and order pushed them back to work and school. They attended a small ceremony for Mark as his body, wrapped in a sheet, was placed on some kind of a hastily constructed floating platform and set adrift off the north end of the island.

Bill and Jamie sat on opposite ends of the line formed by the group of teens. Theo knew that Mark’s death had made them ashamed of the growing feelings they had shared. He wished there was something he could do to bring them together. He knew they needed each other if they hoped to come to terms with their shared loss and move forward.

Theo waited until a few days after the funeral to take Bill aside. Something in his face must have signaled his intent because Bill backed up a few steps. “Don’t start on me man, I can’t take it right now.”

“Bill,” said Theo, “I’m not going to push you into anything. I know how you feel about Jamie and I know how you felt about Mark. I see what’s going on and I’m telling you, it’s no good for you or her.”

“I can’t feel right about this! I can’t feel right about anything. Every time she crosses my mind or I see her I think about how close we were getting while Mark was dying in a goddamned hospital bed! I was wrong, Theo. Wrong and awful to my friend.”

“Not one person would say you were wrong, or that you’ve done anything to disrespect Mark. You stood by him to the very end and so did Jamie. If you were telling me that there was no feeling left between the two of you, if you didn’t want her… maybe I’d say that’s fine. But that’s not how it is and you know it. The two of you are choosing to avoid each other. You’re running and hiding from your guilt and I’m telling you, it’s crap.”

Bill’s face turned red. He was getting angry. “How can you say that? How can you say that me even thinking about a girl when Mark is floating in the ocean isn’t disrespecting him? Let alone the girl he wanted when all of this happened to begin with!”

“I know you’re getting pissed at me,” Theo said, choosing his words carefully. “Like I said, I’m not going to push you. I just want you to realize two things: one, we all need each other, whether it’s friendship or love or whatever. Nothing about this life here is easy or simple and we need to all be together in this. Two, I knew Mark almost as well as you and I am telling you he would want you to be happy. Jamie makes you happy Bill. You don’t have to run to her this second, but think about it. Making a conscious choice to run away from her is not going to help anybody.”

As Theo spoke, Bill had tightened his fists and Theo thought there was a reasonable chance that his friend was going to take a swing at him. When he finished, he waited cautiously as Bill processed everything he said. Bill’s hands opened and his shoulders slumped, defeated.

“I get it,” he said. “It still doesn’t feel right to me but I get your point. I won’t make a huge effort to stay away from her, okay? But somebody needs to tell Jamie the same thing.”

Theo smiled. “Kylee’s already on it,” he said.

Classes began the next week. Theo wasn’t aware of anyone getting moved up or down a grade, though he knew few people well enough to discuss such things. He was more suspicious than ever that the tests had ulterior purposes, but none were made apparent as the students received class assignments.

Theo noticed that just as the test had neglected history, his schedule did not include any history courses. He could understand that the new country had very little history to draw from. Everybody there could remember the Event of a few months ago and what had transpired since. Still, Theo remembered learning about the ancient Greeks in a class in tenth grade. There was value in learning about those ancient societies and their traditions and customs, or at least he thought there was. It seemed someone had a different idea.

His schedule only contained four courses, held at locations scattered around the school floor of the Palace. Theo had math with Bill and Kylee. Ryan and Michelle were way beyond his level when it came to arithmetic. The class, conducted by a very short man named Mr. Stevens, seemed to be a general overview of Algebra with a bit of Pre-Calculus thrown in for good measure. One hour of Mr. Stevens droning on about two variable equations and Theo longed for the weekend and the feel of a hammer in his hand.

Theo’s wandering mind pondered Mayor Lucas’s offer about the council. He hadn’t spoken to Lucas since he overturned Bill’s sentence, but Theo knew the mayor was keeping tabs on him and his friends. After all, he knew about Mark’s fatal turn before any of the rest of them did, and had even sent them transportation. So where was any notice about the council, or any notice about anything for that matter? Ryan had said they were close to getting a closed circuit television signal up and running, Theo thought. Maybe that would allow the mayor to keep in touch with the citizens.

Theo was startled as the other students stood up and got ready to go. Kylee grabbed his arm. “Rise and shine!” she laughed.

“I didn’t realize it was over,” Theo said.

“No kidding,” said Kylee. “You were in a totally different zone.”

Bill, who seemed to be happier as of late, punched Theo lightly on the arm. “Bro, if I have to sit through this, you gotta be there with me.” He showed Theo his notes, which though written in a nearly illegible scrawl covered most of both sides of the paper. Theo uncomfortably showed them his own paper that only had a few equations scratched out on the top half.

“I’ll get with it next time,” Theo said, “I don’t really know what happened to me.”

“Ah, it’s cool,” said Kylee, “Mr. Stevens is pretty boring.”

“X squared plus Y is verrrrrry interesting,” said Bill in a perfect impression of the teacher’s slow drawl.

“Yeah, well it’s not like they had much to choose from,” Theo said. “They couldn’t exactly put out a hiring bulletin online.”

Theo tried his best to pay attention in his next three classes. He found Physics fascinating and Geology was a subject he hadn’t been exposed to since middle school. His final subject of the day was Government. Theo realized that none of his friends had that on their schedules. He walked all the way down the long hall of classrooms until he found the right room. He was immediately struck by how small the room was. He could only see two armchairs but no desks. Theo looked down at his schedule. He was certain he had confused the room numbers.

“If you’re in the wrong place then so am I,” laughed a voice behind him.

Theo spun in place and saw Mayor Lucas smiling from the doorway.

“Mayor… what are you doing here?”

“I’m your teacher, Theo,” said the mayor, “though I daresay we will be teaching each other.”

Theo tried to smile. “Sir, I don’t understand.”

“We have a few ladies and gentlemen on my advisory council who aren’t as…open, shall we say, as I am to a young man like you being onboard. I decided we could spend this period discussing some things that are crucial to the operation of the island. This way, I help prepare you to hold your own when you join the council, and I give you ample opportunity to express your views and concerns just in case the other members try to steamroll over you.”

Theo opened his mouth to remind the mayor that he hadn’t technically committed to joining the council, but thought better of it. Instead he asked, “But…aren’t I going to miss out on the rest of my education?”

“Our school system is a work in progress just like everything else,” said Lucas, “but I imagine you’ve already noticed that the schooling for the youngest students is a little more…structured.”

“Yes, sir, I was actually going to ask about that. It looks like the kids who are working age are given a really light schedule.”

“You’re right about that,” said the mayor. He gestured for Theo to sit and then sat himself in the remaining chair. “We don’t have a huge teenage population but our focus is going to be more and more about identifying the proper departments for those students after their schooling ends. The volunteer system has been great so far but we’d like to see a little more organization. We want to put the best people for a job in that job, you see?”

Theo nodded. “I do, but I’ll tell you there is a lot of talk about college. It’s kind of something we used to think about a lot.”

“I understand that. Believe me, I am a huge proponent of education and I want our kids to go to college but assuming we are to remain bounded by this island, the infrastructure just isn’t there. The island has basic needs that must be met to keep the population thriving.”

The mayor eyed Theo curiously. “So how have you enjoyed your first day of school?”

“I don’t know. It’s a little different than I expected but I think it’s okay.”

“Good,” said Lucas, “I’m glad you approve. One thing I’d like to ask as part of our arrangement here is that you keep an eye on the students and their reactions. Any feedback you can give that can help us refine our educational system and help us nudge people into the right career paths would be enormously helpful.”

Mayor Lucas paused and his smile faded. “Before we go any further I’d like to offer you my condolences on the passing of your friend. I hope we were able to provide you with as much time as possible to say goodbye.”

“Yes, sir, we all really appreciated it. Thank you. I was wondering though… well, how exactly did you know about Mark?”

“I try to know as much as I can about my citizens,” said Lucas, “in particular I wanted to know about those who had suffered from the Event. When I saw your name on Mark’s visitor registry, I put things together quickly.”

The mayor turned to look out the one large window in the room. It showed a view of the buildings behind the Palace. “Is there anything you’ve been wondering, Theo?”

“Well, I didn’t really have a chance to think about questions to ask you,” Theo said. “But, I guess I want to know if anything new has been discovered about what happened to us.”

“A very good question,” said the mayor. “I believe your friend Ryan has some knowledge about what we’re learning. I’m sure he’s keeping it under wraps until the science team presents its findings. Small scale at first so we can pick through the information, but we will be having a big town hall gathering on Halloween and I think you’ll find all of this enlightening. I’ve been briefed on a few things, and of the three questions: what happened, how did it happen and what can we do about it, I think some serious progress has been made on the first.”

Theo considered what the mayor had said. Something was odd and he couldn’t quite place it. As the mayor talked about preparations for the town hall, and told Theo that he was invited to sit up front for the gathering, Theo’s brain went round and round trying to discover what he was missing. Something about the meeting being on Halloween, which was coming up much sooner than he would have thought.

A light bulb went off in Theo’s head as a connection was made. “Sir,” he said, “what’s wrong with the weather?”

The mayor gave a coy smile. “What do you mean, Theo? It’s been lovely.”

“Well, we’re only a few weeks away from Halloween and it still feels like summer.”

The mayor clapped his hands together. “Precisely. See, we normal people are just as bright as those bigwigs in the science lab! I noticed this myself the past few days and told the head of the science committee. It’s not unheard of for warm weather to follow us into September or October, but the weather patterns are identical week in and week out. I think that’s a bit odd, don’t you?”

Theo agreed. This made him think of something else. “Mayor Lucas, Bill and I have noticed that the land where the street was broken off is…” he struggled to remember the word that Ryan had given him. “…fused. Like a laser cut it or something.”

The mayor nodded. “Yes, the science committee told me as much. They’ve run a series of tests on samples and they are not quite ready to draw a conclusion but I have high hopes that what you’ve mentioned will enter into their presentation before the town hall.”

“The science committee is going to share everything they know with everybody?” Theo asked.

“Well they will share everything with me and important members of the government, and I will filter that for the general population. I imagine what I say will be an overview of the important key points. Truth is important, Theo, but so is maintaining calm. It would not do us any good to tell people things that will cause them to panic. As I said, the full report will be presented to a select group prior to the public meeting. Would you like to join?”

“Of course! Thank you!”

“It will be great to have you there, Theo. I want to be able to rely on your perspective and I think it only fair that you should have all the information we can give you.”

The next few weeks seemed to take forever. Theo and Mayor Lucas agreed to meet at the end of the school day three times per week. Theo did his best to focus on his classes and actually succeeded in paying attention through most of them. All the teachers droned on in lectures (Bill called them the “dregs of Atlantic Island education.”) but Theo found that if he kept his mind on the enormous responsibility, the monumental trust being placed on him by Mayor Lucas, he could at least stay awake and focused long enough to learn the fundamentals of what he was being taught.

It didn’t take long before Theo’s concerns about the rough looking teens became justified. The bald leader of the pack was in Theo’s eleventh and twelfth grade physics class, and was neither qualified to take such a course, nor very interested in education in any form. Theo wondered what flaw in the scheduling system had allowed that to take place. After the teacher, a tall, rail thin man named Mr. Ramar had admonished the teen four different times, the boy, whose name was apparently “Mr. Bertier,” decided he had listened to enough.

“What the hell do you want from me, man?”

The teacher’s eyes opened wide. “Mr. Bertier, please do not use that sort of language in my classroom.”

“I asked you what you want from me. You been riding my ass since the first day.”

“Well, perhaps if you chose to pay attention rather than harass your fellow students, you might avoid my consternation and learn something in the process.”

“Yeah you keep running your mouth and spouting off all them big words. I ain’t impressed, man. This class sucks ass and the people here suck ass and I don’t have the patience for this crap.”

“Mr. Bertier, leave my class immediately.”

Bertier walked up to the teacher’s desk. The class was silent with all eyes on the teen’s bald head as he sat down on the corner of the desk. “C’mon man, one second you tell me all this crap about how I have to be here, how it’s mandatory island law to sit and listen to you talk about all this boring ass stuff, now you want me to leave? Which is it?”

Mr. Ramar was shaking. Theo wondered if it was rage or fear he was seeing. The teacher pointed a finger at the door. “Out. Now.”

Bertier slid off the desk and walked up to Mr. Ramar. He grabbed the teacher’s shirt and pulled him in close. The teacher was at least six inches taller, but Bertier’s neck was twice as thick and muscular. They made for a strange pair when viewed that close together.

After what seemed an endless expanse of time, Bertier relaxed his grip on Mr. Ramar’s shirt. “Fine,” he said, muscles rippling under his black t-shirt. “I’ll give you a break this time. Too nice a day to be sitting in class anyway.” He turned and walked out of the room, slamming the door behind him.

That incident aside, Theo was doing just fine in his classes. He wondered occasionally what life would have been like if he had been in his senior year at Mifflin High instead of sitting in a makeshift classroom in a former resort and casino. Would he have been as motivated to get into college as he was to make a good impression on Mayor Lucas and the other advisors?

Theo came to love his meetings with Mayor Lucas and he would wait all day for the chance to sit down with the man. Lucas had years of experience running the city and dealing with the bureaucracy that came with the job. For reasons Theo still couldn’t quite understand, the mayor was happy to share all that experience and advice with him.

They discussed in broad terms the strategy for Atlantic Island for the immediate future. Theo told Mayor Lucas his concerns and was always shocked to see the mayor nodding, if not in agreement at least with understanding.

Theo found himself constantly referring to and praising his friends. He was still uncomfortable with the idea of being Mayor Lucas’s “chosen one,” and he found every available opportunity to remind the mayor of the virtues and positive attributes of Kylee, Bill, Jamie, Ryan and Michelle, all of whom were spending the weeks working away at school and jobs.

One day Theo walked into the room where he had his sessions with Mayor Lucas. The mayor was standing by the window and staring out into the distance. He seemed to not realize that Theo was in the room. For a moment Theo remained silent, not wanting to rudely interrupt the man’s thought process. Finally he decided he ought to announce himself before too much time was wasted.

“Mayor Lucas?” Theo said quietly. The mayor tensed as he was startled out of his thoughts, but he did not turn around.

“Hello, Theo,” said Lucas. His voice was strained and Theo realized the man had been choked up by whatever it was he was thinking about. “I didn’t hear you come in.”

“I didn’t want to disturb you sir. Um… is everything okay?”

Lucas turned around. He smiled wanly. “I suppose, Theo. I suppose. You’ll forgive an old man for getting a little emotional, won’t you?”

Theo laughed. “Sure, but what were you emotional about? I mean, if you want to talk and all.” He flushed, embarrassed at his clumsy display of sympathy.

“I don’t want to burden you too much with my concerns but… well, we are here to share things, are we not?”

The mayor walked to his chair and sat down. Theo did the same.

“I grew up outside of Philadelphia, just like you. Did you know that?” he asked.

“No, I didn’t realize that!”

“Well it’s true,” the mayor laughed. “Of course, the suburbs were a little different back then. A good deal more farmland. My father worked in a grocery store, sweeping the floors. It was my mother who truly raised us… my brother and two sisters and me. She taught us much of what we had to know about life, and read to us from the books my father borrowed from work. My mother had taught herself to read. She didn’t even understand half of what she was reading us but she did it anyway. To ‘open our minds’ was how she put it. And open them she did! Through her I learned about the vastness of space, the brutality of World War II that ended just before I was born, and the plays of Shakespeare.

“I loved the plays…loved all of it really. She sparked my enthusiasm for learning and my creativity. I wouldn’t have made it half as far as I did without her…and my father as well. He worked himself to the bone to provide for his family, and it caught up to him. He died in 1968. Just keeled over one day in the store.”

Lucas mulled this over for a minute. Theo waited patiently. “He did not live long,” the mayor continued, “but he achieved what he needed to for his family. By the time he passed I was already in college. My sisters were married and had children of their own. My brother was in high school but was a brilliant mind, wise beyond his years.

“My family was so very important to me, Theo. Though my siblings disbursed around the country we remained close in each other’s hearts. I kept my mother nearby so I could make sure she had the help she needed as she entered old age. When I became mayor of Atlantic City I rented an apartment for her in Mays Landing a few miles inland.”

Mayor Lucas looked directly at Theo. “My mother was nineteen years old when my eldest sister was born. She did everything for us…was everything to us for all those years, and I don’t even know if she’s alive.” He opened his arms wide. “All this, this so-called Palace, this island, all the power I’ve been given, and I can’t help my own family. I miss them terribly, Theo.”

Theo sat frozen for a few seconds as he debated a course of action. Slowly, deliberately, he stood up and put a hand on the mayor’s shoulder. “I miss my family too, sir.”

Theo shared bits and pieces of these meetings with his friends, usually as they sat down for dinner on weeknights. The teens alternated between each other’s homes enjoying the rations they brought home at the end of the day. Ryan was excited to hear Theo’s comments about the weather, which remained unchanged. As Mayor Lucas had said, the science committee was working on this and other information, but Ryan was sworn to secrecy about almost everything.

As the weeks passed, Ryan became more withdrawn and serious. Whatever it was he was working on was taking a toll on him. He spent his evenings after school at the science labs and would return home so mentally fatigued he would go right to bed. Theo and his friends tried to get Ryan to talk but he would not share anything. Kylee tried to pry some info from Michelle, but she swore that Ryan wasn’t telling her any more than he told anybody else.

One weekend evening in mid-October, Theo and Bill were waiting for Ryan as he arrived home. “Hey guys,” Ryan said, “I’m totally beat. Gonna get to bed.”

“Ry, just chill with us for a minute,” said Bill. “You need to take a second to stop stressing.”

Ryan tried to protest but Theo and Bill talked and physically maneuvered him into sitting down next to them. “Listen man,” said Theo, “we know you’ve got a ton of stuff on your mind and you aren’t allowed to talk about most of it. But we’ve been wondering- what is it that’s bothering you so much? Shouldn’t progress be like, I don’t know, a good thing?”

Ryan sighed. “Yeah… I mean, some of it is good, sure. But…” he stopped as he considered how to say something without revealing too much. “Part of why I signed up with the science committee was to get to do some cool stuff and to play with computers and all, but I also really wanted to solve the biggest problem facing all of us.”

“You mean being stuck on an island and not knowing where the hell everybody else is?” asked Bill.

“Exactly. And I’ve been really lucky to get to work on some amazing projects. Projects that I really think are going to help everybody here and make life a whole lot better in the long run.”

“So…” said Theo, “what’s the problem?”

“The problem,” said Ryan, “is that the progress we’ve made on the most important project is making it look less and less likely that we’re ever gonna help anybody in the way that matters most. Everything I’ve seen, everything I can’t talk about but you’re gonna hear about pretty soon, I mean I’m not the smartest guy in the world but to me this is impossible.” His eyes gleamed in the fading sunlight as they filled with tears. “We’re stuck here. Mark’s dead and we’re stuck and I don’t think we’re ever gonna see anybody else ever again.” With that, Ryan stood up and walked inside.

Chapter 12

Finally, the week before Halloween, Mayor Lucas told Theo that the science committee would be presenting its findings that evening.

“Do you have any questions for me beforehand?” Lucas asked.

“Just two, I think,” said Theo. “I’m getting the impression from Ryan that the news isn’t very good. Is there anything you can tell me? Any kind of preview I can get so I know what I’m in for?”

“I don’t know much more than you do,” said Lucas. “They gave me a little bit of an overview but I’m truly going to be getting all the info at the same exact time as you at tonight’s presentation.” He thought for a moment. “I suppose I can tell you that I also got the impression that the news isn’t what we had hoped for, but I also am hearing whispers that there are elements of the findings that are downright fascinating. Small comfort, I’m sure, but there may be something positive hidden in there.”

Theo didn’t feel much better after hearing the mayor’s thoughts. “I… appreciate that… I guess we’ll hope for the best and plan for the worst.”

Mayor Lucas smiled. “I had an aunt who used to say ‘Set your expectations low and you’ll never be disappointed.’ Personally, I think that’s a depressing way to live one’s life. Let’s agree to be cautiously optimistic and hope for something that can provide some context to this world we live in. What do you think?”

“I think that’s a good idea, sir.”

“Good, Theo. Now, what about your second question?”

“Well… I don’t really have anything nice to wear.”

Theo entered the small ballroom ten minutes prior to the 8 PM scheduled start time for the presentation. As he scanned the room, he saw the thirty or so other people dressed in what might be called “business casual.” Theo felt a little overdressed in the crisp black suit Mayor Lucas had presented him from his personal collection and had tailored precisely to Theo’s body.

Theo took an available seat in the second row next to a woman who stared directly at the podium at the front of the room. Her eyes never wandered and she didn’t acknowledge Theo’s arrival at all. The people in the room all appeared to be seasoned government employees. As very few government workers had left the island the weekend of the Event, nearly everybody who had previously worked for Atlantic City or Ventnor was around and available for the positions Atlantic Island needed filled.

Theo considered this, and thought about his position on the mayor’s advisory committee. He still couldn’t reconcile his view of himself that he had carried for as long as he could remember with Mayor Lucas’s view of him. The mayor seemed to see him belonging among this group of people. No, more than that. Mayor Lucas thought Theo offered the government and the island something unique, an “x factor” that couldn’t be found among the tried and true government employees.

Theo appreciated everything about Mayor Lucas, and everything that the man continued to do for him, but as he scanned the room he just couldn’t see how he belonged with all these older, wiser, experienced people. He wished he could be sitting with his friends rather than next to this woman with her bat-like, nearly unblinking stare. But no, most of Theo’s friends were home anxiously awaiting his return and Ryan, of course, was in the next room with the rest of the science team preparing to stand politely in the rear as the team’s findings were presented.

The lights dimmed, signaling the start of the presentation and shaking Theo loose from his self-deprecation. Mayor Lucas approached the podium to polite applause. Theo was glad to see at least the mayor was dressed for a formal event.

“Good evening,” said Mayor Lucas. He wore his same calm, friendly smile that Theo had come to know from their private meetings, but he spoke in a more official, stilted manner than he did with Theo or in his speeches to the populace of the island. Theo realized that the Mayor Lucas he saw before him tonight, the down-to-business serious Mayor Lucas, was the affected, artificial character. The charming, bright spirit Theo saw all other times was the true Sam Lucas, a reflection of who the mayor had been since childhood. Theo wondered how hard it was for the mayor to play this part, to be what people thought they needed him to be and not himself.

“We are here tonight, as you know, to hear from our esteemed science committee. Led by Dr. Johnson, this team includes the finest minds we have available to us, including one who is a student in our school.”

Low rumbles of conversation greeted the statement. Theo wondered if the reaction to his being on the advisory committee would be as uncomfortable as the reaction to Ryan’s being a part of the science team.

“Dr. Johnson and his team have been tasked with an enormous responsibility ranging from…” Mayor Lucas paused to look down at the podium. Theo realized the mayor was consulting his notes. There was something strangely empowering in seeing signs of the mayor’s humanity.

The mayor continued, “Ranging from geological studies to tidal analysis to marine biology to meteorology, and that is just scratching the surface. We have charged them with an enormous responsibility, demanded of them a series of answers, and now we await their full report.

“Please understand the seriousness with which we ask you to keep this information in the strictest confidence. My committee and I will decide what is appropriate to disseminate to the citizens of Atlantic Island at the town meeting Halloween night. Until then, as difficult as it may be, please do not share these findings, and be very careful discussing anything with each other. I hope you all understand how catastrophic information can be in the wrong hands and without the proper explanation.”

As the mayor spoke, Theo caught site of Deputy Mayor Tiberius sitting in the front row a few seats down. Tiberius looked as miserable as ever and his expression didn’t change in the slightest as the mayor spoke. It occurred to Theo that Tiberius might well be a part of Mayor Lucas’s committee. How could he hope to gain favor and acceptance among the committee members when one of them was so powerful and disliked Theo so intensely? How did Lucas even think it was possible?

The mayor was wrapping up his introduction. “It is with great appreciation that I turn things over to Dr. Johnson and his team. Please give them a warm welcome.”

Dr. Johnson stepped out of a door at the side of the room. The rest of the science team followed him, including several men and women and Ryan, who looked incredibly uncomfortable. Theo wondered what his friend was thinking. Ryan had been dreading this presentation and now had to stand and watch the reactions around the room as the news was revealed.

“Good evening ladies and gentlemen,” said Dr. Johnson. Ryan often spoke reverently of Dr. Johnson. The science team called him the “mad scientist,” but it was out of respect and a touch of awe rather than disrespect or mockery. Theo could see how the scientist’s glasses and gray moustache made the nickname fit. Tonight though, Dr. Johnson didn’t look mad. He looked nervous and shifted his weight from one foot to the other as he spoke.

“When the Event struck, we pulled together every single scientific resource we had at our disposal to investigate the circumstances surrounding the atmospheric disruption, the seismic and tidal activity and, perhaps most important, the seeming disappearance of land beyond the narrow strip that comprises our island.

“Our most publicized effort was in coordination with other government agencies. We flew several helicopters a significant distance, only to discover nothing but ocean. This was only the beginning of our explorations.”

He gestured to a woman seated in the front row on the side opposite Tiberius and Lucas. She raised a remote and clicked a button. The screen behind the podium, which had until now displayed the Atlantic Island insignia changed to show a map of the island. Dr. Johnson lifted a laser pointer and activated the red light, placing a dot in the middle of the map.

“As most of you know, the Event resulted in the land beyond roughly the first quarter of Margate heading south to disappear.” He moved his hand and the red dot danced in a line along the southern border of the island. “Similarly, the land abruptly disappeared just before the north end of what was Atlantic City. Not far at all from where we sit right now, as a matter of fact.” Another flick of his wrist and another illustrative laser line along the north shore.

“Once most of the commotion on the island had died down, we sent out a marine exploration vehicle. A drone device piloted remotely from land and constructed to withstand very deep water exploration. We conducted missions off all four coasts to collect samples from the ocean floor. On the south and north ends, the soil appears uniform for a great distance. On the west end and the east end, what we used to refer to as the bay side and the ocean side, we found something interesting.

“The samples our vehicle collected are different than those on the other two coasts. I won’t bother you with the details beyond saying that it involves mineral content. It is more important to tell you that beyond this point,” a laser line in the ocean on the west side, “and this point,” another line in the ocean on the east side, “the sediment matches the compounds found on the north and south. We mapped this out carefully and found that if one traces the exact line where the soil changes,” he pointed to the woman in the front row and she advanced the slide show. The previously stoic government employees gasped as the new slide added a bright red circle fit perfectly to the north and south ends of Atlantic Island.

“It appears the ocean has hidden what really happened,” said Dr. Johnson. “While it appears on the surface that our island was ‘sliced’ off the rest of the land, it appears that our island was just the visible part of a perfect spherical chunk.”

“Excuse me, Doctor,” called out a man from the back of the room, “but don’t you mean ‘circular?’”

“Oh, no,” said Dr. Johnson. “I’m afraid I mean spherical. The samples we’ve taken from the perimeter of the circle have provided strong evidence that the part of the world we live on, whether it survived, or moved or something else, was taken in a giant ball incorporating land, sea and air. We think that a good deal of the noise reported during the Event and the unusual light features in the atmosphere were a result of this molecular disconnect and disruption of water and air.”

“So wait,” said the man in the back, “if our land, water and air were all that remained after the Event, where does the sky and ocean all around us come from?”

“That is a good question,” said Dr. Johnson, “and I will be happy to entertain your questions at the end of the evening if I haven’t addressed them in my presentation. I will say that we thought similarly. At all land edges of the sphere, what I will call ‘our’ land was fused. Superheated. We found nothing abnormal in those samples beyond that.

“We have one more discovery to discuss with you. I’m afraid just like what I have told you, this discovery will raise more questions than it answers. Several weeks ago we sent a helicopter out on a very far reaching mission.” He signaled for the image on the screen to be changed. The new image showed a faded outline of the eastern part of the United States with only the small sliver of Atlantic Island in bold color. “We sent the helicopter to right about here.” Dr. Johnson pointed a dot on the map. Theo felt the hair on the back of his neck stand up as he realized immediately where that dot was located.

“This location, geographically speaking, would be where one would expect to find the city of Philadelphia,” said Dr. Johnson. “It is a location many tens of miles beyond the presumed edge of the sphere, and as we expected it was covered with water. We sent the exploration vehicle into the ocean at that point. I am afraid…” he shifted from side to side and braced himself to say what he needed to say. “I am afraid to tell you that we found Philadelphia.”

The men and women in the room all started yelling at once. The Deputy Mayor rose from his seat and turned his icy glare on them. They quickly quieted down. Dr. Johnson was sweating and the rest of his team exhibited similar signs of distress. This must be the part Ryan was so afraid of, thought Theo.

“As I said,” continued Dr. Johnson, “We are confident that we found the remains of the city of Philadelphia approximately one hundred feet below water. The tallest buildings of the city were terribly damaged at some point so none of them rises above the water. Most smaller buildings are reasonably intact but with one glaring exception: the level of corrosion on metal surfaces matches what we would expect to see after an object has been exposed to salt water for between thirty and forty years.”

He signaled and the slide changed to an underwater image showing a close-up of a piece of metal. It was too close for Theo to make out what it was, though he assumed it was some kind of beam used in a building. What was clear in the image was the degree of wear the metal had experienced. Barnacles clung to the decomposed surface.

“I’m sure you want to know what we were able to determine about the cause of the advanced corrosion. We thought that perhaps something was wrong with the salt content of the water, but there wasn’t. A theory was raised that maybe something in the Philadelphia air had pre-weakened metal in the area, making it more susceptible to the water. We didn’t find anything abnormal in the air above the ocean surface. We continued our explorations and it became clear that there were marked differences in some of the structures from what we expected to see from photographs. And then… we found this.”

The slide changed to a photo of Philadelphia’s city hall. The building was battered but maintained it’s recognizable shape. Draped over the roof of the building were the remains of two giant flags, partially bolted to the structure but twisted slightly from wriggling in the water as the photo was captured. Chatter among the government employees grew louder and more convoluted, and someone screamed. Visible on each of the flags, though the fabric was as worn and distorted as everything else in the dull underwater landscape, was a giant Nazi swastika.

Chapter 13

Even Deputy Mayor Tiberius could not easily calm the crowd after the science team’s big reveal. It took a few minutes of everyone talking over each other for curiosity to take hold and the question and answer session to begin.

Dr. Johnson did not have many answers. No, they hadn’t yet been able to send explorations to other major cities, though a trip to Manhattan was planned for November. The issue was the travel limits of the helicopters. Construction was underway for an exploratory boat, but they didn’t have a timeframe for completion at the moment.

Of course, everyone wanted to know the significance of the oddities found in Philadelphia. Dr. Johnson was very hesitant to venture too much of a guess, but said that more samples were taken and several studies were underway.

Theo could tell that nobody was satisfied with these answers, but not a single person had the confidence to be the one to call out what appeared to be obvious: the Philadelphia the science team had discovered was not the one they knew.

Mayor Lucas, trying to maintain his own composure, thanked the science committee and everyone in attendance. He reminded the audience of the importance of keeping the information confidential. It seemed that these top tier employees were scared enough to keep their mouths shut. Besides, Theo reasoned, they wouldn’t want to be laughed at or thought crazy for telling what they knew.

As Theo went to leave, hoping he could catch up with Ryan for the walk home, Mayor Lucas took him aside. Theo saw Paul Tiberius over the mayor’s shoulder, glowering at him.

“Three nights from now I want to meet with my committee,” said Lucas. “It is going to be our job to decide what to tell the citizens on Halloween and what, if anything, we do beyond furthering the science team’s research. Please give it some serious thought, Theo. We are all in uncharted territory here and your opinion is just as valid as that of anybody else sitting at my table.”

Theo told the mayor he would give it all the thought he could. They said goodnight and Theo raced out into the streets of Atlantic Island, looking for Ryan. He found Ryan walking by himself, his head down. “Wait up, man,” called Theo.

Ryan looked over his shoulder and raised his hand to acknowledge Theo’s presence. He didn’t smile. Theo jogged up to him. “Do you get it now?” asked Ryan. “Do you get what I’ve been so damned crazy about these past few weeks?”

“Yeah,” said Theo, “I get it. I’m sorry you had to keep this to yourself for so long.”

“So what do you want to do about the others?”

“I think we should tell them, Ry.”

Ryan chuckled sarcastically. “Yeah, cause they’ll all believe that we magically appeared in another universe. You realize that’s what Dr. Johnson thinks happened, right?” He kicked at a chunk of asphalt by the edge of the road. “That’s what the big fancy science team came up with. Goddamned magic spell. Next we’ll report there’s a big problem with people pulling rabbits out of hats.”

“I’m not gonna say it doesn’t sound crazy,” said Theo, “but Jesus, we’ve been on this island for months now. I can see with my own eyes that there’s just water where there should be land. None of it makes any damn sense. At least this ‘other universe’ theory takes a stab at giving some answers.”

Ryan frowned. “What about the confidentiality thing?”

“I don’t know,” said Theo, “We have to trust our friends. I’m not interested in a rift developing with you and me on the inside and the rest on the outside. We have to give them the benefit of the doubt all the way around.

Ryan nodded. “So you think we can tell Michelle and the rest? That they won’t think we’ve lost our minds?”

Theo laughed. “Dude, I have to go sit with the mayor and his top advisors and decide how not to make the whole population think that we are all out of our minds. Seriously, our friends trust us. They trust you, Ry, just like I do. We can confide in them, believe me.”

“You’re screwing with me, right?” Bill laughed. The other teens around the living room had equally incredulous looks. Ryan looked at Theo for support.

“I wish we were,” said Theo. He was holding Kylee’s hand and had felt her nervously squeeze his as Ryan gave a summarized version of Dr. Johnson’s report. “This is the same stuff the science committee presented to the head people in the government.”

“And how did they take it?” asked Jamie.

“Just about as well as you guys,” said Theo.

Bill had stood from his seat and was pacing around the room. “Jeez, man, Nazis? Nazis?”

Ryan smiled. “If it helps, we’re pretty sure the Nazis are dead.”

“Okay, so I’m gonna try to be reasonable,” said Kylee, “and believe me, reason is a hard thing to hold on to at the moment. The science committee thinks the Event was us getting…yanked or something into another universe, right?”

“Yeah,” said Ryan, “that’s about right.”

“Okay… how?”

“What do you mean?”

Kylee ran her hand through her hair. Her loose chunk of bangs was long enough now that it stayed behind her ear. Theo assumed she had replaced one involuntary move with another. “I mean how did all this land and water and air and buildings and people get moved to another universe? How the hell does something like that happen?”

Ryan shrugged. “We don’t really know.” He glanced at Michelle who was sitting quiet but clearly uncomfortable. “What I mean is, we simply don’t have the kind of equipment we would need to be able to test that kind of stuff. Like the science team can analyze dirt, water, air, you name it… but to test their theory about the Event, I mean that’s beyond taking samples on Earth or any other planet… this is universe stuff we’re talking about. Quantum physics and wormholes. It’s not that the big brains don’t have any ideas. I know we don’t have access to the very smartest people in the world but our team is damned smart. Still, we just don’t have the capability to test something like that. I wouldn’t even know where to begin.”

“Can we get back to the Nazis?” asked Bill.

“Actually I’d really love to talk about that a little,” said Theo. “I have to discuss all this stuff at a pretty high level in a few days, and I’m still way too confused about all of it. So this world we’re in now—” he held up a hand as his friends all started to jump in. “Give me a sec here. This world we’re in now…we know two things about it, right? There were Nazis in Philadelphia and everything at least from here to and including Philly is underwater, and for a long time, according to the science team. Does that make any sense to anyone?”

“How long is a long time underwater?” asked Kylee.

“Probably between thirty and forty years,” said Ryan. “Most I’ve talked to are leaning toward forty.”

“Okay,” said Theo, doing the math in his head, “So assuming this world is on the same year as ours, Philly has been underwater since somewhere between the early seventies to early eighties, and Ry’s guys think it’s more likely the seventies.”

“So much for disco fever,” said Bill.

“How do we know it’s like the real Nazis?” asked Michelle. “Couldn’t the flag belong to some kind of Nazi sympathizing group or something?”

“Seems possible,” said Theo, “but the flags were on City Hall. I can’t see a circumstance in any universe where a bunch of angry skinheads could overthrow an American city. I could be wrong.”

“So if we’re talking about the real Nazis,” said Jamie, “like German, Hitler Nazis, I guess they won World War II.”

“Makes sense to me,” said Theo. The others nodded.

“Nazis…damn,” said Bill.

“Can they do some more exploring down there? Find more artifacts or whatever?” asked Kylee.

“I think it’s a good idea,” said Theo. “The science committee is already trying to prep the helicopters to go to New York, and they are building a boat of some kind.”

“A scientific exploratory vessel,” said Ryan.

“Nerd boat. Awesome,” said Bill. Jamie smacked his arm. “Sorry,” he said.

“Anyhow,” said Theo, “I think it’s not enough for the science team to do its research. Not that that stuff isn’t crazy important. I just think I should tell the mayor that we should be finding out more about what happened to this world.”

“What difference does it make?” asked Michelle. “Shouldn’t our concern be the people here on the island and how we can get home?”

Ryan looked pained at this. Theo wondered how many private conversations the two of them had had where Michelle inquired about getting home and Ryan had to keep his serious concerns about their predicament under wraps.

“I get what you’re saying, Michelle,” said Theo, “but people need something beyond ‘we’re working on it.’ They need answers and information, and we might be able to get them more to think about if we explore this world a little bit. Besides, it does have an effect on us. It’s almost the end of October and it’s still summer weather, plus those insane rainstorms… that’s nothing to do with the Event or our island. It’s whatever’s wrong with this world and it’s something we have to live with.

Michelle was surprisingly agitated. “Whatever, I just think that people don’t need to know anything unless it’s specifically necessary to help them. There’s a difference between government and citizens.”

Theo promised her he would think carefully before giving any advice to Mayor Lucas. He actually had no idea what he would say. He was scared to death of the upcoming committee meeting. Lucas had placed so much trust in him, and he couldn’t even unify his friends’ views. How was he ever going to have any influence among the most powerful people in the country?

Chapter 14

In the late hours of the night before Theo was scheduled to meet the mayor and the other advisors, Jamie arrived at Theo and Kylee’s place looking frightened. Kylee put her arm around Jamie’s shoulders and brought her in to the apartment. “What’s wrong?” she asked.

“It’s Bill. He hasn’t come home.”

“Jamie, he rarely comes home at a normal hour.”

“Still,” she said, “it’s late even for him.”

Theo was sitting on the couch mulling over his upcoming meeting with the mayor and his advisors. He noticed Jamie and moved over to make room for Kylee and her to sit down.

“Bill hasn’t come home,” said Kylee.

“Well,” said Theo, “that doesn’t necessarily mean anything. I know Bill’s track record and all but what makes you so sure he’s in trouble?”

“What makes you sure he’s not?” asked Jamie. “I just cant… not after Mark… I want to check out the hospital but I’m so scared.”

“We’ll go with you, don’t worry,” said Kylee. “Let’s go as fast as we can. I’m sure Bill will be wondering where you are when he gets home.”

They left the apartment and walked as fast as they could to the hospital. Theo was convinced that nothing was wrong with his friend. There couldn’t possibly be anything wrong with Bill, could there? They raced along the dark streets and honed in on the bright lights of the hospital door.

The same large woman who had been working the night they found Mark was sitting behind the desk when they entered. She fussed over the keyboard for a minute and then leaned back triumphantly. “Here he is. Bill Mansfield. He’s in the ER. Down the hall to the left.”

They ran toward the entrance to the emergency room. A nurse working at the desk in the ER directed them toward the curtained bay where Bill was waiting. Nobody said a word. Theo knew they were all thinking the same thing. Even though Bill wasn’t in the ICU (not yet, his mind reminded him) they were all expecting a repeat of Mark’s long, painfully drawn out death. Another sacrifice to the island.

Theo stepped in front of his friends and pulled back the curtain. Bill was on the examination bed, wide awake and reading an old magazine. One of his eyes was swollen and red, his face was bruised everywhere and there were bandages on his nose. He smiled at his friends and winced at the pain.

“So good of you guys to come to my party!” Bill said, his voice slow and a little unsteady. Theo thought that might have something to do with the morphine being delivered to Bill’s arm.

Jamie raced forward and threw her arms around him. “I thought you were dead!”

Theo couldn’t help but smile. The distance between Bill and Jamie since Mark’s death seemed to have melted away.

“Nah, I’m not dead. Feel like crap though,” said Bill.

“What the hell happened to you?” asked Theo.

“Eh, you know, wrong place, wrong time.”

“Bill,” said Jamie, “tell us what happened! You’ve had us all so scared.”

Bill sighed. “Fine, fine. It’s not the greatest story. I’d rather tell you something that didn’t end with me looking like this… but okay.” He took a deep breath and winced again. He spoke slowly and carefully, struggling for lucidity against the drugs in his system.

“So you guys know how I’ve been putting in time doing repair work with the construction crew after school.”

“You mean what you do when you’re supposed to be doing homework,” said Jamie.

“Jeez babe, I’ve told you already: this construction gig is what matters. I’m outta school pretty soon and it’s not like I was Harvard-bound before the Event. Give a battered guy a break! Okay, so I was working on an apartment along the boardwalk, patching up some cracks in the concrete with the stuff we’ve been making from the sand, and I hear something going on outside, like someone begging. So I look outside—”

“Seriously?” asked Theo. “That was your first mistake, man, nothing good has ever come from you looking into any kind of commotion.”

Kylee jabbed him with her elbow. “Let him talk!”

Theo laughed. He was just so relieved that Bill was alive and more or less in one piece.

“To continue,” said Bill, “I look out and there on the boardwalk is that Bertier ass clown with the bald head, and that chick he hangs out with, with all the piercings. They’re giving a hard time to this old lady. Like, what a friggin stereotype, a couple bullies picking on an old woman. So, yeah, that happened.”

Jamie frowned. “And I’m guessing you didn’t leave well enough alone.”

Bill laughed, “Wow, you know me so well. Nah, the lady was really upset. So I went down there and as I got closer I heard her begging them to not take her food. Seems like they’ve been taking some of other people’s dinner rations. I guess Bertier’s gigantic head needs a lot of calories. Anyhow, I walked up to them and said ‘Is there a problem here?’”

Kylee shook her head with a smile. “You seriously opened with ‘Is there a problem here?’ God you are a walking cliché.”

“Hey, it works in the movies,” said Bill. “Anyhow, the big skank tells me to go away. Well, she said something like that but with really salty language. And Bertier gets this posture like he’s gonna try to kick my ass. I told them I’d really like to encourage them to leave the poor old lady alone, and Bertier says, and I quote, ‘Move along buddy, unless you want trouble.’” He turned to Kylee. “Now who’s the cliché? So I tell them that I’m not going anywhere until they leave the old lady alone. Bertier takes a swing at me. He’s built like a house but he’s pretty slow. So I duck his punch and I throw one of my own. Connect with the side of his face. Next thing I know I get hit so hard from behind that I see stars, and I fall to the ground. I see one of Bertier’s friends, the dude with a ponytail, standing over me. They all get in a couple more quick shots and run off. That’s how I ended up with all these bruises and whatever. But I’m fine, really. Douchebags had to hit me from behind to get the job done.”

“But you could have let us know where you were!” said Jamie.

“I didn’t exactly have access to a cell phone or anything,” said Bill.

Jamie’s face reddened. “Well… still…”

“I think we’re all just glad you’re okay,” said Kylee.

Theo couldn’t believe they were all so relaxed. “What about Bertier and his gang? Are we just going to let them get away with this?”

“I gave a report to a member of the Security Force when I came in,” said Bill. “They know about the gang and somebody’s gonna talk to them. I don’t know where it goes from there. My experience with the legal system in Atlantic Island has been a little…bumpy.”

“Well I’m going to follow up this weekend at the precinct,” said Kylee. “We don’t exactly have a serious crime problem here, not since the Security Force established control. I really don’t see how a bunch of kids making trouble expect to get away with anything. They shouldn’t.”

Theo nodded. “I’m going to mention it in my meeting with the mayor. I have so much I should say that I’m afraid people are going to argue about; it’s nice to have something that everyone should agree on.”

“Yeah,” agreed Bill, “picking on little old ladies really isn’t a popular pastime.”

“Neither is theft, assault, battery…” said Kylee.

Theo put his arm around her. “So glad you’ve been paying attention at work, sweetheart.” She scowled at him and then laughed. It was a good feeling to sit there knowing that Bill was okay, Theo thought. They were due for a few good breaks.

Chapter 15

Theo arrived at the mayor’s office and checked in with the receptionist. He didn’t know anybody else in the room as both the mayor and, thankfully, the deputy mayor had not yet appeared. There were seven others in the room, five men and two women. Theo recognized Dr. Johnson immediately, and felt sure he had seen at least most of the others at the science committee’s presentation.

One of the men came over to him and introduced himself as Larry Dougherty, the former chief of police of Atlantic City and now the Assistant Chief of Security and Defense. Theo felt immediate sympathy for the man who had to answer directly to Tiberius. At least he had Officer Menendez working beneath him.

Assistant Chief Dougherty told Theo that Menendez spoke highly of Theo and his friends. “He says your girlfriend is working at the station!” exclaimed Dougherty. “You should be very proud of her. It’s a noble calling to serve on the Security Force in any capacity.” Theo assured him that he was very proud of Kylee.

Over Dougherty’s head, Theo saw the doors to the mayor’s office opening. The receptionist ushered them all inside. Mayor Lucas was sitting behind his desk. A number of chairs were arranged in a circle extending from the desk. The mayor greeted each person as he or she entered. His eyes lit up when he acknowledged Theo. “Theo! Come in! Have a seat.” Mayor Lucas nodded his head as he spoke, emphasizing the seat directly across the circle from his desk. Theo took that seat, placing himself in the middle of the group of advisors.

The advisors, working on finding their seats and engaging each other in conversation, suddenly parted. In their stead entered Deputy Mayor Tiberius. He wore unusual attire: a black button-down shirt and black jeans with black cowboy boots. As always upon seeing the deputy mayor, Theo felt both a chill in the air and a strong desire to see if the man had anything in his closet that wasn’t black.

Tiberius stood in front of the chair next to Lucas’s desk. He made a point of staying upright while the mayor asked everyone to be seated. Only when the other advisors had taken their seats did Tiberius take his. Mayor Lucas rose from his chair and clasped his hands together. “I am so glad you all could be here,” he said. “These are trying times, my friends, but people look to us to provide guidance… to provide leadership. Most of you sat with me when the Event struck. It was your advice; your decisions and your actions that helped guide this island back from the brink of absolute chaos and devastation. I may be the figurehead (believe me, both a blessing and a curse) but you seated here today are the light that leads the populace out of the darkness. For that, I am forever humbly in your debt.”

“Excuse me,” said the chilling voice of Paul Tiberius, “but before we go any further I simply must protest your choice to include this…child in our proceedings.” The deputy mayor’s long finger pointed across the circle of chairs at Theo. Theo felt the man’s cold eyes penetrating into him. He did his best to stay planted firmly in his chair and not run from the room.

“Paul,” said Mayor Lucas, “I understand your concerns and the personal issues you have with Mr. Essex over last month’s trial. Having said that, I hope you will take the time to realize that we need proper representation of all concerned parties in our country. Theo is one of the finest young men I’ve had the pleasure to meet in all my years as mayor. He understands on a deep level the needs of his contemporaries and has a comprehension of government affairs and developments beyond his years.”

Though Theo appreciated the mayor’s kind words, the awkwardness of being praised while sitting in the room made him even more uncomfortable than when he was being called out by Tiberius. The rest of the advisors sat silent, watching the battle of power between the leaders of the country.

“Sam,” said Tiberius, “you’ve been under tremendous stress since the Event. Under those circumstances it is easy for even a man of your numerous wonderful capabilities to be led astray by those who would attempt to harm our nation. I fear that this young man may be confusing you.”

“I assure you my mind is my own,” said the mayor. “As leader of this country, it is my decision who I wish to sit on my advisory council. I have selected Theo Essex as I have selected all others in this room. I suggest we move on to more pressing matters.”

“Very well,” said Tiberius. His lips made a thin smile that was not reflected in his eyes. “I just hope you don’t come to find that this choice you have made was the beginning of your undoing.”

There was a brief, uncomfortable silence in the room. Mayor Lucas looked around and mustered the will to present the advisors with a broad smile. “Alright, on to business! Dr. Johnson, I’d like to thank you for the presentation you gave the other night and for all the work you and your team have done and continue to do in the service of Atlantic Island. The task for our meeting tonight is very clear, though hardly simple. We need to decide what to tell the citizens of the island at the town hall, and we need to plan how we proceed with what the science committee has shown us.”

Officer Dougherty raised his hand. “Mr. Mayor, if I may,” he began.

“Yes, Officer Dougherty, please.”

“Well, sir, our top concern for the town hall should be keeping the people from breaking out into a riot. The information we now know is confusing, improbable, scary, and seems to answer the question of ‘when will we get home?’ with ‘never.’ I can make sure the Security Force is well represented at the town hall, even beyond what we had initially discussed. Still, I encourage you to consider the psychological ramifications of what you’re going to tell people.”

“It is an opportunity to remind people of how much we have accomplished in such a short time,” said the woman two seats down from Theo. “We have created a country out of the ashes of the old world and we need to keep the focus on that. Most people have fully accepted this life as the only one they have available to them. We need to encourage this in every way.”

The mayor nodded and then looked at Theo. Theo wished a trap door would open under his chair. “Theo, what do you think? You, more than any of us, have knowledge of the concerns of the citizens. What do they want? What do they need?”

Theo’s mind raced as he considered what to say. He could feel all eyes in the room on him. “Sir, I think the people want to know what’s happened.” He looked around the room. Nobody seemed ready to jump out of a chair and attack him. He took a breath and continued. “The people deserve to know what has been found. Sure there will be a lot of people upset and scared. I think we all feel that way about it. But with the right encouragement they can come through all that and be even more united.”

“Mr. Essex,” said Tiberius, “it’s very…noble of you to speak for the people and to seek transparency for them. As I am a firm believer in educating our youth, allow me to teach you something about governing. The populace is a mass of sheep, and the government is the shepherd that guides them and protects them from the wolves. You give the people too much credit when you assume they can handle the kind of information you propose we give them. You think that they will only be angry if they are sheltered. That is nothing compared to the misplaced anger they will feel when confronted with the truth. They will seek to tear down this government in their furor and if they succeed only anarchy will remain. Anarchy is doom, Mr. Essex. A firm ruling hand is survival.”

“But Deputy Mayor Tiberius, the people miss their loved ones. They worry about them. Maybe it will give them something positive to know that what happened in the Event happened to us… that there’s a chance all their friends and families off the island are totally fine.”

“Friends and families who they will, in all likelihood, never see again,” said Tiberius. “To long for such things is a weakness that will eat at our young nation like a cancer. As far as we are concerned, those ‘loved ones’ are dead and gone. The past. We concern ourselves with the present and the future.”

Theo couldn’t help but glance at Mayor Lucas as the deputy mayor spoke. He saw the sadness in the man’s eyes at the talk of loved ones being gone forever.

“Paul, I understand where you are coming from,” said Lucas. “We’ve talked endlessly about the need to push the country ahead, whatever that implies. Still, Theo’s point has value. If I don’t give some answers on Halloween there will be rumors that we are hiding things. It’s only natural for people to be suspicious of those who lead them. We can not allow suspicion to blossom into conspiracy.”

There were mumbles of agreement around the room. Theo realized the dichotomy of loyalty. The advisors had a deep loyalty to and respect for Mayor Lucas, but had a fear of the deputy mayor that kept them from voicing full support. Lucas did not seem to be too upset about Tiberius’s objections. Theo assumed the mayor was well used to maintaining the balance of power in these meetings, and probably in the course of running the government as well.

Tiberius was not satisfied with the mayor’s explanation. “You are proposing to go before thousands of people and tell them what, exactly? Information that I myself am not even positive is true…that we’ve been transported to another universe? You’re likely to be laughed out of the room before the riots begin, and they will begin. You give people far too much credit, Sam. We are the order they need. We need to guide them with an iron hand and that means telling them that while investigations have been underway for some time, the findings are strictly confidential and we are using that research to help us help all of them. Do you see?”

“Perhaps,” said the mayor, “we should take a break from this line of discussion and talk instead about what we the ‘iron hand’ should be doing about Dr. Johnson’s findings.”

“Sir,” began Dr. Johnson, “We are very close to finalizing the adjustments to the helicopter that should allow for a trip to the approximate coordinates of New York City. In addition we are making tremendous improvements to the deep-sea exploration vessels. We should be prepared by mid-November for another trip to Philadelphia, with a series of mini dives along the route through New Jersey.”

“Very good,” said the mayor, “but tell me, what is your gut feeling? Have we truly been dislodged from our own universe?” Theo saw the weariness in the mayor’s face. He felt terrible for Mayor Lucas. Here was a genuinely good man facing unique and extraordinary circumstances. Not even the Founding Fathers had been forced to lead people through this much uncertainty.

“I’m afraid so,” said Dr. Johnson. “All evidence points to-”

“Evidence?” yelled Tiberius. “Evidence? Doctor, your so-called evidence is based on finding Nazi flags. How can you say for certain that we aren’t survivors of a great flood that occurred during the Event?”

Dr. Johnson tensed. Theo watched the man carefully, curious to see if anyone would truly challenge Tiberius. “Sir, I can’t say for certain. Still, it is extremely unlikely that that would be the case. The island in the world we knew was at a much lower elevation than the inland areas. It is hard to imagine a scenario where we could remain above water that rose so far over the buildings of Philadelphia, unless we factor in what we know and theorize that our island sits on top of this universe’s version of the island, thereby raising it to a much higher elevation. This would explain the gradual sloping of the island with higher elevation on the former bayside and low elevation along the beach.”

Theo looked at Tiberius. The deputy mayor had not expected such a well-developed rebuttal. Theo felt a bizarre sense of pride for Dr. Johnson, as if the man was here standing in for Ryan. You tell him Doc!

“And you expect,” said Tiberius, “that the average man or woman on this island will buy that?” Theo heard the advisors shifting in their seats. Tiberius had just brought the conversation back to where nobody wanted it to be.

“You wish to tell them something else?” asked Dr. Johnson. He seemed genuinely confused.

“I wish to tell them nothing!” shouted Tiberius. “We will say nothing about any of this!”

“That is enough, Paul!” said Mayor Lucas. He looked genuinely furious. Theo had never seen him looking like that. “You wish to tell everyone his or her place and yet you seem in danger of forgetting yours. You are a valued part of my committee and I appreciate your concerns but nobody is here to give orders. I will listen to your opinions and make a decision as I have always done. Do you understand?”

“I understand…” said Tiberius slowly, “I understand that you have been overwhelmed by your responsibility and may not be suited to run this country any longer.”

“Hold on just a minute-” started Officer Dougherty, rising from his chair.

Tiberius wheeled around to face him. “Don’t you dare cross me, Dougherty! You serve at my pleasure and what I give I can take away!” He turned and addressed the group. “You are all fools blindly following a man who is operating far beyond his expertise. You deserve the fate that awaits you all.” He turned and walked out of the room in long, purposeful strides.

“Well… that was uncomfortable,” said Mayor Lucas with a smile. “Now then, I’d like to iron out some details for Halloween before we go into a discussion about the first quarter of our new school’s operation. Theo, I take it you will have much to say about that.”

Chapter 16

Theo and his friends walked to Boardwalk Hall from Theo and Kylee’s apartment. Living at the edge of the city made commutes much easier than they had been from the penthouse apartment where they had taken refuge after the Event. As Theo watched people stream toward the arena he was taken aback by his own emotions. Was it possible he felt sentimental thinking back to the tumult and chaos of those first few weeks? Theo would have laughed at the ridiculousness of human nature if he weren’t sure that the others would give him a hard time for bursting into laughter.

Theo felt a strange sense of privilege and had discussed it with his friends earlier in the evening. They shared his feelings. The unusual circumstance of having one of them in the security offices, one on the science committee and, of course, Theo himself on Mayor Lucas’s advisory committee led to the teens having a strong sense of what was really happening on the island. It was no small coincidence that Theo and Ryan in particular were as well positioned as they were due to their age. It seemed that Atlantic Island’s leadership had made the uncommon choice to value the opinion of the younger members of the population.

Of course, not everyone felt that the teenagers should be allowed a voice of any sort. Paul Tiberius had made his opinion crystal clear at the advisory meeting. Theo felt responsible in some way for being the straw that broke the camel’s back. He was not foolish enough to think that rapport between the mayor and his deputy had always been perfectly civil. No, they probably argued frequently. Mayor Lucas had basically told Theo as much. Still, he knew that his presence had tipped the balance beyond a point of recovery. He had disrupted a tenuous relationship at the core of the fledgling “leadership.” He couldn’t feel good about that no matter how Mayor Lucas tried to assure him it wasn’t his fault.

Most of the meeting after Tiberius stormed out had gone well. The group had dissenters to be sure, but Lucas made a point of hearing them out and they treated the mayor, and Theo for that matter, with a great amount of respect.

Theo had strongly advised the mayor to give the students a reason to be in school and a reason to strive to achieve. He explained that many of those he spoke with were lost and confused without the possibility of college. Too often, he said, he had heard the words “what’s the point?” and he himself wondered the same. When he finished he looked around expecting the others to laugh or to attack him as Tiberius had done. Instead he saw serious consideration and heads nodding up and down.

The mayor had asked Theo to stay behind when the others left. “Well Theo, what did you think of our little club?”

“I’m sorry it didn’t go more smoothly for you, Mayor.”

“Nonsense,” said Lucas, “I was thrilled with the amount we accomplished. You spoke wisely and with passion, just as I had hoped.”

“But sir, the deputy mayor—”

“I’ve told you before not to worry about him,” said Lucas. He looked angry. Theo thought, but also tired. “I’m serious, Theo. The deputy mayor forgets that he is an elected official, as am I. We serve the people, not the other way around. We’ve had to be a little unfair because of the Event. We gave ourselves some temporary powers, and we left the questions of terms and elections for another day. I do think that that day is drawing near. The people have a right to be heard, just as they have a right to be informed within reason, as we have discussed at length. I have done my best to lead the best way I know how, and I want to give the people of Atlantic Island the chance to tell me how I’ve done. The deputy mayor is not my running mate. He stands on his own two feet and he will face the judgment of the people as will I.”

“I agree with all of that sir, but I still didn’t want to be the reason for him to…spit in the face of your authority.”

Mayor Lucas laughed, suddenly and uncontrollably. He pulled out a handkerchief and blotted his eyes. “I’m… I’m sorry Theo! It’s just… all this stress really has me on edge and that just really tickled something.” He took a moment to compose himself. “You should know that Paul has questioned me from day one. He wanted to be mayor, you know. Tonight’s display may have been a little angrier than usual but it’s essentially the normal order of things. I dare say if Paul Tiberius agreed with me I’d truly believe we’d found ourselves in a different world.”

His face turned serious again. “I want you to remember something, Theo. The United States was founded with the understanding that the citizens could question and disagree with the government. It’s a concept I happen to like and would like to see continue here. The deputy mayor has a right to disagree with me. So does anyone. The day that I or anyone in the leadership decides that he or she is the only one with the right answers… that will be a dark day indeed.”

As Theo was about to leave the room, the mayor called to him one last time. “I’m proud of you Theo. You have reassured me that my faith in you is well placed. You have a bright future ahead of you.”

Theo struggled for the proper words. “Thank you, sir. I look forward to learning much more from you.”

Now, as Theo and his friends passed the security checkpoint and entered the promenade around the arena, his thoughts were with the mayor. Lucas had the unfortunate and unbelievable responsibility of keeping the public motivated and positive as they moved toward an uncertain future.

“So tell me, Kylee,” said Bill, “what’s the Security Force got planned for when the people start screaming, ‘Nazis!’ and rioting through the streets?”

She laughed. “I was thinking of screaming and running with them. Did you have another suggestion?”

Bill smiled. He was still significantly bruised from Bertier’s attack but he didn’t show any sign of discomfort. He hadn’t mentioned the attack since he left the hospital. Kylee was trying hard to get some information on the investigation. She was deeply concerned that the investigation was being brushed aside. Theo wondered if it had something to do with Tiberius.

Would Tiberius appear at the town hall? Theo guessed he probably would. He wasn’t sure Tiberius was scheduled to speak to the citizens as he had at the previous meeting. It wasn’t like the man was a fan of giving reports to laypeople.

Theo noticed Ryan looked nervous again, though certainly not as nervous as he had been the night of the science presentation. Theo couldn’t blame him. Weren’t they all nervous? They had no idea what exactly Mayor Lucas was going to decide to tell the people and nobody could anticipate what the reaction would be.

Theo looked at Michelle, clinging quietly to Ryan as always. He wondered again how much Michelle had tried to impress her feelings on Ryan. She had been very adamant that the government shouldn’t be sharing any of the science committee’s findings. Theo disliked her attitude, especially when she so rarely had anything to say about anything else. Of course, this made him feel guilty. He didn’t want to dislike anything about a girl who was both his friend’s girlfriend and the friend of his girlfriend. Knowing that Bill shared some of his feelings didn’t help all that much.

“Are you okay?” Kylee whispered.

“I guess…yeah. There’s just something… a feeling I can’t place.”

“I think that’s called a ‘sense of foreboding,’” she said.

“Yeah, I’ve heard that before,” said Theo, “I never really understood what that meant until now.”

“Well… what do you think is going to happen?”

“I don’t know. Maybe that’s part of it. I think Mayor Lucas is going to tell people some of what Ryan’s team discovered. It’s such a tough call. I mean, on the one hand, it would seem like to tell them about Philadelphia would be the…I don’t know… conservative move. Leave out the part about Nazis and universes and all that.”

“What’s wrong with that?” she asked.

“Well, that’s kind of what I said at first. But some of the advisors made the point that without telling them that we might be on a different world, we’re implying that all their loved ones are dead and drowned, when for all we know that might not be the case at all.”

Kylee considered what he said. “Okay, but isn’t it kind of true that all their loved ones are drowned? I mean, this universe’s version of them anyway.”

“Well that might be true for the older people. Remember, Dr. Johnson thinks the place drowned decades ago. My parents probably never met on this world. Yours either. Hell, they themselves might not have had a chance to be born. And that’s not taking into account the Nazi factor. The timeline is so different. It’s just so hard to know.”

Kylee put her arm around Theo’s waist. “Wow. When you put it like that I guess I understand why you’re so on edge. This is way too much for you to deal with. For any of us to deal with. This whole thing is just insane.”

“You’re not kidding,” said Theo. “I keep thinking that maybe I lost my mind at some point. That I’m at home in some mental institution somewhere ranting and raving about all this stuff.”

She gave him her suspicious, eyebrow-raised look. “So you think that meeting me was part of a delusional break with reality.”

Theo laughed. “Of course… nobody as great as you could exist in the real world.”

“Nice save. Smooth.” she said.

“Thanks. You’ve never thought that maybe all of this is just too crazy to be real?”

“I don’t know,” Kylee said, “I guess I entertained the thought that maybe you and I fell asleep on the beach that first night, before all the crazy. Maybe this is all a messed up nightmare.”

“Some nightmare,” Theo said. “Must have been something really wrong with that pizza.”

“God, I could go for some pizza right about now.”

“Just be happy for our crappy canned goods and fish. Once the crops get growing in the next few months, maybe there’s a chance of pizza returning in the future.”

She sighed dramatically. “A girl can dream.”

By now Theo and Kylee had entered the arena and were following their friends down the stairs to an available row. Theo was going to leave them there and head down to the arena floor where he would sit up front with other members of the mayor’s advisory committee.

Theo kissed Kylee and said goodbye to the other teens. “Remember,” said Bill, “if things go really bad for the mayor, I’m going to pretend I don’t know you. Nothing personal, of course.”

Jamie gave him a look. “I kid, I kid,” he said. “But seriously, man, if the going gets tough, get the hell out of there. We’ll find you in the parking lot.”

“I’m going to hope it doesn’t come to any of that,” said Theo, “but let’s meet in the parking lot anyway.”

Theo walked down the concrete steps. At the bottom of the section he checked in with a security guard who looked his name up on a sheet of paper. Finding Theo on the list, the guard stepped aside and motioned for Theo to pass to the next level down. The stage was set up as it had been the last time the mayor addressed the crowd, except the only flag in site was the Atlantic Island flag, of which there were many all around the arena.

Theo made eye contact with Officer Dougherty, who pointed to a vacant seat next to him. Theo carefully slid past the people in the front row until he stood next to Dougherty who stuck out his hand. “Good to see you Theo.”

Theo shook the man’s hand and smiled. “You too, sir.” Though Theo had always considered himself polite and respectful around parents, teachers, police or anyone else in authority, he had never been one to say “sir” or “ma’am” or anything like that. It felt false to him, and he had never wanted to be a kiss-ass like some guys he knew. Somehow, here on the island he had found himself addressing people in a formal manner regularly, and as genuinely as possible. Theo realized that he was changing in many ways. He hoped this was a good development.

“Sir…can I ask you something?”

Dougherty seemed surprised but smiled. “Of course. Anybody who can defend his positions to Paul Tiberius deserves to be heard whenever he wishes. What’s on your mind?”

“My friends are concerned about how people are going to react to whatever Mayor Lucas ends up saying. I’ve assured them we are all safe but is that true? Do you have precautions in place?”

Officer Dougherty leaned in close to Theo and spoke in almost a whisper. “Do you see that man up near that elderly couple? The one with the red ballcap?”

Theo scanned the distant crowd. Sure enough, there was a short, deeply tanned man with a red hat sitting calmly. “I see him.”

“That’s your buddy Menendez,” said Officer Dougherty. “He’s working undercover tonight. We’ve got a bunch of members of the Security Force around the arena. I won’t point them all out, don’t want to reveal all our secrets, but trust me, they are there. Up where you can’t see in the catwalk around the perimeter we’ve got sharpshooters in position, and a few more on the roof looking out over the parking lot and boardwalk. We would be prepared for this big a gathering no matter what the mayor had to say, and we took extra precautions due to the…sensitive nature of what we know is happening. Don’t worry. We’re your tax dollars at work…or, well, you know.” He laughed at his comment, just one of many phrases that no longer worked in this new world.

The lights dimmed and a voice boomed over the loudspeaker. “Ladies and gentlemen of Atlantic Island, please put your hands together and give a warm welcome to the leaders of our land, Mayor Sam Lucas and Deputy Mayor Paul Tiberius!”

Well, thought Theo, that removes any question about Tiberius showing up. The deputy mayor may have been in attendance but he did not look happy to be there. He remained in the shadows, a living ghost, as Mayor Lucas took to the podium and raised both hands to greet the applause.

“People of Atlantic Island,” the mayor began, “as always it does my heart good to see your bright faces and to hear your cheers. We have come a long, long way these past few months. If you asked people before the Event if they thought humanity could triumph over such impossible odds, such unbearable adversity, I believe few would have thought it likely. And yet here we are. A new nation bound by a dedication to hard work, to education and to each other. That is the key to our survival thus far and it is the key to our continued prosperity and growth as we move into the future.

“When we met last, I told you about our population. Since that time, I’m afraid to say that many who survived the Event with very serious injuries have since succumbed to those same injuries. We had some sicknesses develop for a variety of reasons, all of which are now completely under control. Through these and other causes, I’m sorry to report that we lost approximately 500 men, women and children since I last spoke to you. Please bow your heads and take a moment of silence to acknowledge their passing.”

The quiet was broken by sniffs and sobs around the arena. Theo, his head bowed low, thought of Mark. Mark had survived the Event only to die in the new world. Except really Mark had never made it past the Event. That shell of a person they had visited in the hospital was not his friend. Mark had died in the Event…maybe he had died the moment they got in the car to head to the shore. It had just taken his body a long time to figure it out. Theo wondered how many of them sitting here were similarly already dead.

The mayor scanned the room and smiled. “Now I have some exciting news to report, for things move in cycles. Where there was destruction, now there is reconstruction. Where there was death… I am thrilled to tell you that the first native citizen of Atlantic Island has been born. His parents, Thomas and Martha Melrose have named their beautiful son Adam, which I think is wonderfully appropriate. Let’s give them a round of applause.”

Smatterings of applause while the mayor spoke grew into deafening revelry. The mayor hadn’t mentioned this big news at the advisory meeting. Theo assumed it was because Lucas didn’t need any advice about it. The crowd roared in delight and celebration. Theo guessed most people had been like him- too caught up in surviving to worry or even think about whether the population could grow. This made him think about Kylee, and as he began to feel creeping panic he put those thoughts away.

Mayor Lucas allowed the crowd to celebrate for what seemed a long time. Theo knew this was a carefully constructed strategy to energize the audience with positivity. They would need it.

“I share your enthusiasm,” said the mayor. “It is my greatest hope that young Adam’s birth can symbolize a new beginning for all of us. Our nation has been full of beginnings as of late. Our school system is operational and we are making sure that the fundamentals of human knowledge are being transmitted to the next generation. The Margate fields are prepared and the first region has been planted. With this beautiful weather we’ve been having it is very likely we will see ample growth of our crops. Our construction crew has nearly completed repairs on the buildings damaged in the Event, in addition to clearing the debris of buildings that did not withstand the Event or the storms that followed.

“They also made some necessary modifications to the Caesars’s Palace casino and resort which, I’m sure most of you know, has become the center of government operations and the site of the Atlantic Island Academy.” Mayor Lucas gave a sheepish grin. “Though I’m admittedly a little embarrassed by this next part, there has been a significant amount of interest in maintaining the ‘glory’ of the building’s previous identity.” He chuckled. “I hereby announce that the casino shall henceforth be known as the Atlantic Island Capital Palace. The other casinos, which we have kept empty since the Event, will be converted to living spaces for elected officials and additional office space as needed. I can assure you that plans are in place for the restoration of a currency, but we have no interest right now in restoring gambling to our nation. Money, when it returns, will be earned through good old-fashioned hard work. The kind of work you have all shown each and every day as we have progressed together.

“Now…” Mayor Lucas drew in a deep breath and Theo felt his heart race. This was the moment. “I know that many of you in the audience tonight came for one reason. It wasn’t to hear about crops or Palaces or to see my handsome face.” This got some laughs from the crowd. “Many of you came here for answers to the questions that have faced all of us since the time of the Event. Certainly you want more answers than I was able to provide to you when last we met.”

The room was utterly silent. Theo worked up the courage to look in Deputy Mayor Tiberius’s direction. The man was expressionless. If he shared any of Theo’s concerns about what Mayor Lucas had decided to share with the nation, he didn’t show it at all.

Mayor Lucas continued, “It is my responsibility as leader of this land to make sure you are informed, but also to make certain that the information I share with you is correct and complete. I preface what I am about to tell you by saying that there is much more we are working on. Unfortunately all of that consists of far too many guesses and so much speculation that I simply cannot justify bringing it to your attention until we have more information. You deserve that much.

“When I last addressed you, I said that a helicopter mission had found no sign of land. Since that time there have been more missions both above and below the water. Our amazing science committee, the same brilliant men and women who turned the power back on and restored a communications system so that our government could get back to work, have committed tireless, endless hours to investigating our circumstances.” The mayor paused, and then in a slow, careful voice got to the heart of the matter. “There is reason to believe that at least a significant portion of the northeastern United States is now underwater.” He paused again, allowing for the gasps, groans and sobs from the audience.

Theo looked around nervously. To his astonishment, nobody had started a riot yet. It seemed everyone wanted to make sure the mayor told everything. Mayor Lucas seemed to notice the same thing as Theo. Theo saw the man’s shoulders relax a little and he continued. “We have results from one expedition, and only one, which after a long trip over what should be New Jersey and seeing only water found evidence of the city of Philadelphia beneath the ocean.” Again, the mayor paused.

My God, thought Theo, he’s really going all the way with this.

“In the course of that brief undersea investigation,” said the mayor, “the science team discovered—”

“Lies!” Yelled out a voice from the crowd. “You lying bastard!”

Here we go again, thought Theo.

Pushing his way to the front of the stage was a skinny man wearing a t-shirt and jeans that were far too loose to belong to him. The man’s hair was long and unkempt. He wobbled as he worked through the crowd. Theo wondered if the man was drunk. Wasn’t all alcohol under lock and key?

Mayor Lucas presented the man with his best and brightest smile. “My friend, I assure you that I speak based on evidence and only after substantial deliberation. Please, if you would just let me finish—”

“You’re finished alright ‘Mr. Mayor,’” said the man mockingly. “You and the rest of your so-called leadership. It’s time for the conspiracy to be revealed!” The man passed Theo’s row several feet to his left. Theo caught a glimpse of the man’s face and recognition hit him. This was the same man Theo and his friends had seen protest the ration stations. Theo recalled the officers yelling at him and knocking him unconscious. They called him Bob, Theo remembered.

The audience continued to part for Bob as he moved past. Nobody wanted any part of this. Theo looked at Officer Dougherty. The officer was on his walkie-talkie. Theo assumed he was communicating with the snipers up in the catwalk area. Theo remembered the last time someone had interrupted the mayor and attempted to take the stage. Tiberius had quickly removed the woman from the arena. For some reason, the deputy mayor remained motionless and expressionless at the back of the stage.

Mayor Lucas’s smile had faltered. He looked seriously concerned. Bob reached the stage and with a surprising amount of strength for one so frail he launched himself up and onto the surface. Now, thought Theo, grab him now! Somebody!

“Sir,” said the mayor, “I would be happy to meet with you at a later time and discuss any of your grievances.”

“No,” said Bob. “No later. No more.” He reached into the waistband of his baggy jeans and drew out a small gun.

As Bob’s hand came up, Dougherty yelled into his walkie-talkie. “Now! Take him now!”

A bright light flashed and a series of gunshots boomed in the silent hall. Theo’s eyes were helplessly drawn to Bob, whom he expected to see falling to the ground. Bob was still standing, the muzzle of his gun smoking. As Theo’s eyes panned the scene, he quickly realized it was Mayor Lucas who was falling to the ground. Theo was shoved aside as Officer Dougherty raced to the stage. Everything became a blur. Government workers swarmed over the mayor as Officer Dougherty reached the stage. In the darkness at the back of the stage, Theo caught a glimpse of Tiberius, still looking calm, flicking his thumb up. At that exact instant Bob was struck in the head by a sniper’s bullet and he collapsed on the stage floor.

Theo couldn’t breathe. He strained to see the mayor but the mass of people on stage had blocked his view. Security Forces emerged from everywhere ushering the terrified audience out of the arena.

Theo allowed himself to be carried along in the current of people moving toward the exits. His mind raced and yet his thoughts were a jumble of images and ideas that refused to crystalize into words. He stumbled out into the street and wandered. He was so confused. He wanted to go home, that much he knew for sure, but where was home?

Theo made his way to the boardwalk. He wanted to get away from the mass of screaming people. The noise hurt his head. He thought maybe sitting in the dark on the beach would be nice. As he stumbled through the sand he felt a hand on his shoulder. “I’ve got you bro, relax.” Bill was standing behind him.

Theo tried to talk. “The mayor…Tiberius…snipers…”

“Later man,” said Bill. “We’ll talk about everything later. Right now you have to calm down.”

“I don’t… I can’t… the mayor—”

Bill slapped him across the face. Theo’s words cut off mid-ramble. His brain began to reboot.

“What…what did you do that for?”

“Whoa, that actually worked,” said Bill. “I figured they do that in the movies to snap people out of panic attacks. You looked pretty panicked, buddy.”

“Thanks, I guess. I don’t know what happened to me. I think I overloaded.”

“It’s cool man. You were front and center for some crazy stuff. People are really scared. I’m not saying you don’t have a right to be upset too, maybe more than the rest of us… and I don’t want to be an ass, but me, your girl, the rest of our friends… we need you man. You’re our leader.”

Theo was taken aback. “That means a lot. I don’t know anything more than anybody else though I don’t think…” Suddenly, something registered in the back of his mind. “Tiberius! He signaled for the sniper, I know he did.”

“What do you mean?” asked Bill.

“I think he made the Security Force wait before taking down the attacker. He gave time for Mayor Lucas to be shot.”

“Jesus, Theo, that crazy dude was going on about conspiracies. You don’t want to join in with that, do you?”

“I’m just telling you what I saw.”

“There you are!” Kylee called out as she, Ryan, Michelle and Jamie were walking down the beach toward Theo and Bill. “Are you okay, Theo?”

“Don’t worry,” said Bill. “He went a little nutso but I fixed him up good and proper.”

“Good,” she said. “When do you think we’ll hear something about the mayor?”

Just then a bright light blinded them. Theo had a second to think that another Event was underway but then his eyes adjusted. The screens of the giant pier mall, shuttered and dark since the event, were now on. On each screen was Paul Tiberius.

“Citizens of Atlantic Island,” his cold voice boomed, “I am deeply saddened to inform you that despite the best efforts of medical staff, Mayor Sam Lucas has passed away.”

Theo felt lightheaded. Kylee put her arm around him and squeezed, grounding him in reality.

“The elite Security Force has killed the mayor’s assassin,” continued Tiberius. “There is nothing more to fear. As of this moment I am humbly assuming control of Atlantic Island. We are more than a town or a city. We are a nation that will not be degraded by evildoers. Therefore I relinquish the title of “Mayor” and instead I shall take up the mantle of “Supreme Leader” of Atlantic Island. You will be safe. You will be strengthened. We will all grow together into the glorious nation that Sam Lucas would have wanted us to be. All hail the leadership of the mighty Atlantic Island!”

Book 3: The War

Chapter 17

5 months later

“Wake up!” a voice called from a great distance. Theo turned and tried to go back to sleep. “Theo, I said wake up!” The voice was back, closer now and sounding agitated.

“Okay, fine, hang on!” He sat up in bed and shook his head, clearing out the fog of another difficult night’s rest. Kylee was perched on the end of the bed, radiant in the morning light that broke through around the thick shades on the windows.

“Good, you’re up. I was worried about you!” She scurried up the mattress and maneuvered into his arms.

“Worried?” he asked. “Why?”

“You were talking in your sleep again,” she said. “Tossing and turning and sweating. The same as you’ve been doing since—”

“Since the night the mayor died. Yeah, I get it.”

She raised her palms toward him. “Chill with the ’tude, mister. I’m on your side, remember?”

He managed a weak smile. “Yeah, I know. Sorry. It’s just getting a little old, you know? Dreaming that crap all night and then dealing with the real world all day. I’m not really sure which is worse.”

“So what was it this time?” she asked. “Tiberius again?”

He shrugged. “I don’t really know. It’s all a little hazy. I think he was in there somewhere but I don’t remember. I just have this awful feeling.” He looked at her. “I might remember more if somebody hadn’t woken me so abruptly.”

She grabbed a pillow and walloped him in the face. “Remind me not to look out for you in the future,” she laughed. “Now come on, we gotta get to work.”

Theo rolled out of bed and went to the closet. He grabbed one of the two brown outfits hanging there. Since Tiberius established total control over the island, many things had changed. There had barely been time for Theo to recover from the loss of Mayor Lucas before his security clearance was revoked and he was barred from the Palace. Only those who had shown unwavering loyalty to the Supreme Leader remained on the advisory council.

Theo had joined the growing ranks of farmers in Margate. The farmers were assigned uniforms darker than the sandy soil in which they toiled. Theo always felt a little bad about insulting the uniforms as he realized that some unfortunate person on the island had been forced to sew them by hand.

Now he dressed in one of those baggy shirt and shorts combos. His hair was nearly to his shoulders now and he tied it back in the ponytail style that had become so common on the island since Tiberius had outlawed haircuts above the shoulder. The official word was that this was meant to reinforce uniformity over individuality, but as Bill put it, “Freud would have a field day with this guy.”

The teens had worried that Bill would face a reinstated sentence with Lucas out of the way, but so far nothing like that had occurred. The biggest blow to Bill came in the form of Bertier and his gang of thugs. Instead of being arrested, as had seemed quite certain at one point, Bertier and his friends were deputized to operate on behalf of Tiberius’s Security Force of Atlantic Island. This got them out of school, which they liked, and allowed them to create mischief with impunity, which they loved. Theo and the rest stayed out of Bertier’s way as best they could, but Theo knew Bill was itching for a rematch.

Theo’s group had all left school as well. The teachers were under severe restrictions and there wasn’t much learning of any sort taking place anymore. School existed now only to keep the young people off the streets.

For everyone else, it was all work, all the time. There were no weekends or days off, not that there would be anywhere fun to go spend that time. Theo didn’t mind this all that much. Working in the newly created fields held some appeal, he had to admit.

Five months of hard work with a modest diet had left Theo a lean, muscled, tan young man who did not in any way resemble the teenager who had journeyed to the shore nearly a year earlier. Kylee assured him that she loved the “new and improved Theo.”

Kylee’s access to privileged information at the security station had been severely limited. She was still doing paperwork and other menial tasks, but with little hope of a promotion to the real Security Force. Her relationship with Theo had seen to that. Theo felt guilty for limiting Kylee’s career, albeit inadvertently, but she swore it was for the best. She didn’t like the attitude of the new Security Force. Those officers who relished being able to abuse their authority were flourishing under the new regime. Those like Officer Menendez, who cared about the people he protected, were being slowly ostracized.

Officer Dougherty had tried to investigate the mysterious circumstances behind the assassination of Mayor Lucas, and had earned himself a month-long suspension for his troubles. When he returned, the fire inside him was gone and he fell unenthusiastically into line.

Theo used the bathroom and brushed his teeth, being careful not to use more than the smallest functional amount of toothpaste. The white gel was just one of many products in short supply on the island, and distribution of goods was disproportionate at best since Tiberius’s rise to power. Like most things on the island, rations favored those who wholeheartedly supported the regime.

Theo thought he might try to see Ryan after work. Tiberius had disrupted the science team, cancelling all research related to the Event and the new universe. He wanted them to focus all efforts and resources on the island. With Tiberius’s dislike of privileges being extended to the island’s youth, Ryan was lucky to still have a job with the science department. As it was, he was not allowed to do much more than paperwork.

The demotion had taken a huge toll on Ryan. He was moody and irritable and his relationship with Michelle had soured. Theo thought this was probably due in no small part to Michelle’s status on the island. She was an outspoken loyalist to the new government, and so she was one of the few teenagers treated with anything approaching respect. She had been promoted to manager of the records office.

Kylee had asked Michelle why she was so supportive of what was becoming something between a dictatorship and a monarchy. Michelle responded, “It’s not about whether or not I like the leadership. What you all don’t seem to get is that this is all there is. There’s no other country to run to. There’s no opposition. As far as we are concerned, Tiberius is the ruler of the world. I wish the rest of you would figure that out and start to play by the rules.”

Kylee had repeated this conversation to Theo. “What bothers me,” she had said, “is that Michelle skirted around the actual question. I really think she agrees with a lot of what’s happening here.”

“What does Jamie think?” he had asked.

“She thinks I’m oversensitive. Too much craziness makes me look for more craziness. I don’t know, maybe she’s right.”

Theo didn’t think Jamie was right. Kylee might have been thrown off by everything they had experienced since the Event, but Jamie had also been greatly affected. She probably didn’t want to think anything negative about her friend at a time when friends were in such short supply.

Theo kissed Kylee goodbye and walked out the door. Farmers got to work earlier than most other positions on the island and the apartment Theo shared with Kylee was far from the Margate fields. Leaving so early meant that he almost never saw anyone else on his long walks. That suited Theo just fine.

The streets leading out of the city had long been battered by years of strong storms and flooding in the summer and heavy snows in winter. The asphalt needed regular maintenance that it was no longer getting, and the Event had taken a heavy toll. Cracks spread like a dark circulatory system in every direction. Weeds grew from the cracks, spurred on and nourished by the torrential storms and ample sunlight.

Theo casually yanked a weed from the sandy soil, studied it for a moment and threw it over his shoulder. Funny that he still felt compelled to keep things tidy when the Supreme Leader couldn’t be bothered. No, that wasn’t quite right. Tiberius was a calculating man, and even the condition of the streets wouldn’t go unattended. Theo guessed it was more likely this was Tiberius’s deliberate effort to allow the streets to go to ruins. Even the government cars had run out of fuel. Atlantic Island was a pedestrian community for the foreseeable future, and Tiberius obviously wanted to route resources elsewhere.

A few blocks down Theo passed the water treatment operation. Here he saw the day’s first signs of humanity. The workers scurried from place to place, carrying vats, hoses and tools. The water treatment facility desalinated ocean water for drinking and bathing, and recycled wastewater to be used again. Giant storage tanks collected rain from the heavy storms. The operation was beyond Theo’s understanding. Its construction had occurred hastily during his brief spell working for the mayor. The sheer amount of people hurrying about told Theo that Tiberius knew water was a critical utility.

There were many things that Tiberius knew, Theo thought. It would be easy to dismiss the man as unqualified for leadership but the sad truth was that Paul Tiberius was a born leader. He knew how to keep a country going. The problem in Theo’s view was Tiberius saw everything in black and white without any shades of grey.

Tiberius was prepared to do anything and everything to enforce his view of what would keep a government operational. He was willing to sacrifice anyone for the greater good of the island. That was simply not something Theo or his friends could accept. Any society was going to be filled with “haves” and “have nots.” Everything Theo had ever heard or read told him as much. Yet Supreme Leader Tiberius pushed this paradigm to an absurd extreme, seemingly more so each day.

The tightening of rations, the endless forced labor, all these changes and restrictions were suppressing the majority of the population while the inner circle grew powerful and comfortable. Theo felt the impact of this as he walked the lengthy route to work. In the city, a short sprint from the majesty of the Palace, a checkered map had formed of affluence next to poverty. The farther Theo walked beyond the city limits, the more poverty reigned.

Three months in to Tiberius’s rule, the Supreme Leader decreed that dissidents could lose their property. In the time since, a convenient selection of citizens who had won nice accommodations in the property lottery had been declared “rabble rousers” and had been removed from their homes. The lucky were sent to communal housing near the farms. The unlucky went to jail with no determined length of sentence. Tiberius loyalists now occupied the quality real estate left behind by the nonconformists. Tiberius himself and many of the government employees had residences in the Palace.

Theo wondered how long it would be before the government targeted him and his friends. He knew too much about Tiberius and the whole operation there to think that being removed from the advisory council was the full extent of any action against him. He thought about this more and more with each passing week. Was there anything he could do to protect himself and his friends? He didn’t think so. In that one regard he agreed wholeheartedly with Michelle: Tiberius was the beginning and the end of authority on the island. If the Supreme Leader decided it was time to make an example of Theo or Kylee or any of them, they were totally and completely out of luck. There was nowhere to run.

Theo approached the edge of the tomato fields that marked the perimeter of the Margate farmland. The communal properties near the fields were still occupied at this time of day. For a reason Theo couldn’t identify, men with families represented a large portion of those Tiberius had evicted from their homes. The women and children milled about on the porches. Their sad faces and emaciated bodies stayed in Theo’s mind all day as he worked and they haunted him at night.

Every once in a while one of the forgotten souls on the porches would approach the farmers. Theo’s boss, an enormous man named Jerome, was kind but firm in telling the women to leave. Once, someone got through and grabbed Theo and one other man by one shoulder each with her boney hands.

“Please,” she had croaked, “I’m hungry. My babies are hungry. Please give us food.”

“I’m sorry, we aren’t allowed,” said Theo. “And you can’t eat what we have growing here. None of it is ready for harvest yet.”

The woman didn’t listen. She stumbled forward past Theo and his confused coworker. She worked her way through the patches of tomatoes and began clawing at the vines, trying to bring the green fruit to her mouth. Theo tried to grab her gently, but she forced him off.

“What’s happening here?” asked Jerome. “Miss, you can’t do this. You can’t eat what we are growing here.”

He took her firmly by the shoulders and she looked up at him. “I need food,” she said. “We aren’t getting enough rations.”

Jerome looked terribly sad. “I’m so sorry,” the giant man said. “You need to go or there will be trouble for all of us. If the Security Forces were here you wouldn’t be getting away so easily. Just go. Please.”

Theo and the other farmer escorted the woman away. Theo hated being a party to anything that caused the poor woman more suffering.

Today there were no incursions from the starving ghosts on the porches. Theo worked at turning over a patch of soil. The food grew fast on the island and was harvested quickly. The farmers were ordered to turn the soil and plant again as quickly as possible. Theo heard from some guys who seemed to know that this was not the best way to treat the earth, but orders were orders.

“Hey, Essex, you hear what’s going down tonight?”

Stan, one of the farmers Theo saw on a regular basis, walked over to him looking strangely excited.

“No,” said Theo, “I don’t really get much news.”

“Yeah, man, I know,” said Stan. “I don’t either. Just happened to hear some people talking. There’s a big ass thing going on down at the convention hall. Tiberius is speaking! Nobody’s seen him since he took over… I mean, other than the people who, you know, got busted. Something big is going to happen tonight.”

“And you think this is a good thing, Stan?”

“Hell, yeah! It’s time for things to change. I’m sure everything’s gonna start getting better.”

Theo sighed and clapped Stan on the back. “I wish I shared your optimism, buddy.”

“Will you be there?” Stan asked.

“Hmm… yeah. Yeah, I will be.” Whatever was going to happen, Theo wanted to see it for himself. He didn’t believe in any way that things were going to get better. All he could do was get all the information he could to be prepared as things got worse.

Chapter 18

Theo hadn’t considered how uncomfortable he would be with returning to Boardwalk Hall. The vision of the attack on Mayor Lucas haunted him as he walked with his sweaty hand in Kylee’s.

“You don’t have to do this,” she said. “I’m sure we can easily find out what’s discussed tonight.”

Theo shook his head. “No, babe. We need to be there. I don’t for a minute believe that Tiberius is done with us. I want to know everything that’s happening. We can’t access his inner circle but this is…something, I guess.”

“You really think he’s going to come for us?” she whispered.

“Maybe. Maybe not you or me, but what about Bill?” He pointed ahead at Bill’s and Jamie’s backs in the distance. “Bill’s sentence being overturned was the beginning of all of this. It was what started the rift that led Tiberius to kill Lucas and—”

“Don’t do that.” She pulled her hand away and wheeled around to face him.

“What?”

“Don’t you dare blame yourself for what happened to Mayor Lucas.”

“How the hell can’t I? Everything that’s happened here is my fault. It all traces back to my begging Lucas to pardon Bill.”

“Bull. It traces back to the Event. It traces back to Tiberius being given the authority to make the decision that sent Bill and the other protestors to jail in the first place. You don’t know everything about the dynamic between Tiberius and Lucas before you came along, but I bet you it wasn’t any good.”

“That may be. Still… my involvement did something. I think I upset a balance of power.”

“Big words,” Kylee was getting frustrated. “But what do they mean? What I see in front of me is a well-intentioned guy trying to be a big martyr. I don’t mean this as an insult, Theo, but have you considered that all of this is bigger than you? Or me? Or any of us? If you want to do something to fight back against Tiberius, okay, I’m with you on that. But if you want to sit around and beat yourself up for what happened to Mayor Lucas or what’s happened here since he died, I’m not going to sit with you and join your pity party.”

“But…Lucas listened to me, and now he’s dead!”

“Well, now you listen to me! Sam Lucas was a grown man. A wise man. If he acted on your request it was because he thought it was the right thing. He made up his own damned mind, just like Tiberius did. You are not to blame, Theo! Stop doing this to yourself!”

Theo was stunned. Kylee rarely expressed so much emotion. Bill, Jamie, Ryan and Michelle circled around, drawn by Kylee’s shouting.

“You guys okay?” asked Bill.

“Yeah,” said Theo. “We’re okay. I was just being dumb and Kylee’s helped me to figure that out.”

“Oh,” said Bill. “You were being the martyr again, huh? Yeah, we all think that’s pretty stupid.”

Theo laughed. “Okay, fine. You guys know I just want what’s best for everybody.”

“We do,” said Ryan. “Nobody blames you for anything, and for what it’s worth we believe in what you and Mayor Lucas wanted for Atlantic Island. That’s why we are all coming out here tonight.”

Theo couldn’t help notice Michelle rolling her eyes at Ryan’s words. What was the deal with that girl?

“Okay,” said Theo. “So none of you has any idea what’s going on tonight? What Tiberius is supposed to announce?”

“I just kept hearing the words, ‘big event,’” said Jamie. “Because what we need is another big Event. Do you guys know how this thing leaked out? There weren’t any fliers as far as I can tell. Who started the word of mouth?”

“Tiberius, probably,” said Kylee. “Whatever this is, he wants people to think they are seeing something important.”

The crowd around the hall was buzzing nervously. Theo knew that many of them had been present for the assassination of the mayor, though few of them had been as close to the incident as he had been.

Bill walked up next to Theo. “I don’t want to put any more pressure on you about anything,” he started, “but do you think we’re safe here? Tiberius doesn’t like us.”

“I think there’s only a pretty small group he actually does like,” said Theo. “There aren’t many opportunities to get this close to the action and I think we will be safe mixed in with all these other people. None of them has any idea who we are.”

“Good thing,” said Bill, “I don’t play well with others and I’m not much of a leader. It might not hurt for people to know who you are though. Mayor Lucas thought you had some good ideas for the country.”

Theo decided to resist exclaiming that Mayor Lucas wasn’t around any longer. No need to kick that beehive again. “Well,” he said, “it’s something to think about. I’m just not positive I want to paint that big a target on myself.”

“Yeah, I hear ya,” said Bill. Theo thought he looked mildly disappointed. “Just, you know, keep it in the back of your mind.”

“Okay, man. Will do.”

They walked into the arena and found seats high above the ground. Theo had no interest in being close to Tiberius. He settled into his seat and looked down at the arena floor. Something was odd. There was no stage and no podium. The bare concrete expanse was strangely foreboding.

“Do you guys see this?” he whispered. “There’s nothing set up at all.”

“Well,” said Kylee, “There are those.” She pointed at the ceiling from which hung giant banners with the Atlantic Island flag.

“Nice,” said Bill. “Still think they could have sprung for some balloons.”

The audience was still entering the arena, but Theo could tell that he and his friends were not the only ones noticing the lack of staging for the night’s event. The crowd chattered in low tones, nervously anticipating the arrival of the Supreme Leader.

A voice boomed over the loudspeaker, startling Theo. It was not the same voice heard in previous gatherings. They fired the announcer? He thought. Seriously?

“People of Atlantic Island,” echoed the deep voice. “Rise and give thanks to your Supreme Leader, Paul Tiberius!”

The people rose as one. Theo, reluctantly moving to his feet, scanned the crowd. It was easy to see in the faces around him a division between those who legitimately supported the new regime and those who only played along out of fear. A spotlight turned on, aiming at the crowd on the opposite side of the arena from Theo and his friends. There, on some kind of a balcony, stood Tiberius, dressed in black robes and surrounded by four members of his Security Force, in black uniforms and dark metal helmets.

“Do you see that?” whispered Bill. “Could they be any more obvious about trying to scare the crap out of people?”

“Atlantic Island,” said Tiberius, “You have made me proud in these weeks and months as we recovered from the tragic loss of Sam Lucas.”

Theo bit into his lip to refrain from yelling out.

“With our new systems and laws in place, we have seen an impressive drop in all manner of crime. Those who still chose to defy our laws have been dealt with appropriately. Our country is strong and growing stronger. Our farms are flourishing, fresh water is flowing, and our weather remains beautiful as ever. Life on Atlantic Island, I’m sure you will agree, is glorious.”

Theo waited for those who did not agree with that sentiment to interrupt. Nobody stirred. Tiberius with his false, cruel smile controlled this mass of people through utter fear. The days of Mayor Lucas allowing for all opinions to be heard were gone now.

“We have accomplished much,” said Tiberius, “but our country is not without its challenges. Though it seems astonishing after the great losses we have experienced, our population exceeds that which we can properly support. There are those among us, I’m afraid, who are not getting enough to eat.”

Mutters of agreement from the crowd. Theo shifted uncomfortably in the plastic arena seat. Something wasn’t right. Where the hell was this going?

“I assure all of you that my advisors and I thought long and hard about what to do. As Supreme Leader it falls to me to make the final decisions, no matter how difficult they may be.” Tiberius stood aside as a woman pushed a small cart to his right. On the cart was a laptop computer. Tiberius turned to the computer, tapped a few keys and read from the screen. “Howard Coates and Ravi Singh step out to the arena floor.”

Slowly two men emerged from different sides of the arena. Both were thin and looked exhausted. Howard had many flecks of grey in his black hair, making him appear significantly older than Ravi, though Theo wasn’t sure that was actually the case.

The men walked to the center of the empty floor and turned to look up at Tiberius.

“Now,” said Tiberius, “You two men of Atlantic Island, chosen at random, have been granted a great honor. You will fight for the other man’s rations and belongings. If you win you may keep the winnings for yourself or assign and distribute them to others, family members, friends, even strangers, as you see fit. The loser, I assure you, may have the greatest honor of all, for though he shall perish his name shall be remembered as a sacrifice for the greater good of the island.”

People screamed. Theo looked at his friends. Their jaws trembled and fists clenched with fear and rage. He turned back to the two men on the concrete floor. They were standing perfectly still, continuing to look up at Tiberius. The shock of the order had rendered them incapable of movement.

“Perhaps you need some encouragement,” said Tiberius. “Mr. Singh, I want you to punch Mr. Coates in the face.”

Ravi paused, seeming to consider his options. “I am sorry,” he yelled up to Tiberius’s balcony. His voice carried in the terrible silence. “I simply cannot do such a thing.”

Tiberius frowned. Nobody said a word. Tiberius turned and spoke to one of the masked guards next to him. The guard spoke into a radio on his wrist. From behind the two men on the floor came another masked guard brandishing a large rifle.

“I command you again, Mr. Singh. Punch Mr. Coates in the face. Now.”

Ravi shook his head. “I am sorry, sir. I cannot.”

Tiberius raised his hand out, flicked his thumb up, and flipped his hand upside down. The guard behind Ravi and Howard fired. Ravi’s head disintegrated and he fell to the ground. More shrieking and crying erupted from the crowd, but many people stayed perfectly still, not wanting to raise the ire of the Supreme Leader.

Tiberius turned back to his computer and typed again. “Glen Charlotte. Walk to the floor.”

Another man made his way to the floor. He looked utterly petrified. Theo wondered how the man was moving when he was that scared. Then he saw the guards with guns at the man’s back, prodding him along. How had they known where to find them? Theo wondered if the computer was all part of the show. Maybe all of this was thought out in advance.

“Let’s try this again,” said Tiberius. “Mr. Coates? If you would be so kind.”

Again there was a period of silence. Theo wondered if Howard would sacrifice himself to make a point. Suddenly, Howard let out a primal scream of rage and attacked Glen Charlotte. He tackled Glen to the ground and unleashed wild swings at his face. He continued screaming like something not quite human as he mounted Glen and took the poor man’s head in his hands. Howard bashed Glen’s head into the concrete over, and over and over. Theo wanted more than anything to look away, but he couldn’t. He had to see this, had to know that what seemed to be happening was real. Finally, the guard who had shot Ravi ran over and pulled Howard off Glen’s mangled corpse.

“Ladies and gentlemen,” Tiberius said with so much pride in his voice that it made Theo nauseous, “your winner is Howard Coates. Mr. Coates, you have the appreciation of your nation and your Supreme Leader.”

Theo looked at Howard. The man didn’t look like he felt appreciated. He was practically foaming at the mouth while being restrained by the Security Force. As they forcibly moved him toward the entrance to the arena floor, Howard shook loose, looked up at the crowd and shouted. “Yaaaaaaaaaah!”

Amazingly, many in the crowd began to cheer and applaud.

“I’m going to be sick,” said Kylee.

“Let’s get the hell out of here,” said Bill.

“I’m not sure we can,” said Ryan, disgusted. “We haven’t been dismissed.”

“Citizens of Atlantic Island,” said Tiberius, “I regret that we have to engage in this barbarism, but this is something we must do for the good of the island. No one person among you is more important than the group. The nation must survive. Tonight we will have two more battles, and we will meet every month for three additional battles until the population is at a reasonable level. Also… citizens are forbidden to conceive children until we have developed a system to handle births in a controlled, sustainable way. Now then…” he turned to his laptop again.

The second battle was between two women, Jessica and Molly. Theo had expected Tiberius to make unfair pairings between men and women, but it seemed that the man was actually intrigued by close matches. The women circled each other and pulled each other to the ground, but their fight did not have the brutality of the previous encounter. Neither seemed strong enough or willing enough to seriously injure the other. After a few minutes of this, guards entered the arena floor with a variety of weapons. Before long, Molly had gained the upper hand and was standing over Jessica with a metal baseball bat raised above her head. Molly cried as she stood hesitant. The guards pointed their guns at her. That was all it took to push Molly over the edge. She brought the bat down with all her might and was declared the victor. At this the majority of the crowd actually stood and cheered. Theo saw faces full of false smiles, brimming with fear.

“Time to go,” said Theo. “This is our chance.”

Behind the rows of standing, jumping, applauding people, Theo and his friends made their exit. They had no desire to see anything more.

Back outside, they moved quickly under the cover of night. Jamie was the first to speak. “How… how can this be happening?”

“I don’t know,” said Theo. “But it is. We all saw it. We saw what Tiberius is capable of. We saw what he plans to do to this country. Worst of all, we saw how quickly fear can break people… make them do things they would never dream they could or would do. What we need to decide now is what we can do about it.”

“What do you mean?” said Michelle. “There’s nothing to do.”

“You’re wrong,” said Theo. “We can’t bury our heads in the sand and hope everything will be okay. This won’t get better unless we make it better.”

“But we’re alone!” said Michelle. “What good are we?”

“Excuse me,” called a voice in the shadows. A man was standing several yards away in the darkness hugging his crying wife to his chest. “I don’t know who you all are, but I want you to know that if you’re going to do something, anything to end this madness, we are on your side.”

Chapter 19

One week later Kylee and Theo welcomed five strangers into their home for the first meeting of something that had no name but one purpose: find some way to right the wrongs of Paul Tiberius.

The husband and wife who had stepped out of the shadows after the disgraceful blood sport at the arena were named Brian and Liz Lambert. They had owned a condo in Ventnor and had been making their first weekend visit of the summer at the time of the Event. They had been evicted from their home by the lottery system and now lived in a smaller place in the city.

Their friends Joseph and Andrew had been vacationing with them and stayed with them even now. Theo observed an unusual dynamic between Joseph and Andrew, who only introduced themselves with their first names. The two men seemed to be intentionally keeping distance between them as they sat in the apartment, as if to hide that they were a couple. Theo wondered if this wasn’t a little technique they had developed to stay under the radar of the government, which wasn’t proving to be exceptionally open-minded.

The final member of the group was a young man named Dale Nester. Kylee recognized Dale from their brief time in the Atlantic Island School. He was a year or so younger than the other teens and, it appeared, exceptionally angry with the leadership. Theo wondered what Dale’s experience on the island had been like. The young man wasn’t forthcoming with details. They did know he was living with the adults in his party, a recent development.

“We really appreciate you all coming such a distance in the night and taking such a risk,” said Kylee.

“It’s no problem,” said Brian, “It’s amazing what you all are trying to do. Our apartment’s in the city. Walking through streets without cars isn’t such a huge deal anyway.”

“We aren’t fooled into thinking that we will have that apartment for very long,” said Liz. “The government is giving the city to supporters little by little. I think we haven’t seen the last of the ‘transitions’ here.”

The others nodded. “I think you’re right,” said Ryan. “The leadership wants to make it clear that supporters will be rewarded and any dissidence will not be tolerated.”

“So let’s give them dissidence,” said Bill. “It’s what they deserve. They’re making people kill each other. Making a sport out of death!”

“I’m not sure we can just go right at them,” said Theo. “We’re just a few people and we are facing a massive force. We have no weapons and they have all the weapons. If we rose up we’d be dead before we knew what happened.”

“I agree with Theo,” said Michelle.

Great, thought Theo, maybe I should try a different approach.

“We all saw the same thing last week at the arena,” Michelle said, “Tiberius is in total, complete control. He holds all the power. You saw what happened when that guy tried to protest.”

“Well,” said Jamie, “There are eleven of us here, not one. That has to count for something.”

“It’s just ten additional bodies that the Security Force will dump in the ocean,” said Michelle. Ryan looked embarrassed.

“Okay,” said Theo, “I get what you’re saying. A direct assault is bound to fail. Maybe even with twice our number. But that doesn’t mean there is nothing we can do to fight back. That’s the point of meeting here. This is what we need to think about.”

“And on that note,” said Kylee, “I think we need to elect a leader.”

“Forgive me, but don’t we already have enough to handle with our current leader?” asked Andrew.

“That’s exactly my point,” said Kylee. “We didn’t pick our ‘Supreme Leader.’ We didn’t ask for any of this. If we are going to start something different, something better, it must start here and now, and it must start as a democracy. We pick someone to be our leader. Someone to run our meetings and to be the tiebreaker on important decisions, and maybe accept additional responsibilities in the future.”

“I think you’re right,” said Liz. “Why don’t you do it, Kylee?”

Kylee blushed. “I’m flattered, really, but no. I’m not the one for this job. You all have heard our story. We wouldn’t be here able to organize this meeting at all if it wasn’t for Theo. He’s the one who should lead.”

“Whoa,” said Theo, “I don’t really think—”

“Seconded,” said Ryan. “Theo, you’re the one.”

“Guys, really,” stammered Theo, “I don’t know if I can…”

“You can and you will, bro, “said Bill. “We believe in you. You’re the man.”

“Okay,” said Kylee, “Let’s put this to a vote. All in favor of Theo being the leader of our band of rebels raise your hand.”

Hands went up all around the room. All eyes went to Michelle, who was the only one with both hands firmly in her lap. “I’m sorry,” she said. “It’s nothing against you, Theo. I wouldn’t vote for anybody. This is all moving in the wrong direction. We can’t organize a rebellion!”

“Michelle,” pleaded Ryan, “try to think in the here and now. Don’t worry about a rebellion. We still need someone to run these meetings. To help us organize our thinking so we can stay safe going forward. Doesn’t that make sense?”

Michelle thought for a few seconds. She frowned and raised her hand. “Okay. I’m in.”

“Okay, great!” said Kylee. “Theo is elected leader of our group. The meeting is yours!” She pulled Theo to his feet, gave him a kiss on the cheek and sat back down.

“Alright,” said Theo, “I’d like to put it on the record that I think you guys are crazy to believe in me but… I’ll do everything I can. Everything.”

He looked around. These faces looked at him with hope, faith and trust. He would do right by these people who had put their lives in his hands. He would see this through as far as it could go.

“So,” he began. “We’ve got a few very obvious problems here. I want to talk about those before we speculate what else Tiberius and his people have up their sleeves. First thing is this ritual fighting to the death. Encouraging the people who are chosen to refuse to fight is impossible. Michelle is right about that. We all saw that man die at the hands of the Security Force. Even if there’s a limit to how long this ‘population control’ will go on, we know there will be more deaths. We need to figure something out, and fast. There will be another series of battles in the next couple weeks. It could be any of us on the ground there deciding whether to take a life or die for a hopeless cause.”

“So how do we put a stop to it?” asked Kylee.

“Well,” said Theo, “the biggest challenge is the involvement of the Security Force. Do you have any idea what’s going on there? The force at the arena seemed to be in sync with what Tiberius wanted.”

“You don’t know that, man,” said Bill. “Who knows what the hell was going on behind those ‘death masks?’ They might not have thought they had a choice.”

“That is a good point,” said Joseph.

“It is a good point,” said Kylee, “I’ll give you that, but there’s more involved with this. I might not have much access to the Security Force anymore but I still have a few friends in there. Men and women like Officer Menendez are being pushed aside and those who are given the most important jobs are diehard Tiberius supporters. As frightening as it is to think about, I’m pretty sure most of those black helmet guys really believed they were doing the right thing.”

“What about Menendez?” asked Ryan. “Couldn’t we try to get him involved here? Have him help us in some way?”

“I doubt he’d go for that,” said Kylee. “It’s not that he wouldn’t want to help, but there’s obviously enormous risk for anyone who does anything against the regime.”

“It’s probably the same thing for Dougherty,” said Theo. “He’s caught in the middle of all of this and I’m sure he knows how expendable he is to the leadership. Not that I’m entirely sure how to contact him anyway.”

A moment passed while everyone gathered his or her thoughts. Theo realized he was going to have to be the one to break these silences and keep the meetings moving.

“Okay,” he said, “so let’s put aside the notion of getting ourselves in the middle of this gladiator horror show at the arena.” He raised his hand as he saw the beginnings of protest. To his astonishment, everyone settled down. “I’m not saying we forget about it. We can’t. Even so, I want our time here to be productive. We don’t know how often we can meet or how long this can go on before we can’t meet anymore for one reason or another. There’s no apparent strategy for dealing with the arena problem so let’s look at some other ways we can make an impact.”

“What did you have in mind, Theo?” asked Brian.

“Well, the younger people on this island are having a major problem. The school system was horrible to begin with. Even Mayor Lucas knew that. Now it’s a complete joke. Even training for a career is not necessarily a good use of time because so far Tiberius has gone out of his way to limit job access to only be available to those over a certain age.”

“Are you sure that’s such a bad thing?” asked Michelle. “I’m as upset as any of you that school has gone by the wayside, but that was the old world. Here all that matters is developing particular skills. Maybe Tiberius wants to be sure that people are trained properly before having access to the most important components of government.”

“You sound like you agree with him,” said Jamie.

“I’m not saying he’s not a horrible man,” said Michelle, “but he seems to know what it will take to keep the country going. These are the early years. What history will probably call primitive years. Maybe in a few generations things will make more sense. You all want that for yourselves and it’s understandable, but we are pioneers in a new world. We can’t have it all. Tiberius gets that.”

“Fine,” said Theo. “Let’s keep the conversation tonight on what we can accomplish to make life bearable for everyone. Can we all agree on that?” It seemed they could.

“Our problem…well, one of our problems, seems to be that we are just too small. It’s incredible having you all join us, but we need more manpower.” He looked at Kylee. “Or…woman power, you know.” Laughter circulated through the group. Theo was glad to be able to lighten the mood.

“Every day when I walk to work, I pass by the communal housing. I guess many of you have seen it, or at least know what I’m talking about. These are people who have been pushed out of their place in the new society. In many cases we are talking about women and children, with the husbands in prison for things that should not be considered crimes. What I’m getting at is maybe we should start by seeing what we can do to help some of them. They are already on our side, in the sense that they are against what Tiberius is doing. We need to let them know that there’s a force for good out there. People willing to take a stand. We can start recruiting and building, and then maybe we can tackle the problems that will require some force. Does that make sense?”

“Yeah,” said Dale. Everyone turned to him, surprised to hear him speak. “Winning hearts and minds. I like it, man. That’s…that’s really why I’m here, anyway.”

“What do you mean, Dale?” asked Theo.

“I’m supposed to be living in those broken down projects by the farms. Tiberius’s men took my dad away. I don’t even know if he’s alive or in jail or what. My mom and my little sister are suffering and I came to stay with Brian and Liz to see what could be done to help them. You guys are exactly what I was praying for.”

“Dale, I’m really sorry to hear about your dad,” said Theo. “We will do everything we can for your family. I’m glad you’re here with us. What do you suggest we do to help them?”

“They need food. Their rations are ridiculous.”

“Okay,” said Bill, “let’s steal them some food.”

“Are you serious?” said Michelle. The look on her face said she had never seen anything so incredibly stupid as the direction this conversation had turned. “You want to steal from the government? The food is distributed from a central facility in the heart of the city. You want to steal right under the nose of the leadership. You’re insane. All of you are insane if you’re even entertaining this nonsense.”

“That’s enough!” Ryan had jumped to his feet and was staring at Michelle, furious. “You’re going on and on and on criticizing every move we want to make, while praising a homicidal maniac for having good managerial skills! I know you’re scared, I know you feel powerless, but guess what? We all feel that way and some of us are trying to do something about it! Theo helped many of us when we were completely and utterly lost. We’ve all tried to make sense of all of this and help people wherever we could, but you shut yourself up in records, whatever the hell that is, and tried to pretend that this was all a bad dream that would go away!”

“You’re the ones who are dreaming!” Michelle was on her feet as well. “I’m sorry, Ry, but I’m the only one here who realizes that Tiberius may be wrong about many things but he’s going to make sure that the nation as a whole survives and flourishes. All these fanciful things you are talking about… stopping the fighting, feeding the hungry? You are going to get yourselves killed! I have known some of you a good amount of my life and I love and care about all of you and I am telling you the path you are choosing is absolute death for all of us. I won’t stand by and be a party to your suicides!”

With that she spun toward the door and stomped out into the night. The door slammed behind her and echoed in the silence. Theo heard frustrated, muffled sobs. He turned and saw Ryan slowly breaking down, slumping back into his seat, face in his hands. Liz came over and put her arm around him from behind the chair. Theo felt fortunate to have found Liz and Brian. All of them. Even without Michelle, they were a strong group, and maybe, just maybe they were enough to inspire some people to hope for a world better than what Paul Tiberius was giving them.

Chapter 20

When Michelle departed after her diatribe, the remaining members of the small group of rebels assured Ryan that she would come to her senses and return soon. She didn’t return the next day, or the day after that. By the time the group met again one week later, Ryan had given up hope that Michelle was ever going to come back. Nobody had seen or heard from her in all that time.

In between the second and third meetings, Bill used a break from a maintenance job in one of the city’s many high rises to join Theo near the community housing projects. “Jeez,” Bill said, “They’ve got me up doing repair work in some fancy place, but this is where we need to be doing work.”

“Yeah,” laughed Theo, “I get that. That’s why we’re here, remember?”

“Oh, right,” said Bill. “So how do you want to handle this? How exactly do we win hearts and minds?”

“Mayor Lucas told me once that the reason he thought he was a good mayor had nothing to do with any particular skills or intelligence,” Theo said. “He said the key was that he always listened, really listened to what people were telling him. Everyone wants to know that his or her concerns are being heard. And in our case, these people need to know that there’s an alternative to Tiberius out there, and that alternative is on their side.”

“An alternative to Tiberius that the people can’t vote for though.”

“Okay, true, but that’s not the point. What we are doing hinges on one very strong theory: that there are way more anti-Tiberius people than pro-Tiberius people on the island. Our job is to unite them… somehow.”

“So, we listen.”

“Yup. Listen, learn and maybe give them a little hope in return…what?”

Bill was looking at him curiously.

“What is it? Why are you staring at me?”

Bill laughed. “Sorry. It’s just that, well, I’ve said it before but you’re really a natural at this leadership thing. Seeing you like this, it’s like this is always who you were meant to be.”

Theo was touched. “Thanks, man, I appreciate the support. I can’t take all the credit anyhow, I learned a hell of a lot in a very short time from Mayor Lucas.”

“He was pretty awesome, wasn’t he?” asked Bill.

“Yeah. He was. He never stopped believing in the good of people, even Tiberius. Maybe that cost him his life. I don’t know.”

“Doesn’t matter now,” said Bill. “He’d be proud of what you’re trying to do.”

“I hope so. Okay here’s somebody coming now.” A young woman in a faded dress opened the screen door to one of the houses and walked out onto the porch. She looked to the left, toward the beach and the rolling waves. She let out a huge sigh and sat down on the top step.

Bill nudged Theo. “Go ahead, boss. Talk to her.”

Theo tentatively stepped forward. “Hi, my name’s Theo Essex. This is my friend Bill Mansfield. Would you mind if we talked to you for a minute?”

She pulled her knees in to her chest defensively. “Are you his men? The Supreme Leader?”

“No, no not at all,” said Theo. “We’re just citizens of Atlantic Island like you. People who’ve seen what Tiberius is doing and don’t like it. Would it be okay for us to sit with you? We won’t take up much of your time.”

She laughed, a hoarse, unpleasant sound. Theo doubted very much that this woman laughed often. “Don’t you worry about taking my time. Time is all I have. Come, sit.” She slid over to one end of the porch steps and turned to the side. Theo and Bill sat across from her, Theo on the top step and Bill two steps lower.

“My name’s Jane,” she said, “I’m curious. What is it you want to know?”

“How did you end up here?” Theo asked. “In the ‘special housing,’ I mean.”

“Very special, isn’t it?” Jane pointed back at the house. “Damned thing’s about one step away from collapsing on us. Funny thing is, this used to be a nice house. All of these were nice before the Event. Beach block property. Between the damage from the Event and the storms since, and the shady characters that occupied these places off and on in the past year, everything good has been stripped away and what’s left sure as hell wouldn’t pass any inspection I’ve ever heard of.”

“None of the construction crews have passed through here?” asked Bill.

“Not as far as I know,” said Jane. “Doesn’t look like it. Maybe they didn’t know what they were doing.” She laughed her croaky laugh again. She saw something in Bill’s face. “You one of the construction people?”

“Yes, ma’am,” he said. “I like to think I know what I’m doing though. I’d never let this place fall apart like this. I’m usually only assigned to the more….elite districts. I’m starting to get the idea that all the attention is going there. That’s part of why we’re here, right Theo?”

“Right. Miss… Jane? You were going to tell us how you ended up here.”

“Yeah, you’re right,” she said. “Not much of a story to tell. Pretty common one around here, actually. My husband got marked up for speaking out against ration restrictions way back before the new leadership took over. Back in Lucas’s time. Nothing really happened to him back then. Then all of a sudden, Tiberius is in charge, and we get a knock at our door in the middle of the night. Bunch of Security Force guys come in. Arrest Tony for speaking out against the rations. Say he’s been sentenced to a year in prison. We lost our home and I was sent here. Must have missed when they held his trial.”

“They’ve moved from rigged trials to no trials at all,” Bill mused. “That’s progress.”

“Jane,” said Theo, “how many people do you share this house with?”

“There’s twenty including me,” she said. “Fifteen women and five kids.”

“No men were sent here?”

“Not to this house, no. There are a few down the street, or so I hear. Seems like they are more interested in sending men to jail than women. Figure they’d be more likely to fight back…to be a problem for the leadership.” She paused, eyeing Theo and Bill with suspicion.

“You’re telling me the truth here?” she asked. “You’re not with Tiberius?”

“Not a chance,” said Bill. “Jane you are talking with one of the first guys unfairly thrown in jail here and Mayor Lucas’s protégé who is pretty damned sure Tiberius ordered the mayor’s assassination. We couldn’t be further from Tiberius’s side.”

She smiled. “I see that. But you can’t blame me for being careful, can you? They took my Tony away from me for nothing, and I can’t believe they are done. No way they are just going to leave me alone forever, much as I wish it was so.”

“You’re right to be cautious,” said Theo. “But I tell you as sincerely as I can, you’ve got two friends here, and we know several more. There’s a…group organizing to keep tabs on Tiberius and his people.”

“And you’re the head of this group?” she asked.

Theo felt a little embarrassed. “Yes…well, I wasn’t my own first choice.”

She laughed. “I didn’t mean to say I didn’t think you should be in charge. I think just from this little conversation we’ve had that you’re the perfect guy for the job.” She looked at Bill. “No offense.”

“None taken. I’m just here to help. Theo’s the man with the vision, trust me.”

“Dare I ask what you all are planning to do to fight back? I’m on board with anything that can put that bastard in his place and get Tony back in my arms.”

“The specifics are still something we are going to work out,” said Theo. “We are down here today to get a feel for the kind of situation you’ve been placed in by the leadership and to let you know that you’re not alone.”

“Well, neither are you,” she said. “I’ve got friends here and we’ll help you any way we can, if and when you need us.”

“Thank you, Jane,” Theo said. “I can tell you that we aren’t rushing anything. We need to move carefully here, but this is just the beginning. We will find a way to stop Tiberius. This country can be much better than it is if we all work together. I’m glad we got to meet you today. I promise we’ll be in touch soon.”

“Is it alright if I tell some of the other people here about you?” she asked.

“Yes,” said Theo, “but please remember how important it is that we keep this secret for now. Tiberius can’t know that we are meeting, or organizing, or planning. Do you understand?”

“Of course. You boys go about your business now. I’ve got plenty of sitting on the porch to do.” She laughed her ragged laugh again. Theo and Bill said goodbye to her and walked on down the road.

“She’s a character,” said Bill.

“Yup, but she’s tough. Been through some hard times.”

“You think we can call on her…on all the people down here when we need them?”

“I do. Whatever we are going to build, whatever we are going to do, it starts here and with these people. They are our army, Bill, and when they finally strike, Tiberius will never have seen it coming.”

“Works for me,” said Bill, “but let’s try to get our army some weapons before we go around striking things, okay?”

“So there’s been no sign of Michelle in all this time?” Kylee asked.

The small group was meeting for the third time in Kylee and Theo’s apartment. Ryan sat staring at the floor, the perpetual frown he had worn the past weeks a thin line on his face. Now he looked up at Kylee and shook his head. “Nah, nothing. I don’t know where she’s living or if she’s okay. Haven’t heard a word.”

“I don’t want to give you a hard time,” said Dale, “but maybe you’re better off without her, man, maybe we all are. She’s a little…negative.” Ryan flashed him a look that made Dale stumble backwards in his chair. “Sorry, man.”

“Okay,” said Theo, “I’m pretty sure Joseph and Andrew have something to report. Right, guys?” He gave them a look that said please help me out!

“Yes, definitely,” said Joseph. Theo assumed Joseph and Andrew were two of the oldest people on the island, which wasn’t saying all that much. Many of the most elderly had been too frail to survive the Event and what came after. The two men may have been in their sixties. Of course, Theo thought, he could be completely off. The grey hair and Joseph’s moustache gave an air of seniority.

Theo really liked Joseph and Andrew. They never made mention of their relationship, and might have been good friends were it not for the little looks they exchanged that said plenty. Andrew had been the head of payroll for some major corporation in New York before the Event. “One small step from retirement” was how he put it. Theo wasn’t entirely clear what Joseph’s job was or had been. The man looked like he had been a bodybuilder in his younger years, and had an accent just like Arnold Schwarzenegger’s to boot.

“We went down to the north end of the island like you said, Theo,” Joseph continued. “And, would you believe, we heard some government people talking about ‘weapons stations!’”

“What do you think it means?” asked Theo.

“Oh we know what it means,” said Andrew. “They were very specific. You might think they had no idea two handsome men were right across the street listening in.”

“Such a flatterer, this one, especially when he can flatter himself in the process,” said Joseph, smiling.

“Anyway, if I may continue, we learned that Tiberius has weapons stations around the island. It’s safe to assume a good portion of firepower still resides at the security headquarters, but we are confident he has emergency supplies all over the place. This is a paranoid man, and a prepared man, but I think we can exploit that to our advantage.”

“Excellent,” said Theo. “I think we have something here. The question is how to get access to them when we need them and without Tiberius knowing what we—” a frantic pounding at the door interrupted him.

Kylee moved to the door. She looked at Theo who nodded approval. She walked over and peered through the peephole. “It’s Officer Menendez!” she said. “He looks scared.”

“Let him in,” said Theo.

Kylee opened the door. “Carlos! What’s wrong?”

Menendez looked panicked. “It’s Tiberius. He’s on his way with a whole squad of Security Force agents!”

“I don’t understand,” said Theo, “What’s this all about?”

“You are all being charged with treason!” said Menendez. “You have to leave. You have to hide! Now!”

They jumped from their seats and scrambled around the apartment. “There’s no time to grab anything,” said Menendez, “I’m sorry. You need to go!” Theo watched the rest of the group leave.

“Theo, did you not hear me? Get out!”

“Why is this happening?” he asked. “Where is Officer Dougherty?”

“Dougherty’s being put into ‘early retirement.’ If you ask me, he’s lucky to get off that easy. The walls are closing in on people who aren’t aligned with the Supreme Leader. Now, Theo, get out of here.”

Theo ran into the darkness outside the apartment. He slipped into the alleyway across the street and several buildings down. He didn’t know where the others were but assumed they were nearby.

Theo could barely see the front of the apartment. He saw Menendez walk outside and stand at attention.

After a few minutes, Tiberius came walking up, taking long strides. Several masked members of the Security Force accompanied him.

“Where are the criminals, Officer Menendez?” Tiberius said in his chilling voice.

“I looked everywhere, sir. They must be out somewhere.”

“The reports from the neighbors said they meet at this time.”

“Sir, it’s possible they vary the nights they meet. Are we even sure they are doing anything treasonous?”

“Officer Menendez, nothing good for this country can come from anything where Theo Essex is involved. When I hear he is throwing gatherings, I know all I need to know.”

Theo’s heart pounded. They had been discovered much faster than he had expected. How the hell had Tiberius found out? Who had seen them?

“I’m telling you, sir, Theo’s a good kid.”

“Sam Lucas thought the same, officer. Look at how that worked out for him.”

“I’ll keep a watch on the place tonight. Make sure you’re informed if they return. We can seal it off in the morning for redistribution.”

There was a pause as Tiberius considered Menendez’s plan. “Officer, if it’s all the same to you, I will be taking a look around the apartment.”

“Are you questioning my loyalties, sir?”

“Not at all, Officer. I will simply rest easier seeing for myself that Essex isn’t hiding somewhere.”

Theo could tell from Tiberius’s voice that the Supreme Leader didn’t trust Menendez at all.

Time passed as Tiberius and his men searched the apartment. Finally, they came outside.

“It seems you were right, Officer Menendez. The Essex boy and his followers have vacated the premises. Almost as if they were warned.”

“Sir,” a new voice. “We found this one hiding in the bushes. He’s young. Maybe one of Essex’s group?”

Damn it! Theo thought.

Two helmeted guards led Dale into view. Tiberius stepped in front of him.

“What is your name, boy?” asked Tiberius.

“I’m Dale.”

“Dale, where is Theo Essex? Where are his co-conspirators?”

“Kiss my ass.”

Tiberius frowned. “Remember that you speak to the Supreme Leader, boy! I will ask you one more time. Where. Is. Theo. Essex?”

“Go to hell, demon bastard! This is for my family!” With unexpected swiftness, Dale elbowed one of the guards holding him and twisted free of the other. He lunged for Tiberius. The Supreme Leader moved with blinding speed. His hand grasped Dale by the throat, lifted him effortlessly off the ground and snapped the teen’s neck. The Security Force officers stood silent. Menendez looked ill. Theo heard a gasp and realized at least one of his group was hiding somewhere near him.

“You will allow Essex and his gang of criminals to return home. I want them to find this. Then, and only then, will you come in and arrest them all.” Tiberius relaxed his grip and Dale’s body crumpled to the ground.

Tiberius and the other Security Forces left. Menendez knelt by Dale’s body, tears streaming down his face. After several minutes, Menendez looked up. He shouted into the distance, trying to reach Theo’s group. “You run now,” he shouted. “All of you. Run and disappear.”

Theo stepped out. “I don’t want to run.”

“You have no choice. The Security Force might still be around. Run as fast and as far as you can. Hide, and find others who agree with you. When you’re ready, and only when you’re absolutely ready, you come back. You find me. And together we will kill that son of a bitch.”

Chapter 21

The flight response embedded in Theo’s brain mingled with his agony and guilt over Dale’s senseless death. He fled his home, leaving his few possessions behind. Kylee and the others ran with him. They kept to the shadows, wandering in and out of yards and behind shuttered shops.

Theo knew if they had any chance at all of finding refuge they had to get away from Tiberius’s stronghold in the city. He kept thinking about what Michelle had warned. They truly did have nowhere to run; no place where they could feel completely safe. The best they could do was go where Tiberius was not likely to follow. The far side of the island was predominately anti-Tiberius, and it was a long walk, one that Theo bet the leadership wouldn’t take unless absolutely necessary.

They ran for a long time, empowered by fear and using legs and lungs strengthened by the work of living on Atlantic Island. Finally, Theo detoured toward the boardwalk. He spied a space between dunes and under the boards and raced to the opening, darting in and sitting down in one smooth motion.

The rest of the rebels followed him in. That was truly what they were now, Theo thought. Rebels. Traitors, if you looked at it from the perspective of the government. This was his group now. His friends and family. First the Event cut him off from the rest of the world, limiting him to this one narrow island. Now, almost all of that had been stripped away as well. It was hard not to feel crushed by the invisible barriers that had been erected around every aspect of his life.

“Dale’s dead,” moaned Liz, breaking through the quiet of night and speaking what they had all been thinking. “He’s dead and we couldn’t do anything to help him.” She curled into Brian’s arms and cried.

“If we had tried we’d all be dead,” said Kylee. “How the hell did Tiberius do what he did?”

“That’s what I’ve been wondering,” said Ryan. “He’s tall but he’s not that big a guy. He doesn’t have the muscle to do what he did to Dale. I don’t think I’ve ever met anyone who does.”

“What do you think, Theo?” asked Bill. “You’ve had the most personal interactions with him. Do you have any idea how he could be that strong?”

Theo thought it over. “I…I saw something once. Tiberius was angry as hell with the mayor when he overturned your sentence. He went to slam his hand on the desk to make a point, like a total normal reaction for an angry guy. Then…I don’t know, he sort of stopped himself. Slowed the speed of his hand. But after he left, there were cracks on the glass where he hit it.”

“How does that happen?” asked Kylee.

“I just thought, I don’t know, like he had a ring on or something. That it was a freak thing. But this…I was wrong.” Theo scratched his head. “I don’t understand it at all. But look, it doesn’t change much. We already considered him incredibly dangerous. I don’t think anybody here was planning to go toe to toe with him as it was.”

“What do we do?” asked Jamie.

“For one thing,” said Theo, “I want to make it very clear that we don’t all have to do the same thing. You don’t have to follow me into this. I…can’t guarantee you won’t all end up like Dale. I don’t have any more answers than anyone else.”

“I choose to stand with you, Theo,” said Joseph.

“I do too,” said Andrew. “Wherever you want to lead us, I’ll follow.”

One by one, everyone committed himself or herself to side with Theo no matter what may happen.

“Thank you,” said Theo, genuinely moved. “I will do the best I can, but I need input from all of you. I need help from all of you. First we need to find a place to stay. I’m not sure any place will do for very long. Does anyone have any ideas?”

“What about Jane’s place?” asked Bill. “You know, the woman we met? She hates Tiberius and all of the people out there are kinda forgotten by the leadership anyway.”

“I hate to impose on her and her housemates like that,” said Theo, “but I think you’re right.”

“So we hide,” said Brian, who was still holding his wife. “What happens next? How are we supposed to find the arms depots when we can’t even go out in public?”

“We don’t know how limited our travel will be,” said Theo. “I’m not convinced they’ve connected you and Liz or Joseph and Andrew to the rest of us.”

“I doubt it will take Tiberius long,” said Andrew.

“Be that as it may, we can use your anonymity for as long we are able. We’ll need to make contact with Carlos Menendez. He deserves to know we are okay. Plus, he may be able to point us toward the weapon stashes.”

“We need to be quick about it,” said Kylee, “The way things are going it would be dumb to assume Carlos is going to be accepted on the Security Force much longer.”

The rebels wandered back out into the dark streets. They didn’t see many people and fortunately didn’t come across any Security Force agents. They wandered toward the edge of Ventnor.

When they arrived at the rundown property where Jane lived, Theo gave one last look back at his friends. They stared back at him in firm solidarity. Theo mounted the steps. The floorboards of the porch creaked under his feet, and a support beam somewhere groaned as if the metal bolts were threatening to come loose from the wood. Theo had forgotten just how much structural damage had taken place during the Event. The fact that the leadership had ignored renovations on these homes and then forced good people to overpopulate them was disgraceful. He pulled back the rickety screen door and knocked.

A woman in a torn t-shirt answered the door. She peered suspiciously at Theo and his group waiting in the street. “Is there some reason you’re knocking in the middle of the night?”

“I’m sorry ma’am,” Theo said. “My name is Theo Essex. I was hoping to speak with Jane?”

The woman cocked her head as she studied him. “Jane, huh? Okay… you wait right here.” She pulled the door closed.

Theo stood staring at the door for five minutes. He had just made up his mind to return to his friends when the door opened. Jane smiled at him. “The prodigal son returns!” she said. “And I see you’ve brought more friends this time. What’s up?”

“I’ll be honest with you Jane,” he said. “We’re in some big trouble. Tiberius came to arrest us. He killed one of our friends. I know this is more than I should even think of asking but do you think it’s possible we could hideout here? Just for a little while?”

She stared at him, eyes wide. “You got away from Tiberius?”

“Yeah. We were lucky. Well… most of us.”

“I’m sorry about your friend. Why don’t you all come inside?”

She stepped back and allowed Theo to enter. The others followed behind. The interior of the house was not in much better condition than the exterior, but Theo saw that the residents had tried to make the most of their situation. Handpicked flower arrangements decorated the entrance. He felt a deep pang of sadness for these people.

“This would be much easier if we had a basement,” Jane said. “As it is, we have one room we were saving, assuming somebody else would come along in time. It’s not much for one person, let alone all of you, but it’s all we’ve got here.”

“What about the other residents?” Theo asked. He kept his voice just barely above a whisper. The common areas were empty and he assumed the other women and children were sleeping.

“Oh they know all about you,” Jane said. “I told them some boys were crazy enough to try to stand up against Tiberius. I’m not sure they believe me that you exist. Like you’re a myth or something.” She cackled.

“And if somebody else does get added?” Kylee asked. “If the leadership throws another person in here and now there’s no room?”

“Oh, we’ll make room,” said Jane. “You all are gonna be crammed into one little space. The rest of us can do a little more sharing.”

For several long days and nights Theo’s rebels stayed in the back room of the community house. Nobody came looking for them. They left one at a time only to use the bathroom. A revolving roster of women brought their meals to them. All of the women seemed curious about the newcomers. They were eager to meet the group that would dare defy Supreme Leader Tiberius.

Several of the women pledged loyalty to Theo and his group. Theo thanked each of them, and always promised to repay their kindness. In particular, he hated having to eat from the already tiny rations afforded to the women. He promised himself he would make all of this up to them.

The problem was, he had no idea what to do. Any plan of action had to begin with acquiring weapons. The firepower of the Security Force made even the slightest protest too great a risk to take. He discussed his thoughts throughout those first few days in the safe house. Kylee was itching to get in touch with Officer Menendez. Theo guessed she also just wanted to get out. They all felt that way. He told his friends that he believed they needed to ride out the week in hiding. Then they could begin small exploratory missions.

The third afternoon, one of the women knocked on the door of the back bedroom. Theo and his friends were sprawled all around the room, standing or sitting but all leaning against the walls. The room had no furniture.

“Have any of you been outside?” The woman asked.

“No,” said Theo. “What is it? Is it Tiberius?”

“No, no, it’s not that.” she said. She looked nervous. “The sky is dark and the wind is howling.”

“Probably one of the big-ass rainstorms brewing,” said Bill. “That happens all the time. No biggy.”

“This is different,” the woman said. “I’ve never seen anything like it. Can one of you come with me?”

“I’ll go,” Theo said. He wasn’t convinced this wasn’t some kind of a trap. If Tiberius’s men were waiting, he was going to be the one to go. He’d give the others a fighting chance to get away.

The woman led him outside. It was already hard to control the screen door as the whipping winds took hold of it. Sand was blowing down the street and Theo raised his arm to shield his eyes. “You were right,” he said. “This is pretty bad.”

“This is worse than before I came to see you,” she said, frightened. “I was just out here five minutes ago and it wasn’t this bad. Something is coming fast.”

As if her statement had signaled it, the rain began to fall, faster and harder than Theo had ever witnessed. He might not be as smart as Ryan, and he wasn’t a meteorologist, but he had watched the news plenty of times. This was a hurricane, and a terrible one, from the looks of it.

Theo ducked back into the foyer and forced the door closed. “It’s a hurricane,” he said to the woman.

“Is it coming in off the beach side?” she asked.

“I don’t know,” he said. “It seems to me like it’s coming from everywhere. We need to get everyone away from windows and doors.”

“But… there aren’t many people here!” she said.

“What do you mean?”

“We got a notice that because the crops are doing well there would be bonus rations today. Most of the women who live here are out getting food. I stayed behind with Mindy to watch over the children! The others are all out there somewhere!”

“What’s your name?” Theo asked.

“I’m Carla,” she said.

“Carla, wait here. Stay away from the door.” He ran back through the house and into the back room.

“Sounds like a hell of a storm,” said Bill.

“It’s a hurricane. A bad one. Most of the people who live here are out in the middle of it somewhere.”

“Why would they all be out?”

“They were told to go get extra food,” Theo said.

“That’s horrible timing,” said Kylee. “Who would have guessed a hurricane would be coming?”

“The leadership, that’s who.” Ryan stood up and began to pace as he often did when agitated.

“How do you figure, Ry?” asked Theo.

“The science department has all kinds of weather monitoring equipment. They’ve got special balloons out in the ocean in all directions. I’m not saying they knew days in advance, but they knew something was coming.”

“And not only did they not warn anybody,” said Bill, “but they sent the people they considered a problem out in the middle of the damned storm.”

“What can we do?” asked Joseph.

“Not much,” said Theo. “I’ve never seen anything like this hurricane. I don’t think we’d survive out there. We have to hope that the others found some kind of shelter.”

“But… this is mass murder!” said Jamie.

Theo nodded. “As soon as the storm dies down we’ll go out in small groups. See who we can find and what we can do to help. Right now we have to stay put. This thing is just getting warmed up.”

The pitiful band of rebels hunkered down in their little room as the storm raged. The power went out quickly. The world was overwhelmed by rain and wind. Theo tried to look out the window but there was too much driving rain to see anything.

The window gave out three hours into the storm. Glass spilled in to the room like tiny bullets. Theo was glad his group was smart enough to be positioned along the side walls and that he hadn’t been foolish enough to make another attempt to peek outside.

The storm powered on for endless hours. Theo for once was grateful for the limited food that had become the rule on the island. His stomach could tolerate the endless hours of waiting. Finally, the winds reduced to a level of howling that allowed for his thoughts to form properly in his mind.

“I think it’s slowing down,” said Bill, already standing up. “I want to go out there and see what we can do to help.”

“I’ll come with you,” said Theo, stretching as he got to his feet.

“The hell you will,” said Bill. “You’re our general. You don’t enter the fray.”

“Yes, I do. I’m coming along to help. Anything happens to me, I’m looking at a room full of people who can rise to the challenge. You’re all just as capable as me. Now let’s go.”

Chapter 22

It had not yet been a whole year since the Event. Though in many ways a lifetime had transpired in the months since, any time Theo thought back to that night and its immediate aftermath the emotions felt raw and fresh in his mind as if only a handful of days had passed.

Now, as he and Bill stepped out into a dark, wet night, Theo felt every bit of that fear and upset come rushing back. The shore had faced hurricanes before, and though there was often significant damage, the towns had recovered. The sheer power of the storm they had just experienced would have been a serious threat to the island under any circumstances. With many of the buildings far from the city so damaged by the Event, the conditions were right for absolute devastation.

“Jesus,” said Bill. “We’re lucky all that broke in our house were windows.”

Theo saw that he was right. Houses up and down the street were damaged to the point of being uninhabitable. Trees had been uprooted and many had crashed through roofs and walls. Theo and Bill walked in the direction of the city. Taller buildings and motels that had been abandoned in the wake of the Event had now collapsed. In some cases the falling debris had showered onto surrounding homes, creating a cascading domino effect of destruction.

All the streets were flooded up to Theo’s waist. The rain continued to fall on them at a normal, steady pace, slowly adding to the massive pool that had risen on the island. He worried that the flooding would soon rise up over the porch of their house. All that water would not be good for the already weakened structure. Not to mention the concerns of mold and mildew. Plus, where would his people sleep?

It occurred to Theo that passage would have been even more difficult had cars still been on the island. The leadership had removed any vehicles that remained on the streets after the Event for recycling. Theo had an uncomfortable suspicion that those cars and trucks had become part of the armor and weapon stashes that had become his group’s focus.

“What do we do when we get close to the rations station?” asked Bill. “We can’t let the Security Forces see us, especially you.”

“I’m actually not all too concerned about that,” said Theo. “Think about it: why would Tiberius risk his men by having them out in the middle of a hurricane just to guard people that it seems for all intents and purposes he wanted dead anyway?”

“You make a good point, bud. So, what’s the plan then?”

“Well, that’s the other reason I’m not concerned about heading to the rations station. The storm took time to build up strength. I figure the women ran in our direction while they could, wanting to head toward home and their children. They would have only stopped when they needed to find shelter. They probably took cover not far from where we are now. We just have to figure out how to get to them.”

Theo didn’t know how he was supposed to find the missing women. He didn’t want to think about a situation where he and Bill would have to wander through dangerous, partially collapsed houses.

Just as he thought they had walked far enough and was about to suggest to Bill that they explore the nearby buildings, Theo heard a scream for help. He turned to Bill, who nodded. He had heard it too.

They ran as fast as they could, which was not very fast at all due the rising waters. Theo only had a vague sense of direction. He thought he had heard the sound coming from behind an abandoned bank.

“Can anybody hear me?” he yelled. “I’m a friend, I’m coming to help you. Please tell me where you are!”

There was silence. “What the hell are they waiting for?” asked Bill.

“I think they are considering whether I’m somebody they can trust.”

Just then, a response came. “We’re in the library! Please help us!”

They waded and stumbled down the block. The library was in good condition, buffered as it was by surrounding structures and with very few nearby trees. It was not protected from the floodwaters, which were above the entrance to the building.

Theo and Bill pushed their way up the few stairs and into the building. It was pitch black inside. They were going to have to rely on sound.

“We’re inside the building,” Theo called. “Where are you?”

“Back here!” called a series of voices, overlapping each other in panicked enthusiasm.

Bill took the lead, pushing his way past floating chairs, tables, and countless books. Theo followed close behind, not wanting to get separated. In the dark, a room full of hundreds if not thousands of floating objects could be very dangerous.

They continued to communicate with the voices. Finally, they arrived at a room near the rear of the building. Inside were more women than Theo could count with any certainty in the near-darkness. Only the moonlight through the broken windows let him know they were there at all.

“Can you see me?” he asked.

“Yes,” the voices responded.

“My name is Theo Essex. My friend is Bill Mansfield. Many of you know of us. For those who don’t, we are part of a small group hiding from Tiberius and his forces. You all have been kind enough to let us stay in one of your houses. We are here to repay your kindness and get you out of here safely. Is anybody injured?”

“Only a few small cuts and bruises,” said a voice. “Is it safe to go outside?”

“It’s very wet, and very difficult to move,” said Bill, “but it’s safe enough. We need to move quickly though. The waters are still rising.”

“Please follow the sound of my voice,” said Theo. “Hold on to each other. We need to make a chain so nobody gets separated. Tell me when you are all connected and we will start walking. We’re going to walk out of this building and take a route that Bill and I took to get here. We won’t stop until you’re back safe with your children.”

“There’s nowhere that’s safe for us, Theo,” said one of the women. “Tiberius has seen to that.”

“You might be right,” he said, “but that’s going to change. This storm is going to keep Tiberius and his forces out of our hair for a while. It’s too difficult for them to come all the way out here for no reason. We are going to use that time to our advantage. Now, please, join up and let’s get moving.”

The floodwaters rose several inches higher that day, but eventually they receded. The cumulative damage from the wind and flooding was impossible for Theo to comprehend.

Rations administrators returned to the center of town nearly two days later. By that time what food was left in the safe house had run out. Theo was glad to not have to tackle the issue of feeding so many people. His mind was full of too many other things. The women he and Bill had successfully led back to the house were beyond grateful and had pledged loyalty to Theo in a way that made him profoundly uncomfortable. The few they had been able to save from some of the destroyed houses on their street were even more thankful. This made him feel worse, in large part because he knew there were other people he hadn’t been able to save.

He met Dale’s mother, and felt horrible being the one to tell her about her son’s murder. He made sure she knew how brave her son had been. “He died a hero,” Theo had told her.

He believed that he had a sense of right and wrong. He believed that he had some good ideas for how to fix the country, if only because of Sam Lucas’s influence, and that he could help correct the evils of Paul Tiberius, if only because of the unwavering support from Kylee and his other friends. What Theo did not believe was that he had the strength of will to send innocent people into battle; to ask them to risk their lives knowing the odds of them returning unharmed were unfavorable.

He was determined to identify the location of Tiberius’s armories. In his mind this was a first, crucial step to being able to mount any kind of offensive against the leadership. The hurricane had increased the separation between the parts of the island. Travel was difficult, and the Security Force and other representatives of the government were beginning to spread back into the Ventnor district. Theo didn’t know what they were up to and suspected it couldn’t be anything good. Of more pressing concern was the limitations this imposed on his ability to send out parties to hunt down the weapons Tiberius was hiding.

Theo sought out Ryan and Bill for their advice and counsel. As the willing participants in his hypothetical rebellion grew in number, he was more comforted by those who knew him best. He often wanted to consult with Kylee, but she was busy with training his army of women in hand-to-hand combat, skills she had learned while involved with the Security Force. Theo was proud of her natural leadership qualities, and had no desire to distract her from her newfound responsibilities.

One day nearly a week after the hurricane, Theo sat with Ryan and Bill on the front steps of the house. One of his few early orders was to position a rotation of volunteers at the ends of the street. He would know quickly if anyone was to approach, so he and his friends could hide. This was good. Fresh air helped him organize his thoughts and keep a clear focus on the road ahead.

“What’s on your mind today, boss man?” asked Bill.

Theo laughed. “I’ve told you not to call me ‘boss man.’ Or ‘chief’ or ‘El Capitan’ or any of your other pet names.”

“Sorry, dude, it’s just that you’re a little too important now to just be ‘Theo.’”

“Well that’s just it,” Theo said. “I don’t really want to be that important. I’m happy to lead and offer whatever guidance I can, but I’m not any more important to this island than any of the rest of you. That kind of thinking is what breeds people like Tiberius.”

“Ugh,” said Ryan, “can you not use the words ‘breed’ and ‘Tiberius’ in the same sentence? Nasty mental image.”

“Good point,” said Theo. “Anyway, so I’m thinking about the information we have on the weapons depots. We know they are supposed to be spread around the island. We can rule out the Margate farms because there aren’t any permanent structures there. Likewise, most of Ventnor was in bad shape to begin with and is much worse now.”

“The city is still strong though,” said Ryan. “Plenty of places Tiberius would feel safe keeping his guns.”

“Right,” said Theo, “but that just makes the city too difficult. Plus it’s not exactly friendly territory for us.”

“Okay,” said Bill, “So we’re trying to figure out the hiding spots in Ventnor. Well, I don’t think Tiberius would hide anything where people were living at any point since the Event. He’s pretty secretive. Not really a ‘hide in plain sight’ type of guy.”

“Very true,” said Theo. “So we’re thinking somewhere along Ventnor or Atlantic Avenues? More of a commercial zone.”

“Makes plenty of sense,” said Ryan. “Though you’d think he’d have some kind of security on the place. There’s nowhere around town with any special security that I’ve ever seen. Just the guards at ration stations and the places where the government workers pick up products.”

Just then Brian came running down the street. “Theo, guys, you’ve got to hear this.”

He was out of breath, and struggled for wind as he forced out his story. “Tiberius has crews out all over the place!”

Theo felt panic slink into the back of his mind. “Brian, you’re sure you weren’t followed? What are we talking about here? Security Force?”

“No, no, I wasn’t followed. I was never seen. Hid at a distance. And it’s not the Security Force.”

“Well don’t leave us hanging here, Bri,” said Bill. “What is it? Is the circus in town?”

“It’s the construction crew… or something like it. They must have conscripted people for this job. Rarely seen so many people gathered in one place.”

“What are they doing?” asked Theo.

“They are tearing everything down.”

“Everything? What does that mean? Can you back up and walk us through what happened?”

Brian sat down on the step. Theo could tell the man was doing his best to process everything into a presentable report.

“I was doing some surveillance, just like I did yesterday,” Brian began. “When all of a sudden this huge group of people comes storming down the street. All over the place like ants. In the core of that was that kid you all had trouble with… Barnard, was it? He started reading this proclamation from Tiberius.”

“It’s Bertier,” said Bill, “I’m amazed that ass can read.”

“Right, so he starts reading this whole thing that basically amounts to Tiberius kicking people out of the homes they won in the lottery. There’s a lot of crap in there about condemned homes and unsafe conditions but it amounts to a bunch of people getting thrown out.

“He just said all those people were going to be provided emergency tents by the leadership. There wasn’t much choice being offered. Then the crews start going to town tearing things down. All the people were being funneled out and down a side street to a makeshift camp on the beach. Tents overlooking the water. Not nearly as romantic as it sounds.”

“Did the people protest at all?” asked Bill.

“Not that I could see,” said Brian. “There wasn’t much of the Security Force there but the ones who were there were heavily armed. I think people don’t have it in them to fight. Many of them weren’t doing well after the storm as it is.”

“And the crews were tearing down all the buildings?” asked Ryan.

“Yeah, well, I walked around as best I could while keeping my distance. There’s sort of a circle they are clearing out. So, not everything in the town but a big section in the middle. The worker bees are destroying all of that. Well, except for the old bank.”

Theo jumped to his feet like he’d been stung. “The bank?”

“Yeah, the one by the library… well what was the library. Now it’s just a bunch of water damaged books and they are tearing it down so—”

“That’s it,” Theo said.

“What’s it?” asked Bill. Then his eyes widened as the answer hit him. “Oh man, the bank! Makes perfect sense.”

“Why didn’t we think of that?” asked Ryan. “It’s exactly right. No random person on the island has the equipment or capabilities to get into the safe. The place is abandoned so people wouldn’t think to look there. Where better to store something important? That’s got to be the weapon stash.”

Theo nodded. “Yeah, that’s it. Tiberius is doing something to the town. There’s some kind of plan in motion here to suppress the people but his plans got crossed up. He can’t demolish the bank. And that, my friends, is the break we were looking for.”

Chapter 23

“Okay,” Theo said. “Not to make too big a deal here but this is going to be one of those moments that’s going to determine our futures. Everything hinges on our ability to pull off this one raid. What?” He stopped and stared at Bill who was grinning widely.

“Oh, nothing, it’s just… dude. A bank heist! This is the coolest thing that could ever happen to me!”

Theo laughed. He looked around the living room of the house that now was home and refuge to dozens of people. With the addition of so many new, willing volunteers, Theo had to decide when to close ranks to his inner circle. This was one of those times.

It had been only a few hours since Brian had returned with his report, unintentionally revealing the answer Theo had been seeking. Ryan and Bill agreed that time was of the essence. This raid had to be carried out quickly, under the cover of night, and without too many people knowing or having opportunity to accidentally slip and reveal the plan.

“I wouldn’t really call this a heist,” said Theo. “I don’t anticipate a tremendous amount of security, though to think the Force won’t be there at all would be a mistake. In fact, I’m counting on it. Otherwise we wouldn’t be able to get in to the vault. We also have to account for the potential of night crews working on the demolition of the nearby buildings.”

“You think people will be working this late?” asked Kylee.

“I do. But that can be a good thing too. The noise they make will help us stay undetected, if we’re careful. Now the first thing is deciding who is going to go on this mission. We don’t really know what we are facing, and there’s a chance this could get messy. I don’t want you to think there’s not a risk in what I’m asking.”

“I’m in, Theo,” said Andrew. “Can’t have all you young folk having all the fun!”

Joseph turned to him. They seemed to lock eyes for a second, and then he turned to face Theo. “I am in as well. I know the risk but this has to happen.”

“Okay. Who else?” Theo was shocked as all the hands went up. “Listen, guys, I appreciate the enthusiasm, but we can’t have everybody rushing off. We can’t chance losing all of you, and we’d be better off with a smaller group. Kylee, I need you to stay behind.”

“What?” she was angry. “Why me? You don’t think I’m capable?”

“No, no, that’s not what I’m saying! You’re the leader of all the women here…all our fighters. I need them organized for what’s to come. For that reason it’s too much of a risk having you out there right now. Do you understand, babe?”

She thought about his point, her face contorting along with her emotions. Finally she relented. “I’ll stay,” she said, “but just this once. If there comes a time we send people to fight I’m going with them.”

Theo grimaced. “Yeah. I know. I hope we can avoid that, for a while at least.”

“So who is going to go?” asked Ryan.

“Andrew and Joseph can go. Jamie, Bill, and you, Ry. You’re my team with me on the ground. Brian and Liz, I’ve got another mission I’d like you to run, if that’s okay with you.”

Everyone seemed satisfied with his or her assignment. Theo started to fall into the groove of leadership and planning as he spoke. “So, as far as the plan… It’s not much in terms of specific steps. We have to be prepared to react to the situation as we encounter it. There are a few guidelines. If there is a guard in place at the vault, that means the vault is either going to be open, so the guard can access the weapons, or closed but the guard will have the key. In the first case we can try to get around the guard, but it’s likely that in either situation we are going to have to take him out of commission as quickly as possible. Kylee has trained you all in some simple techniques to disable your opponent. Just remember that this opponent is likely armed and has similar training.

“I will call the shots as to who confronts the guard… or guards, though I have my doubts about there being more than one person assigned. Once we get access to the vault, we’re going to start a rotation to get the weapons back to the safe house. It’s going to be dangerous, unpredictable, and I just don’t have as much information as I’d like. Still, I don’t have to tell you all how important this is. If we can shift this one stash of weapons to our side, we start to have something resembling a fighting chance.”

He looked around. Every time he was placed in a position of authority, Theo fully expected everyone around him to balk. Again, he was surprised. The serious faces in the room were hanging on his words. “Okay. It’s time we take some action. Let’s do this.”

An hour later Theo and his team were watching from the shadows as a lone Security Force agent paced outside the front doors of the seemingly abandoned bank. Large spotlights were trained on the buildings across the street and just as Theo had suspected the demolition continued into the night.

“Damn lot of guys all over the place,” whispered Bill. “Just like Brian said.”

“Doesn’t matter,” said Ryan. “Those spotlights are going to make us pretty much invisible to anybody ripping the buildings apart over there. The issue is the guard.”

“Do you want me to distract him?” asked Jamie.

“Thanks, but no,” said Theo. “You’re more valuable to us than that, and for all we know that guard could shoot you on site. We have to be more careful than that.”

“What do you want us to do?” asked Andrew.

Theo explained his strategy. His team disbursed into the darkness. He felt funny sending them off like this, but the reality was he wasn’t taking the easy way out for himself. If the plan went off properly he would walk right in to the bank vault, but if something went wrong he would be the one to have to save the day. Theo realized he wasn’t so worried anymore about risking his life. There were bigger things at stake.

Theo watched and waited. It was hard to see anything in the darkness around the bank. He was positioned diagonally down the street, beyond the perimeter of the spotlights. He squinted, trying to see a sign of Bill. Bill was told to only get into position once the others were all set. Suddenly, he saw a glimpse of his friend on the roof of the bank, perched like a ninja. Theo had to give Bill credit. Bill had been convinced he could make it onto the roof from the rear of the building but Theo hadn’t been so sure. Now he knew Bill was right. That filled him with confidence. Bill’s appearance on the roof meant it was now up to Theo to tell his team when to act.

He watched carefully as the guard relaxed against the building’s façade. The man had his long, platinum blonde hair pinned back on each side of his head. He looked incredibly bored by the task he had been assigned. Buddy, your night is about to get a ton more interesting, Theo thought.

Theo waited, forcing himself to remain calm and still while the guard relaxed. Finally, the young man rolled his head in a circle, stretching out his neck. He pressed off the wall with the foot that had been propped up behind him. He took a few steps away from the building. Now!

Theo let out a shrill whistle. This led the guard out another few feet to investigate the sound. At that, Bill came flying off the roof and on to the helpless agent of the Security Force. Bill bounced up to his feet and was met by the others, rushing around the building. The guard was trying to fight his way free. Bill reached behind him with a chokehold that Theo knew Kylee had taught him. The small mass of rebels surrounded the action and backed into the darkness of the bank’s interior. A minute later, the door opened and Ryan’s head poked back out. He planted something large against the door, propping it open. That was the “all-clear” sign for Theo to make his grand entrance.

He kept his body low to the ground as he maneuvered through the still-damp earth toward the bank. No reason to risk being spotted. The clanging and banging of the demolition crews continued unabated. He approached the stairs and ducked quickly past what turned out to be some kind of umbrella holder. He made it through the doorway and stopped to let his eyes adjust. Visibility was going to be tricky with only the narrow sliver of the distant spotlights entering through the open door.

“Where are you guys?” he called out.

“Back by the vault, oh fearless leader.” Bill’s voice, solid and reassuring. All was well here, so far. Theo walked in the direction of the voice, his hands held out in front to ward off any unseen obstacles. The interior of the bank’s main room was not very large, and he made it to the wall containing the huge vault with ease. As he walked, his eyes adjusted to the limited light. He could see the guard, unconscious on the floor. The rebels stood around the entrance.

“Did you see me fly onto this poor dumbass?” asked Bill, beaming with pride.

Theo laughed. “Not gonna lie, it was awesome.”

“Yeah, that’s my guy!” said Jamie. “I got in one kick though!”

“You were all great,” Theo said. “Have we had any luck at finding a way into the vault?”

“Would you believe it’s unlocked?” asked Ryan. “Tiberius might not be a ‘hide in plain sight’ guy, be he was a little overconfident.”

“That, or our friend and host, Mr. Guard, got a little curious about what he was guarding and forgot to lock up after,” said Joseph.

“You’re probably right, Joseph,” said Theo. “Have you guys looked inside yet?”

“We wanted you to do the honors,” said Bill.

“I appreciate that,” said Theo. “Okay, people, this is the moment that we’ve been waiting for.” He stepped forward. Up close, he could see that the heavy vault door was open a few inches. He reached in with both hands and pulled, guiding the slow sweep of the door’s opening.

Inside the vault, some kind of dim, battery-powered lighting filled the room with a haunting blue glow. The vault had been carefully retrofitted from its previous life as storage for money and valuables. Very little of that had any purpose in Atlantic Island. What had replaced the money, however, would serve Theo’s purposes just fine.

“My God,” said Andrew. “No wonder there isn’t any crime on the island. They must have taken every weapon.”

The walls of the vault were filled with guns of all shapes and sizes. Tables erected down the middle of the room held more guns and boxes upon boxes of ammo. These were not the officially issued weapons of any police department that had existed here before the Event. This was a motley collection of arms taken from the people.

Theo was amazed by the varied weaponry the people of Atlantic Island had possessed, not to mention those who had not survived the Event. He saw handguns, knives, machine guns, rifles, a giant thing he had to assume was a bazooka, even a bow with a quiver full of arrows.

“Wow, a box of grenades!” said Bill in awe. “This is so cool!” Jamie elbowed him in the ribs. “Ow! Okay, cool, but also very important and serious. Happy?”

Theo turned to his band of rebels. “This is exactly what we needed. Okay, Jamie, this is the part I promised you could play. Run back to the safe house and tell Kylee to mobilize the team she and I discussed. We need some more people or it could take us a week to clear this place out. We need this done tonight, quickly and quietly.”

She gave Bill a kiss and sprinted to the exit. “What about the rest of us?” Bill asked. “Can I take the bazooka?”

“Joseph and Andrew, you guys grab what you can from here and take it back to the safe house. Listen, I understand if you don’t want to be running yourselves ragged through the night. You don’t have to come back.”

“Please, we aren’t so very old!” said Joseph. “We can almost keep pace with those ladies Jamie is going to bring back. You’ll see us later, do not worry!”

Theo smiled. “Okay, okay. Bill, Ry, you guys need to deal with the guard. No reason to beat him up any more but I think a trip to the beach would do him well, if you get me.”

“Gotcha, boss!” laughed Bill. Theo knew that Bill couldn’t be happier to be taking action after having been mistreated left and right since the Event. Truth be told, he felt the same way. He knew Tiberius was going to be furious when he heard about the raid, and that gave him a tremendous amount of pleasure.

Theo watched all his friends leave. He was going to need to remain to guard the vault. It was eerie being by himself in the pale, cold blue of the room. It might be wise to get a gun. He was looking around for which ammunition matched which type of weapon when he heard Bill’s voice.

“Hey, Theo, thought you might want this. Mr. Guard doesn’t need it anymore. Later, man.” The black semi-automatic, a staple of the Security Force, was on the floor by the front of the vault. Theo went over to the gun. He kneeled down next to it and touched it with a sense of caution and respect. His experience with guns did not go much beyond shooting BB’s from rifles at summer camp. Would a day come where he would have to fire this gun or one like it? He thought it very likely. He sighed, and sat on the floor, pulling the gun across his lap. What the hell kind of a world had this become? What kind of a twisted fantasy saw Theo Essex as the leader of a growing army of disenfranchised, angry rebels? Could he lead an uprising? How could he be expected to do all this and not crack to pieces under the pressure?

He allowed his thoughts to turn to Kylee. Beautiful, strong, capable. She believed in him and he believed in her. In all his friends, really. Together they could do anything. He thought of Sam Lucas. A good man who had seen so much potential in him. A man who had tried to do the best he could in unimaginable circumstances for which there was no guidebook. Theo promised himself he would do the same. He calmed then, and was still sitting calmly, practically meditating, when the first of Kylee’s women arrived to collect the weapons.

Chapter 24

Under the cover of a moonless night, the rebels removed every piece of equipment from the bank vault. Every weapon and bit of ammo, from the largest, most elaborate guns to the quiver of arrows, was transported silently in an assembly line stretching from the bank to the safe house.

Theo was thrilled with the efficiency of the operation. Every step, from Bill’s drop onto the guard to the very last handgun being liberated from the bank had gone exactly as he had hoped. They now had more than enough weapons to arm every man and woman in the safe house with more to spare for new recruits, should they be so fortunate as to acquire them.

Of course, a little sacrifice had to be made. Having so much firepower in the house with children around was a disaster waiting to happen. Theo hated having to move people out of one of the upstairs bedrooms, as it meant more crowding in the others, but it had to be done. He set up a volunteer rotation to stand outside the door of the new rebel armory. He laughed every time he thought how they were storing that many weapons in a room with seashell wallpaper.

There wouldn’t be much time to rest on the laurels of their great accomplishment. Theo knew the rebels would be looking to him for the next plan. Tiberius was proceeding with his changes to the very fabric of Atlantic Island. Between the ongoing demolitions in the heart of Ventnor to the fights to the death that were reportedly still happening, there was a great deal of ugly corrupting the heart of the island.

He wasn’t sure what the next move should be. He had spent a good amount of time dwelling on the subject of the weapons stash. Now that they had cleaned out the one, he spent the next few days deciding how to proceed. Some of his “advisors” wanted to seek out the other stashes. True, there was a value in taking away Tiberius’s weapons, even if the rebels couldn’t possibly use that many guns. Still, there was far too much risk involved. Tiberius probably already knew about the raid. He would be increasing security at the other locations, which were likely far from the safe house. Theo just couldn’t see a scenario where he didn’t risk his people for relatively little gain.

Two days following the raid, Theo sat down with Kylee. “You wanted to talk to me?” he said.

“Well, I thought you should talk to someone. You don’t have to go through all this alone.”

“I do talk to people. I met with Brian and Liz this morning to go over some ideas about how to better gather intelligence on the other side and—”

“That’s not what I mean,” she said. “I know you talk about plans and strategies, and that’s important. But when you start looking to the people closest to you as allies, subordinates, advisors, whatever, you lose out on what you need most. Friends.”

He smiled. “You’re a little more than just a friend to me, you know.”

“Really? I had no idea. Seriously though, that’s why I’m the one who needs to talk to you. I don’t want you putting so much pressure on yourself.”

“Kylee, last year I was struggling with my grades in school. Now I’m the head of a rebellion with my girlfriend as general of my army. How can I not feel pressured?”

“I get it. I had a normal life too, you know. Friends, family. There are many people I miss, and I’m a girl who had a few months of training now trying to lead a team of mostly women to do I don’t know what. It’s stressful. But somehow these are the jobs we ended up with, whether we wanted them or not. We have an obligation to our people, and to all the people of this island. Tiberius has to go, Theo. And it’s up to us to remove him.”

Theo thought in silence. Finally he looked up at her. “You’re right, babe. You always are. And you’ve given me an idea.”

“Well thank you. What’s your idea?”

“You said you’re dealing with an army of mostly women. Well, that’s because their husbands are locked up. That’s the rest of our army right there. The ‘political prisoners’ Tiberius took away because they didn’t agree with him.”

Kylee brushed back her hair. “You want to stage a prison break? Do we even know where the men are being kept?”

He shook his head. “Not specifically, no. Though I think most of the prison is filled with dissidents. I think the real criminals whose weapons ended up in our safe house weren’t so lucky.”

“How do we break into a prison? It’s got to be heavily guarded.”

“Well, who says we have to break in? Maybe we can somehow help the prisoners break out. Start the uprising from within.”

She kissed him. “You see? You can’t doubt yourself, Theo. I keep telling you, you’re in this position for a reason. Why don’t you meet with all the inner circle tomorrow?”

“Sounds good. What do I do today?”

She smiled. “Leave that to me.” She kissed him again.

“We have so much to be proud of right now,” Theo said to his friends. “The bank mission has provided us with a fighting chance. It’s now time to talk about what comes next.”

“Does it involve some kind of espionage?” asked Brian. “I’m dying to get out there and get involved.”

“Then this might be your lucky day, my friend.”

“What’s your plan, Theo?” asked Jamie.

“My plan is to bring the fight to Tiberius. It’s time for war. How we get there… well, I have a few key parts of my strategy. Please feel free to contradict me and give me your opinions.” He smiled. “It’s only the fate of all of our lives that we are discussing here. You know, NBD.”

The laughter that greeted this statement inspired him. His people were united by common goals and beliefs. Tiberius united only by fear. That was going to be his downfall. Theo was going to show Atlantic Island that there was nothing to fear from Paul Tiberius and his Security Force.

Theo opened his mouth to continue, but caught himself as he saw the expressions on the faces of everyone in the room. They were all looking to the doorway. One of Kylee’s recruits was standing by the entrance to the safe house with a gun raised to the head of another woman. It was Michelle.

“Found this girl wandering around. She was asking about all of you. I thought I’d better bring her in.”

“It’s okay,” said Theo. “She’s our friend.”

The woman scowled as if to question the company Theo chose to keep. She lowered her weapon and backed off. Michelle relaxed and walked into the room. Jamie and Kylee jumped up and hugged her.

“Where have you been?” Kylee asked.

“Living in the city,” said Michelle. “The Security Force thinks I’m a Tiberius loyalist.”

“And you’re not?” asked Ryan. He looked furious.

“No, Ryan! I’m so sorry for everything. I was wrong to run out on you guys. It took me a long time to find you. What is this? You have security?”

“We’ve been through a hell of a lot since you decided to wander off,” Ryan said.

“Come on, man,” said Bill, “go easy on her.”

“No!” said Ryan. “She left us. Left me! Ran away because we dared think that we didn’t have to accept a life under a dictator. Well guess what, Michelle? We damn near got killed by your beloved dictator. We’ve been hiding here. Sleeping on the floor. Trying to survive and mount a counterattack.”

“A counterattack?” Michelle asked.

“Yes,” said Theo. “Why don’t you join us, Michelle?” We were about to discuss some strategy.”

“I’m sorry, Theo,” said Andrew, “but how do we know we can trust her? How do we know she’s not a spy for Tiberius?”

“We don’t. We can’t. But I’m not going to deny safety to someone who needs it and I can’t have any of us not trusting each other. I want her to stay.”

Theo could tell that some of his group did not agree with his decision. He hated having to pull rank. It was not his style of leadership. In this case, it was the only thing he could think to do. Michelle was one of Kylee and Jamie’s best friends. She deserved a chance to apologize and return to the fold. He knew that Ryan would likely not forgive her, and maybe that was okay. Ry would be keeping an eye out, and that was good enough for Theo.

“So as I was starting to say,” Theo continued, “the time is coming to go to war with the leadership. We don’t have to launch the plan until we are good and ready, but once it starts I’m afraid it’s all going to happen at once. We are going to build our army from the men Tiberius has unfairly thrown in prison. We’ll do that by starting the fighting from within.”

He looked at Kylee. “I wish there was time for you to train them, but this isn’t going to be like the raid on the bank. There’s no way to get all those people back across the island to hide out here and learn to fight. The prison breakout has to be the first major part of the battle. From there, we don’t stop. We will make sure to get word in advance to Officer Menendez. With any luck he has a few recruits who can help us. It’s going to be a difficult, progressive struggle. We will need to disarm Security Force soldiers as we defeat them, in order to properly arm our men.”

“What’s the end game?” asked Bill.

“The end game is our army storming the Palace. We take out Tiberius, dead or alive. Personally, I’d prefer alive. He has a lot to answer for and I’d love to see that happen in a real, honest court of law.”

He paused, waiting for dissent. There didn’t seem to be any. Michelle was clearly holding her peace so as not to incite another round of animosity in her direction. Theo doubted she had totally relinquished her concerns about challenging Tiberius.

“I don’t say any of this lightly,” he continued. “Many of us in this room and in this house may not survive the battle to come.” He saw his friends starting to interject. “I don’t want to hear anything about me staying back. This is for all the marbles, as they say. I’m there with you every step of the way. Who is with me?”

Hands went up. Before long, every hand was raised but Michelle’s. Theo saw her look around. She reluctantly raised hers as well.

“I’d follow you to the gates of Hell itself, Theo,” said Joseph. “And if I die, it will be fighting. A good death, yes?”

“Thank you, Joseph,” Theo said. “I am… honored, touched, beyond words to have your support. To know each and every one of you.” He spoke for the next five minutes praising them for the challenge they had accepted.

A week later, he stood in front of the safe house, addressing his entire army, Kylee and Bill at his sides.

“The world outside this island, it would seem, fell victim a long time ago to a dictator and his ruthless ways. The same thing has happened now, on Atlantic Island. With your help, with your sacrifice, this comes to an end. Tiberius comes to an end. And in his place, we will bring about a better, brighter future. We will find safe, reasonable ways to provide opportunity and basic necessities for every citizen of this nation. I promise you that I will do everything imaginable to ensure that what you do very soon will be remembered in the history books to come, and never, ever forgotten. Be ready, my friends. I will call on you soon to fight for your freedom. Will you stand with me?”

The crowd cheered. “Good thing Tiberius’s men are far away,” said Bill. “Enjoy it, bro. They love you.”

Theo did enjoy it. As much as he feared what was to come, he felt empowered by the support of all these people. More than that, he knew that as crazy as this whole situation was, he had found what he had always been meant to do. Sam Lucas saw it in him right away. He was meant to lead people to better, happier lives.

It was a bizarre concurrence of emotions. On the one hand, he felt fully realized for the first time in his life. Here on a bizarre island he had “found himself.” Still, that self-discovery had come in the middle of death and loss, with more surely to come. How many of the cheering people in front of him now would not survive the coming conflict? How many of those children sheltered in the safe house would lose one parent? How many would lose both? These thoughts floated through his brain, round and round, as he took time to greet his supporters like the politicians he had seen on television.

Chapter 25

Theo spent the next few days in meetings with his inner circle. The plan for the uprising was becoming more defined with each session. Theo knew well the sayings about the best plans for war going out the window once the battle began, but he believed that the broad outlines of the strategy would hold no matter what. In many ways they had to hold for the endeavor to be successful.

The outline was easy to develop. An outside force would join a rebellion within the prison. The combined army would fight through the streets to take the Palace. This was simple enough to understand. Theo and his advisors quickly realized there would be some difficult spots in the plan.

“We need to find a way to get word to the prisoners. We have to let them know that help is coming and that they need to start the battle from within. Does anybody have any idea how we can do that?”

“Getting a message to the prisoners is going to be impossible,” said Brian. “I spent last night doing surveillance on the place. It’s built into an old hotel, and every inch is manned by the Security Force. Cameras show every angle of the outside. I couldn’t get anywhere close.”

“If I may,” said Andrew, “I’ve got a suggestion. It might be crazy… I don’t know.”

The group listened in as Andrew spoke. When he finished, Theo said, “Andrew, you’re right. It might be a crazy plan, but it also might work.”

At the next meeting, discussion turned to the attack on the Palace. Kylee wanted to get word to Carlos Menendez, to let him know what was coming. They decided to send Brian and Liz into the city to pass the message along.

Theo felt good about the progress they were making. Still, it was one thing to discuss the ideas for war, another thing to truly go out and fight. What was coming scared him to death. After the meeting, he walked down to the beach and sat in the sand, watching the waves. This had become his post-meeting ritual. The solitude and vastness of the ocean helped clear his mind of the multitude of worries that piled up every day.

“Mind if I join you, chief?” asked Bill.

“Nah, find a patch of sand. There are a few to go around.”

“So… how are you handling all this?”

“What, sending people to maybe die? I’m handling it swimmingly.”

“They aren’t dying for you, man. If they die it’s for themselves. For their families. For the good of everybody trapped on this island. And c’mon, it’s not like you aren’t taking on a hell of a lot of risk yourself.”

“Yeah, I know. That’s part of it too. All of it weighs on me. It’s just a bizarre feeling. I know that in some weird way I’m meant to do this. I just… well, I kind of wish the responsibility could fall to someone else.”

“I understand that. You’re a pretty amazing dude, Theo. The way you’ve held all of us together has been beyond impressive. But you wouldn’t be human if you didn’t occasionally want to pass the buck. You’re scared, which is a totally normal reaction. You want to know that you’ll live to see the new world we are all fighting for. We all have those fears, but it’s you who makes us believe that this is a cause that’s bigger than any of us. We’re all together in this. You’ve got a pretty heavy cross to bear, but we’ll help in any way we can. That’s what friends do for each other, right?”

“You’re right, man. Again. I think without you and Kylee and Ry and everyone really I would go completely off the rails. Thanks for being there for me.”

“You got it, buddy.”

Suddenly a voice echoed, amplified through what sounded like a megaphone. “Bring out the traitor Theo Essex, by order of the Supreme Leader!”

“Well, would you listen to that,” said Bill. “I think somebody’s in trouble.” The joking words were not reflected in Bill’s face. He held out his hand and pulled Theo to his feet.

With his closest friend by his side, Theo walked through the sands and across the damaged boardwalk. At the place where the broken side street intersected Atlantic Avenue a crowd of people had formed. As Theo drew closer, his pupils straining in the darkness to properly see what was in front of him, he realized he wasn’t seeing a gathering. He was witnessing a standoff.

Kylee, Ryan, Jamie, Brian, Liz, Andrew, Joseph and about ten of the women Theo now thought of as “Kylee’s army” were holding various firearms pointed in the direction of a mass of Security Force agents, their own frightening military-grade weapons pointed back. In the middle of the Security Force stood Bertier, heavily armored.

“Well, well, well. If it ain’t King Crap of Loserville.” Bertier smiled with delight as Theo tentatively approached. Theo wondered how many of Bertier’s friends were under the fearsome masks of the Security Force. Did they have night vision in those masks? Theo thought it was likely. He realized now how fortunate they had been that the guard outside the bank had not chosen to wear his mask.

Bertier continued to grin. “I heard you was some kinda’ big deal, but look at you. You ain’t nothin’.”

“What do you want, Bertier?” he asked.

“It ain’t what I want. It’s what Supreme Leader Tiberius wants. It’s simple, really. Starts with you getting arrested here tonight, ends with your public execution. Whatever you were planning, looks like it just ain’t gonna work out. Damn shame.”

Theo took a few steps closer. His team had their guns trained and unwavering. “How did you find me?”

“That Asian chick you hang out with, she sold you out real good, bro. Told the Supreme Leader exactly where you were hiding. Now let’s go, I don’t wanna have to start killing all your friends.”

“You’re not taking Theo anywhere,” said Bill.

“Oh hey there, princess!” laughed Bertier. “Come to get your ass handed to you again? Lucky for you I’ve got strict orders to get the prisoner back ASAP. Sucks, man, I was lookin’ forward to knockin’ you around some more.”

Bill’s fists were clenched. Theo turned to him. “It’s not worth it,” he whispered. “You’ll get your chance, Bill. This isn’t the time.”

Theo stepped forward, gently parting his line of guards. “I’ll turn myself in, Bertier. But you leave these people alone. They have nothing to do with me.”

“Not my call, little man. Sure as hell not yours. I’ll leave ’em alone for now because that’s what the boss says. But Supreme Leader Tiberius changes his mind, you can kiss all them people goodbye. But, you know, maybe he’ll let me keep you, sexy,” He made air kisses toward Kylee.

Theo looked around at his supporters. Their eyes pleaded with him to fight back. Instead, he walked straight up to Bertier and held his arms out in front of them. “Let’s go.”

“Man, you’re really somethin’, boy. I’m gonna love watchin’ them kill you. Maybe I’ll get to be the one to do it!” Bertier turned and was handed a pair of handcuffs. With sick glee he snapped them around Theo’s wrists.

Theo turned to Kylee. He hated to see that she was fighting back tears. He leaned in as close as he could. “I’ll be fine. You know what you have to do.” She nodded.

“Enough already, loser,” said Bertier. “Get your ass movin’.”

He gave Theo a hard shove in the back. Some of the Security Force moved with them down Atlantic Avenue, while others lagged behind, keeping guns pointed at the rebels until they were well out of sight.

Theo kept his head down and walked calmly next to Bertier. Since Sam Lucas’s death he had always anticipated that this day would come. He considered the possibility that all the planning and work might lead to nothing. He might die, executed in a public spectacle like Bertier had predicted, or maybe just taken out early because a guard got twitchy or Tiberius wanted to make an impact.

Could he face death like a man if and when the time came? He hoped so… thought so, really. But, of course, everything changes when the gun is pointed at your head. He knew his friends were worried about him. He knew that Bill was outraged that it was Bertier who made the arrest. He knew that Bill wanted nothing more than a chance to unload a year’s worth of anger and frustration on Bertier’s smug face, and Theo wished he could see it happen.

Theo walked on in the darkness. The closer he got to the city, the more lights he saw on in windows. He could imagine people looking out and seeing him go by with his frightening entourage. Would they know why he had been arrested? He couldn’t say what kind of propaganda had permeated the city since his forced eviction. He wondered who was living in the apartment he had shared with Kylee. They had made some good memories there, in the middle of the madness. Maybe the Security Force was using it to store weapons. The thought made him laugh.

“Something funny, loser?” asked Bertier.

“Sure. The idea of you being given authority to do anything more complicated than tying your shoes.”

A few seconds passed while Bertier processed the statement, trying to make sense of whether or not he had been insulted. Concluding that he had been, he moved close to Theo and spun his fist toward Theo’s stomach. Bertier pulled back at the last minute. “Damn it, the Supreme Leader don’t want you injured. You’re lucky.”

Theo raised his arms. The chain links of the handcuffs clinked. “Yeah, I feel really lucky right now.”

When he finally arrived at the prison, he was utterly exhausted. The makeshift booking process took a long time, despite no attempt being made to fingerprint him. It was more of an effort to parade him around. Theo hoped he would see Menendez, but there was no sign of him. Theo was pushed into an elevator. The small car rose to the fifth floor. He was guided down what had been a hotel hallway. The hallway was narrow, due to the thick layers of cement coating the walls on each side.

“Here’s where we say goodbye, loser.” Bertier kicked Theo in his backside. He stumbled through an open door and fell to the floor, where he landed on a thin carpet. He sat up, rubbing his sore wrists, now unbound. The sound of several heavy locks clinked behind him. He was in what had once been a hotel room. The furniture was gone, replaced by four dirty mattresses, one along each wall. Three other men were in there. One didn’t even wake up. The other two eyed him suspiciously. Theo held up his hand in what he hoped was an “I come in peace” gesture.

He made his way to the remaining mattress, and sat against the wall, looking at the iron bars welded into the large window. He thought about Kylee. He imagined her looking up at the same moon he could see right now. He wished he could talk to her. He missed her, and he missed his friends, and he missed his family. Before he knew it, he was fast asleep.

Chapter 26

Theo’s friends watched as he was taken away to Atlantic Island’s mysterious prison. When he was out of sight, Bill turned to Kylee. “I never thought it would be Bertier who would come to get him. How the hell did he get into power?”

“I know. It’s sickening, isn’t it?”

“It makes sense though,” said Jamie, “I mean if you stop and think about it.”

“How do you figure?” asked Bill.

“Well, first of all, Tiberius wants to stick it to Mayor Lucas, or at least thumb his nose at the guy’s ghost. Lucas loved the idea of elevating the young people on the island into positions of power. So Tiberius puts one of the worst possible kids in power. Just as an insult to everything Lucas stood for. Second, we know Tiberius was keeping tabs on anybody connected to Theo and he has it in for Bill. Is it much of a stretch to think he found out about the fight between Bill and Bertier’s people? I guess what I’m saying is that moron isn’t in that position for any reason but to make a point to all of us.”

“Makes a lot of sense, unfortunately,” said Kylee.

“You’re worried about Theo, aren’t you?” asked Bill.

“Of course. He’s alone right now… I know you’ve been in that position, Bill, but—”

“It’s different. I was never really anybody’s focus. Theo… he’s a target. But it doesn’t matter. We’re going to get him out of there. It falls to us now, you know.”

“I do,” she said. “He’s trusting us to do the right thing.”

“So we will,” said Ryan.

“It’s going to be tomorrow, is it not?” asked Joseph.

“Yes, tomorrow night,” said Kylee. “I think we all need to go get some serious sleep.”

They walked back toward the house, following the armed women. Kylee looked at Ryan. “What is it, Ry?”

“Michelle. I need to know that she’ll be safe.”

“She’ll be safe, Ry. As safe as we can make her.”

“She really did it. Played her part.”

“Yup. She did it.”

They walked back into the house to begin the impossible task of getting sleep the night before a war.

“If I may,” said Andrew, “I’ve got a suggestion. It might be crazy… I don’t know.”

“Okay,” said Theo, “What have you got?”

“Well, what do you think about a Trojan Horse?”

“Smuggle our army inside?” asked Bill.

“The army is already inside,” said Andrew. “All we need to smuggle in is a… catalyst. Someone to rally the troops and organize the uprising.”

“Who can we afford to send?” asked Kylee.

“Simple,” said Theo. “You send me.”

“What? We can’t!”

“Kylee, it makes the most sense. You’re the one who leads the army. I don’t know the first thing about organizing troops for combat. For whatever crazy reason it seems like people like to listen to me talk against Tiberius. If that’s what I’m good at, that’s what I should do. I need to get into that prison. I’ll organize the prisoners, and start a riot.”

“Okay,” Kylee said, “Let’s say that I agreed with your plan, and I’m not sure I do. How do we get you inside?”

“I don’t know,” said Theo.

“We need someone to turn him in,” said Liz. “Doesn’t that make sense?”

“It does,” said Theo.

“I’ll do it,” said Michelle.

All eyes turned to look at her. “Tiberius’s forces trust me. They don’t know that I’m here with all of you. Let me do this. I’ll go back to the city and get in to see Tiberius. I’ll say that I was spying on you.”

“How do we know you aren’t?” asked Ryan.

“Ry, please,” she said. “I’m sorry for everything I’ve said and done. I’ve been so scared every day since the Event. I’m just not as capable as the rest of you at dealing with all of this insanity. But I’m trying. If I was a spy, I wouldn’t be planning with you and giving you a chance to develop a strategy. I would have turned you all in without any notice. That’s not what this is.”

“Okay,” said Theo. “Michelle will leak the information about the hideout.”

“Doesn’t that endanger all of us?” asked Jamie.

“I don’t think so,” said Theo. “Tiberius wants me.”

“Will we have to move everybody to a new safe house?” asked Brian.

“It won’t be necessary,” said Theo. “Whenever this goes down… when I get arrested, that’s the start of a countdown. The following evening is when the war has to begin.”

Kylee looked at him. Her eyes were sad and worried. “But… what if we fail? Tiberius will have you. He’ll kill you.”

Theo returned her gaze, serious as he could be. “If we fail he’d have me anyway to do whatever he wanted. I’m the symbol of this rebellion. But you, Kylee, all of you, you are the spirit. And that’s something he can’t crush. You’ll do what you have to do. I know you will.”

The next afternoon, Kylee stood outside the safe house. Her army surrounded her. Some of the women had made the decision to stay back with the children. She couldn’t blame them, and they needed someone to be with the kids if… she didn’t want to think of the worst-case scenario.

That left her with twenty-four of the women whose husbands were locked up with Theo. Plus eight more for the inner circle, including her. Brian’s surveillance and Liz’s gossiping among the city residents had reported that at least fifty men were locked up in the makeshift island prison.

She smiled, thinking how Tiberius had thought only to lock up the men. He didn’t consider the women a threat to his power. He was going to find out just how wrong he was.

She cleared her throat and looked at her army. She had to speak now. As the general it was her responsibility to inspire and motivate the troops. If only she could come up with the right words. Her mind raced, filled with fear and excitement for the night ahead.

She took two deep breaths, letting the oxygen permeate the blood in her brain. The salt fragrance in the air soothed her. “This… this is the day we have been waiting for. When the Event happened, we all found ourselves in a spiral of confusion and loss of control. We lost our homes, our friends, our families, only to be granted new lives here on the island. Then what happened? Those new lives were stripped from us. Taken away by a madman. A murderer, who thinks that we shouldn’t have the power to decide for ourselves what is best for our lives. A man who thinks that the founding fathers of the United States were wrong. Well, I don’t have to tell you what I think. Tiberius is wrong. Tiberius is the evil that ruins this island.

“Well, no more! At dusk, we begin a march to the city, and we take back our lives for ourselves. Officer Carlos Menendez, a friend, is waiting for our arrival. He believes that many of his fellow officers will abandon the Security Force and join us in our cause. That doesn’t mean that there won’t be opposition. I expect there to be plenty. I’ve trained you to the best of my ability, teaching you the same lessons that were taught to the recruits of the Security Force. Use those lessons. Use your brains. Listen to commands. We don’t know for sure what we will face, but I know for sure that we can and will overcome any obstacle placed in our path. Our goal is simple. We take the prison. Those of you who are assigned to distribute arms to the prisoners know who you are. And then, with our army at its peak, we take the Palace, and we put Paul Tiberius out to pasture.”

She walked away from the cheering crowd, desperate for a chance to clear her thoughts. She couldn’t help but sigh as she heard footsteps rapidly approaching. Jane was jogging up behind her.

“Kylee, can I talk to you for a second?”

“Sure,” Kylee said. “Everything okay?”

Jane croaked out a laugh. “Everything’s okay in the sense that we’re all gonna go fight a war as if we were a bunch of soldiers.”

“You are soldiers, Jane. As much as anybody else here. You think the Security Force is full of US military veterans? Some police, maybe, but for the most part they were just average people who got some training and now find themselves on the wrong side of history. You are ready for this.”

“Hmm. Maybe you’ve got a point. That’s kinda what I wanted to talk to you about.”

“Go on.”

“When all this is finished, if we win—”

“When we win.”

Jane laughed. “Right. When we win, well, the girls and I were talking. There’s more than a few people who would like to see you and Theo officially in charge. Supreme Leaders or something like that.”

Kylee smiled and shook her head. “No. That’s what we are trying to do away with here. That kind of power shouldn’t belong to any one or two people. It belongs to all the people. Sam Lucas wanted there to be elections, even if it meant he might lose. I think that’s how we have to handle things. Between you and me, Theo can probably be convinced to run.”

“That might be a good idea,” Jane said. “Alright. I’ll leave you to your thoughts. We’re gonna be partying all night long, after all.”

She got up and walked away. Just before she turned toward the house, Jane looked back over her shoulder. “Hey, Kylee?” she called.

Kylee looked up. “Yes?”

“I’m proud to be fighting for you. With you. I want you to know that.”

Kylee felt tears in the corners of her eyes. She nodded.

Sundown arrived faster than Kylee had anticipated. She had expected to feel a sense of foreboding. Perhaps she would become paralyzed by fear and responsibility. Instead, she felt nothing but a sense of purpose. This was the single most important day of her life. She was sure of it.

She stepped outside of the safe house. When her feet hit the sandy, broken asphalt, she turned and looked back. This place had been home, one of several homes she had known and lost since the Event. She couldn’t say whether she would be back here again. What was certain was she would never live here again. When the war was over, she would either be dead, imprisoned, or free to pursue life with Theo somewhere else on the island. In her mind, she thanked the safe house for the shelter it had provided from storms both natural and manmade. She turned back around and marched onward to an uncertain future.

The rebel army was spread down the length of the small side street. Everyone was armed. Several of the women surrounded the rusty shell of a large SUV. One of the few blessings the army had been granted, the vehicle had been trapped in a garage under tons of debris in a house two blocks down. The leadership had missed it. It wouldn’t have run, even if there had been fuel available on the island. Instead, Ryan and Bill had stripped it down, removing as much weight as possible. Now, it was a giant push cart for transporting supplies. Kylee thought a tank might have been more useful, but she knew they were lucky to have anything.

The inner circle waited near the front of the line. She smiled at them as she approached. She wished Theo could be here with her, but then this was all part of the plan. She just hoped he was safe and would be in good health by the time she was able to meet up with him.

“General Kylee, looks like a beautiful night for fighting. What do you think?” Bill greeted her with a big smile of his own.

“I think you’re right,” she said. “Don’t forget, our goal here is to avoid conflict wherever possible. Many of the Tiberius loyalists are only that way because of fear. I think when we show them that we are willing to take the fight to the leadership, many of them will throw down their guns.”

“I hope you’re right,” said Joseph. “I don’t want to have to kill too many people.”

Bill laughed and slapped Joseph on the back. “Man, am I glad to be on your side, Joey!”

Joseph gave him a look of exasperation.

“Does anybody have any idea where Michelle is?” asked Ryan.

“Brian? Liz? Any idea?” Kylee asked.

“No, sorry,” said Liz. “We know she’s somewhere in the city. She knows she’s supposed to fall in with us once the fighting gets close, if only for her own safety.”

“You hear that, Ry?” asked Kylee. “She knows what she’s supposed to be doing. Don’t worry, we’ll get to her soon enough.”

She addressed the gathered rebels. “Okay, everybody, this is it. We are going to progress down Atlantic Avenue one block at a time. We stop each block until I give the signal that everything is clear. Remember your assignments. We are relying on those of you assigned to guard our sides and rear as we go. I don’t suspect the Security Force will attempt to flank us, especially in the early going, but we don’t have enough soldiers to cover Ventnor Avenue too. We have to keep to Atlantic and prevent incursions from the side streets. Everyone clear on that?”

Plenty of nodding and “Yes Ma’am,” and “We got it!”

Good, Kylee thought. Time to make an impact. “Move out!” she called. She heard the sounds of feet falling into step behind her. Light grunting followed by the rusty creak of the SUV’s wheels told her the wagon was in motion, beginning its slow trip to arm the prisoners and resupply ammo, should that be necessary.

Kylee had debated whether she and the inner circle should be on the front line. There was a risk to the morale of the troops, should any or all of them be injured or killed. Still, she and Theo’s other chosen few felt it necessary to lead by example. Kylee compromised. Should one of them get hit, the others would fall back to provide continued support until that particular skirmish was over. Of course, she secretly planned to stay up front no matter what. She wasn’t about to back away from the fight.

The procession turned onto Atlantic Avenue. Slowly, carefully, they walked to the end of the first block. Kylee raised her hand and heard the footsteps behind her cease followed by a squeal as the SUV came to a stop.

“All clear on the bayside?” They had decided to use the term, even though the bay no longer existed.

“Yes, Ma’am,” came the reply.

“All clear on the oceanside?”

“Yes, Ma’am.”

“Are we clear from the rear?”

“Yes, Ma’am.”

“Okay. All clear. Let’s keep moving.”

Chapter 27

Theo awoke as the sun came pouring through the curtainless window. He rubbed his eyes and looked around, momentarily confused by his surroundings and his vantage point looking up from the mattress on the floor. He saw the other men sleeping around the room and realization set in. He was imprisoned in an old hotel, a high-profile grab for the leadership to brag about.

He rolled up to a sitting position and pulled his knees in to his chest. The three men he was trapped with were all older than him. He judged them to be in their later twenties or early thirties, though he had never been good at guessing ages.

These were likely husbands or maybe boyfriends of some of the women he had come to know during the course of his hiding at the safe house. If he was going to unite the prisoners and instigate an uprising, he had to start his effort with these men.

He sat silently for a while, thinking about Kylee and his friends. They would undoubtedly be putting plans in motion to start the assault that very evening. That didn’t give him a tremendous amount of time to act, but he wasn’t about to begin by waking up the other prisoners. There were few ways more guaranteed to get you on a man’s bad side than by waking him up earlier than he planned.

Finally, one of the men turned and grunted. Theo watched him carefully. This was the man who had slept through Theo’s arrival. He was the largest of the men and he was black. The other two were white, or maybe Hispanic. Theo couldn’t really tell. The man slowly rose from his deep slumber. His eyes grew wide when he saw Theo sitting across the room from him. “Whuzzat… who… who are you?”

“I’m Theo Essex… I was thrown in here with you last night.”

The man laughed. “Essex, huh? You and everybody else in this place.”

“I don’t follow,” Theo said.

The man studied him as if he was examining a curious slide under a microscope.

“Wait a minute,” he said, “you’re really him, aren’t you? Theo Essex. Damn.”

“You’ve heard of me?”

The man laughed. It was a warm sound, welcoming in the chilly room. “Of course. You’re the guy the Supreme Leader wants dead. Every guy in this place has claimed to be you or to be friends with you, just to piss off the guards. Man, never thought I’d be the one to be talking to the real deal. Name’s Tony.”

Theo was struck by recognition. “Tony? Is your wife’s name Jane?”

The man’s jaw dropped. “You know Janie? You’ve seen her? Is she okay?”

“She’s fine. My friends and I would all be dead by now if it hadn’t been for Jane. She kept us all safe in the house where she was sent when you were arrested. It never occurred to me that you might be her husband.”

Tony laughed. “Why? Because I’m black and she’s white? All kinds of crazy things happening on this island.”

Theo smiled. “No, not that at all. I just never expected to meet you. To me you’re a pretty mythical name too.”

“That’s great,” said Tony. Suddenly, he frowned as a thought dawned on him. “Wait… if you’re here, we’re all in big trouble, aren’t we?”

“Well, that’s what I was hoping to talk to you about. And those other guys. I just didn’t want to wake them.”

“Hell with that, man. Hey, Wes, Jason, get your lazy butts up! We’ve got a visitor.”

The men Tony called Wes and Jason cursed him off, but got up just the same. They had seen Theo’s arrival last night, and curiosity was motivating them to find out just what was so exciting.

“Boys,” said Tony, “This here, believe it or not, is Theo Essex. The one and only.”

“Really?” asked the man to Theo’s left. “I expected more.”

Theo felt a pang of concern. How was he going to inspire these men to listen to him? Then the man smiled. “I’m just joking. I’m Wes. That over there is Jason. I take it you already know Tony.”

“Yes,” said Theo. He stood up, hoping that raising himself above the others would subconsciously convey a sense of authority. “I know why you are all here, and it’s really no different than why I’m here. We all made the mistake of upsetting Tiberius. What I don’t have is the luxury of time. Tiberius wants to publicly execute me, to keep others from following in your footsteps.”

“Jeez, you sure?” asked Jason.

“Pretty sure, yes. But here’s the thing: I have it on good authority that there’s a force coming to free all of us and to move against Tiberius. There’s a war starting tonight, but it will take all of us to make a difference, and they won’t be able to get us out if we don’t do our part from the inside.”

The men looked skeptical. “Pretty much every man who said he didn’t like Tiberius’s hair color is locked up in here,” said Wes. “What kind of an army could there possibly be?”

Theo had to smile. “You all have wives or girlfriends?” Wes and Jason nodded. “That’s my army. All the women you were forced to leave behind. Oh, and they are being led by my girlfriend.”

There was an incredibly awkward silence. Then the men burst into laughter. Tony looked like he was going to have a heart attack, he was laughing so hard.

“Our…wives!” he managed, “Our wives and your girlfriend…gonna lead a war!” Theo remained calm. Gradually, the men saw how serious his face was and the truth hit them. “Oh, hell,” said Tony. “You’re serious.”

“I wish I wasn’t,” said Theo. “I know how much that scares you. I’m scared every second that I stop and think of what Kylee is going to be getting herself into. But they are coming, whether we want to protect them or not. The best we can do for them is help them from our end.”

“But we have no weapons!” said Jason. “How are we supposed to fight?”

“As best we can,” said Theo. “The rebels are bringing plenty of firepower, enough for every prisoner. But they won’t be able to get to us without our help. There’s too much of the Security Force consolidated in the prison.”

“So what do you want us to do?” asked Wes.

“We are going to create a distraction. A riot. Disarm and defeat as many soldiers as we can, but mainly keep them so focused on us that they can’t organize a defense against the rebels.”

“And you think that four of us can make that kind of a distraction?” asked Tony. “How do you know they won’t just kill us and go to dinner?”

“I don’t think they’d be so quick to kill me or anyone involved with me, if they can help it,” Theo said. “That wouldn’t give Tiberius the show he’s craving. But more important than that, I wasn’t planning on it being just the four of us. We need to get everybody here involved. Do you have any ideas?”

Jason stood up. Theo could tell the man’s mind was working and his enthusiasm was growing. “The only time we see everybody is at lunch downstairs. There’s going to be a ton of guards in the place. We’ll have to rely on whisper-down-the-lane and hope that when you give a signal everybody will jump up.”

“That could work,” Theo said. “It’s a little more of a risk than I’d like to take, but we really are working with very limiting constraints. This has to happen tonight. So we will spread word around at lunch.”

“What do you want to tell people to do?” asked Wes.

“How do you get the guards to come to your room?” Theo asked.

“Sit right there and I’ll learn you a couple things, new guy.”

Jason walked over to the entrance to the room. A little button that resembled a doorbell was next to the heavy metal door. He pushed the button and stepped back, waiting. A minute later, the locks turned in the door, and it opened to reveal a masked Security Force agent, gun in hand.

“What?” asked the agent. “You know it’s not time for breakfast. This better be good.”

“I just wanted to see if you’d been washing yourself properly,” Jason said. He made a show of sniffing the air. “Nope, you still stink.”

The guard stepped forward and in one smooth motion jabbed the butt of his gun into Jason’s stomach. Jason fell to his knees gasping for air.

“That’s what you get, funny man. Leave me alone unless it’s something important. You got me?”

He slammed the door and Theo heard the locks turn back into place. He ran over to Jason who was still holding his stomach. Jason looked up at him and smiled. “And that’s the way it’s done.”

Theo was shocked and impressed by the man’s enthusiasm and lack of fear. He supposed that a little time spent locked up with all of one’s rights stripped away could harden a person. “Okay,” he said, “are all the prisoners in shared rooms like this?”

“Absolutely,” said Wes. “The leadership wasn’t about to treat us to our own private spaces. It’s three or four to a room all around, from what I’ve heard.”

“That works. Here’s what we have to do: Spread the word at lunch that one minute after dinner is served to the rooms, each room hits the button to bring a guard. Now of course, they don’t have enough guards for each room, but that’s fine. The important thing is every single guard on the floors for “political prisoners” will go to a room. It’s the job of the prisoners in that room to grab the guard and disable him. I know that’s a big risk, but it’s the way we have to do this. Those prisoners have to let the others out.”

“I think this might be crazy enough to work,” said Tony. “What do we do then?”

“Then we head to the stairs and fight any remaining Security Force guards on our way to the entrance. By then they will know that Kylee and the rebels are nearby, even if they haven’t quite arrived yet. We have to hold off guards until the rebels arrive. At that point, the responsibility to get us out of there falls to our army, and your next orders should come from Kylee.”

Theo walked into the prison cafeteria. It had once been some kind of restaurant in the building’s former existence as a hotel. What fascinated Theo about everything he had seen so far in the prison was how quickly the Security Force had been able to get the building secure. With limited resources and a very small talent pool, Tiberius had been able to create a very tightly controlled facility. The halls were all lined with concrete, and special, massive doors separated segments of the building. Guards patrolled every nook and cranny of the place. The restaurant had been stripped bare. In place of the booths and tables that had once filled the room, a series of metal picnic tables has been erected.

Men sat quietly at the various tables or waited in line for food. Theo saw to his surprise that the prison rations were not very different from those provided to everybody on the island, or at least the people outside the city. Baked rolls and simple vegetables were on offer. Theo thought again about the suspicions he and his friends shared about Tiberius’s advanced knowledge of the hurricane. If the leadership hadn’t known it was coming, how did they know to make sure to harvest crops from the farms before they were destroyed in the flooding?

Too late to worry about that now, he thought. Theo waited in line with the other men from his room. The four of them knew what they had to do: get every man in the room on board with the plan for the evening. The plan itself was full of potential risk and room for slipups. Theo had to convince people that the risks were worth taking, and he had to hope that Tony, Wes and Jason could do the same.

He kept an eye on the other men throughout the meal, as he talked to the five at his table. He could feel the guards who surrounded the room watching him, though it was impossible to tell under what Bill called the “death masks,” black glass and carbon fiber helmets shaped like a cross between the head of a robot and a skeleton. Theo tried to concentrate on the conversation. He had not been sure he would be given an opportunity to speak, but that proved not to be a problem. Somehow, word had spread about the arrival of the mysterious Theo Essex, the teenager who had resisted Tiberius. The men at his table looked at him in a way he imagined celebrities would recognize immediately.

The men saw him as the one who would save them, and Theo used that to his advantage, carefully firing the men up for the night’s uprising. When he had finished giving what he thought was a fairly inspirational speech, he sat back and waited to see how the men would respond.

“You’re telling me that my wife is going to war with Tiberius tonight?” one asked.

“Yes, that’s probably right,” Theo said.

“Well if she can be brave enough for this, so can I. I’m in, Theo.”

The other men shared similar assent. Now came the important part. “I need you guys to go sit elsewhere. Pretend you don’t want to have to sit with the new kid. Spread around the room and tell everyone what I told you. This is our one chance to share the plan.”

The men listened, jumping up from the table. One yelled out, “Fine, new kid, see how you like sitting by yourself!” Theo saw the guards move their hands to their guns, watching the men carefully, but the men simply went to new tables, sitting all around the room. Theo made eye contact with Tony and they nodded at each other. The word was moving around the room. Tonight, the wrongfully jailed citizens of Atlantic Island would fight back.

Theo finished his lunch in silence. In the back of his mind it occurred to him that this might be the last meal he would be able to eat for a while, possibly forever. If so, he was going to enjoy every bite as best he could. He hoped Kylee and his friends were enjoying their meals and not worrying too much about the rebellion. Worry would do nobody any good. This had to happen. Whether it succeeded or not was not for him to decide. He would simply do the very best he could.

Chapter 28

Kylee knew things were going too well. The rebels had progressed past ten streets without so much as a stray animal running by, not that many animals were left alive on the island. She felt her confidence in herself and the mission growing with each cleared block. And yet, a voice in the back of her mind said, this is all too easy. It can’t possibly continue this way.

And so it was that when the sniper fired the first shot of the war and dropped one of her soldiers to the ground, that voice spoke behind the panic. Told you so.

The sniper’s gun made no sound, at least not one that could be heard over the marching feet and squeaking SUV wheels. Kylee only knew something had happened when the women around the victim of the shot screamed.

“Sniper!” someone yelled.

Kylee snapped into action. “Spread between the buildings! Off the streets! Everybody, now!”

The rebels disbursed quickly, ducking for cover. Suddenly, a noise from the side of the supply wagon. A bullet had missed one of the women surrounding the vehicle and embedded itself in the rusty metal side. Kylee pointed toward the side of the street from which she now knew the bullet had been fired. Bill and Joseph, the only part of the inner circle still near her, both nodded and bolted in that direction. Kylee followed them, watching as she went to make sure the army was properly covered.

She hated leaving their supplies out in the open, but she knew that despite the attack from either a roof or maybe a second story window, there was no way for the enemy to get to them by the streets. The rebels still had all directions covered. Kylee was proud as she saw the women taking positions in the shadows. They were not panicking, despite the loss of one of their own, a friend now lying dead in the middle of the street.

She followed Bill and Joseph to a partially demolished store on the edge of the circle Tiberius was clearing. She had been prepared for the bright lights of the demolition zone, fully expecting some kind of reaction from the construction crews as the small army moved past. She had even anticipated that there might be an issue with a Security Force presence in the area.

Kylee realized she hadn’t known they were approaching the construction zone because the spotlights were turned off. The crews were not working. Was it possible that Tiberius had anticipated their attack? It seemed unlikely. If he had, they would have faced the full Security Force and their problems would be infinitely more complicated. This was some kind of unfortunate coincidence.

The back door to the remaining half of the shop was wide open. She motioned silently to Bill and Joseph. They checked inside the door and Bill flashed her an “okay” gesture. She walked past them, her M16 at the ready.

Something was very wrong with this situation. A woman was dead because Kylee hadn’t anticipated that the demolition zone would be shut down for the night. She was ashamed that she didn’t even know which woman it had been. Why would Tiberius call all the crew and guards off the job site, unless… was it possible that he intended to do something tonight? Something involving Theo, and he didn’t want anybody to miss it. As Kylee led the way up the stairs, she became convinced that she was right. All the more reason to take care of this problem and keep on moving.

On the second floor of the building, only one door was open. Kylee pointed, and Bill and Joseph moved carefully into position on either side of the opening. Bill leaned his head over to peer through the doorway. He pulled back quickly and nodded at Kylee. The sniper was in there. Waiting for the rebels to spread back out into the street.

Kylee pointed to Joseph and at the door. Joseph nodded. The three of them exchanged glances, assuring that all were ready. Joseph made his move. He stepped into the room with his gun pointed.

“Do not move,” Joseph said in his thick accent. Kylee and Bill followed into the room. The sniper had set up his nest by one of the windows. He was frozen in a modified pushup position. He must have been startled and had started to get to his feet when he registered Joseph’s command and stopped.

Kylee approached the sniper. He was wearing his helmet. Theo had been sure the helmets contained some kind of night vision capability, and she was now inclined to agree. “I’m going to ask you turn around. When I do, you will get up and turn to face me, as slowly as possible. I want your hands up behind your head. Do you understand me?”

“Yes, I understand,” came the response, slightly muffled by the helmet.

“Okay. We’re going to do this on three. One. Two.”

The man spun to a seated position. Kylee was caught off-guard and had just enough time to register the pistol in the sniper’s hand. She heard the bang of a gun firing. She looked down, expecting to see a hole in her chest. She saw nothing… felt nothing. She looked back up. The sniper was dead, folded over onto his back. A hole was smashed in the glass over one side of his mask. She looked over at Bill. He had a shocked look on his face, and he pointed toward Joseph.

Joseph’s gun was still drawn. Kylee ran over to him. “Joseph, you saved me!”

Joseph’s face was deadly serious. “He will kill no more of our people.”

“Holy crap,” said Bill in a shocked whisper. “Joey, you are the very definition of badass.”

“We need to get back out to the street and keep moving,” Kylee said. She was determined not to let the others see just how much this situation had upset her. The death of one of her soldiers, and her own near-death experience had thrown her mind into a spin. She had to maintain focus and control. Had to get back on the road, moving block by block toward Theo.

She led the way to the door. As she crossed the threshold, the sniper’s radio crackled. “Nestor, come in. This is Supreme Leader Tiberius. Your superiors told me you reported rebel troop movements?”

Kylee looked at Bill and Joseph. “Bill, this has to be you.”

Bill smiled. “Alright, you’ll get exactly what you want. Brace yourselves, I’m about to show you my Nestor.”

He walked over to Nestor’s body with caution, as if he expected the dead man to rise up and grab him.

“Nestor,” Tiberius called again amidst the static on the radio, “Nestor, do you read me?”

Bill leaned down over Nestor and took the radio. He took a deep breath. Pressing the button he said, “This is Nestor, oh Supreme Leader.”

“Good. Nestor, you said there was troop movement?”

“I was mistaken, Supreme Leader. Only two of the rebels. I shot and killed one, the other ran away. I think I was fooled by shadows.”

Silence. Bill looked up to Kylee for approval. She gave him a thumbs up.

“Very well,” Tiberius said. He sounded disappointed. “Congratulations on your kill. You have done a great service for your country and I will instruct your commander to award you proper honors.”

“Thank you, sir. Have a glorious night.”

Bill dropped the radio and walked over to the door. “How did I do?”

Kylee smiled. “You did great, Bill. Let’s get back to the others.”

They walked back down to the ground level and made their way back out on Atlantic Avenue. Kylee looked at the sky. The sun of a universe to which they did not belong was low on the horizon. She guessed there was only maybe an hour before they would be plunged into total darkness. She knew there was not much time for them to connect with Carlos Menendez and assault the prison.

She signaled to the rebels hiding around the street. They emerged from every possible hiding place, and moved to the center of the road, where the fallen woman lay in a puddle of dark blood. A woman named Debra checked the body and looked up at Kylee. “It’s Helen,” Debra said, tears in her eyes.

Kylee flashed back to her few conversations with Helen. Her time training with her in the street outside the safe house. A friendly face, one of many that had provided her and her friends with food and shelter. Now a face that stared blankly at the darkening sky. How many more friendly faces would she lose? How many more would die for this cause?

Kylee walked over to Helen’s body. She put her hand on Debra’s shoulder. “I’ll take care of it from here. She knelt down and scooped up Helen’s body. Kylee carried the body to the side of the road and placed it gently on the ground. She closed the vacant eyes with her fingers.

“She will be hidden well enough here for now,” she said to her army. “When we are victorious, we will return and bury our dead.” As soon as the words were out of her mouth, she regretted the connotation. Her words held the implication that Helen would not be the only one buried at the conclusion of this conflict.

Kylee worked her way back to the front of the line. Ryan and Jamie approached as she neared the head of the group.

“Kylee,” Ryan said, “we have an idea.”

“Okay, Ry, what is it?”

“We’re about to go through the demolition zone, right? Well, it’s possible there are other traps arranged for us.”

“I agree,” Kylee said, “so how do you want to handle it?”

“What if we go down by the beach?”

She was confused. “The beach? Ry, it’s going to be hard to maneuver the SUV onto the boardwalk, and there are supposedly guards around the camp of the people who got evicted from their…oh.”

Ryan smiled. “Exactly. Who better to recruit for our army than the people who have been dumped into tents on the beach?”

“Okay,” she said. Kylee’s brain was on maximum throttle, cooking up strategy for an attack. She called Brian and Liz to her.

“What’s up, Kylee?” asked Liz.

“I need to know an estimate of the typical security on the beach camp.”

Liz turned to Brian. “What do you think? Five to ten?”

Brian scratched his chin. “Yeah. I’d say closer to ten, but we don’t know what exactly is going on tonight.”

“That’s fine.” She turned to address the rebels. “We’re going to take a little detour, people, and it’s probably going to be an ugly one. We’re going to take over the beach camp, and recruit the people living there. We anticipate a little resistance from the Security Force. You know what I expect. Listen carefully to my orders. Be aware of your surroundings. I don’t want losses if we can avoid them. And watch out for innocents.

“Those of you in charge of the SUV, you’re going to have to bring up the rear along the boardwalk. Stay back and out of the conflict as long as you can until we give you the all-clear. The rest I’m going to divide as you walk past me. We are going to travel down four access points to the beach at once. Remember that these aren’t full side streets any longer because of the demolition. Be careful to keep to the shadows until we are all at the boardwalk. Watch your backs. Let’s go.”

They fell into position in accordance with Kylee’s orders. This, then, was what Theo had told her about. The funny feeling of disbelief he got every time people responded positively and with respect to his decisions. She was seeing that now. Somehow, a teenaged girl with some Security Force training was now the general of the rebel army, and they treated her as such.

She divided the army into different groups, assigning them various approaches to the beach. She sent some of her inner circle with each group, keeping Joseph with her. There was a power to him, a violence that she had not realized was there. She had a hunch that it would be harder for him to transform to Mr. Hyde if he was standing next to Andrew. Dividing them was the more prudent tactic.

She led Joseph and five of the women up the closest of the approaches. The beach was littered with tents. Campfires provided flickering views of the encampment. Kylee thought her army probably had the advantage of numbers over whatever brigade of the Security Force was present. With their high-tech helmets, the Force had the advantage of sight. They would be able to pick her troops out of the darkness as soon as they came around any kind of barrier. The attack would have to be swift.

The rebels knew that her group would take the first shot. At that point, she expected the other guards to reveal themselves. Then she would see what her army was made of. On her stomach, she crawled to the edge of the boardwalk and studied the beach.

She could make out six guards around the perimeter of the camp. There might be others mixed in among the tents or far enough away for her not to be able to identify their black attire. She would have to do what she could and hope for the best.

She signaled her group. They all lined up on their stomachs on the cool wood. Her mind flashed briefly to a time long ago when she had fallen to the boards not terribly far from here with Theo. That night had changed them all. It was easy to think that the Event had transformed the potential life she and Theo would have otherwise had together, but Kylee was not so naïve. In another lifetime, in literally another world, she and Theo would have gone their separate ways after a summer of fun. Now, she had seen what it was like to be an adult. To live with Theo, to fall in love with him in a deep, meaningful way. It was hard to be thankful for anything that came from the Event, but in a way she was.

“We are ready for your signal, Kylee,” said Joseph.

She pulled her head up and made eye contact with her whole team. All eyes were on her. She pointed from each woman to a guard on the beach and made sure each understood who her particular target was going to be. She gave Joseph his assignment last. She was only targeting three of the guards. To aim for any more, any farther away, would be foolish. This way she could feel more confident at the odds of a kill, and leave her soldiers with the thought that maybe it wasn’t his or her bullet that connected.

She lined up her aim. She took three deep breaths, steadying herself. “Now!” she cried, and fired.

Chapter 29

Theo returned to his room after lunch and stood by the window. He looked out at the city. The city and the island on which it stood belonged to a maniac. Come nightfall, he would hope to change all that. It was a hard thing for him to imagine, given his current state of imprisonment.

The more Theo thought, the more his nerves began to get the better of him. He paced around the room, drawing concerned looks from his cellmates. What was he thinking, putting Kylee in this situation? Not just Kylee, but Bill and Ryan, his closest friends. Jamie, the rest of the inner circle, all those brave women who had provided him with a home. He had forced a play that could get everyone killed.

He couldn’t be sure what was going to happen tonight, but he didn’t see a pleasant evening under any circumstances. He saw a possibility where he was killed by a guard, a possibility where Tiberius discovered the rebel attack and expedited his execution, and a possibility where he was freed from this place only to enter a war.

When he had paced around the entire room fifteen times, Theo finally collapsed on his mattress. Excitement and anticipation had often made it impossible for him to sleep. This was different. This was the opposite, really. Fear and dread were triggering a deep-rooted, primitive impulse to protect himself by curling up in a ball and going to sleep. He was exhausted.

Theo lay on the mattress and closed his eyes. Maybe a little rest would help clear his mind for whatever frightening experiences awaited him this evening. He turned to his side and drifted into a hypnogogic dream state, neither completely asleep nor completely awake.

In his dream, he sat up on the dirty mattress and looked around the room. It was empty. Tony, Wes, Jason and their respective mattresses were gone. Standing in front of the large window was Sam Lucas.

Theo jumped to his feet. “Mayor Lucas, how—”

Lucas laughed, the warm chuckle that Theo missed so much. “Ah, Theo. I regret to say that I don’t think I’m the mayor anymore. You can call me Sam.”

“But Mayor…Sam, how can you be here?”

“How can any of us be here, Theo? Trapped on an island, lost in a strange universe, my gosh, it’s the stuff we used to go see at the movies.” Lucas walked over to him. “Why don’t we sit here and you can tell me what’s on your mind.”

He pulled on Theo’s arm. Theo had expected Lucas’s hand to pass right through him, but the grip felt as real and as strong as ever. Lucas pulled Theo down to a sitting position on the mattress, except it wasn’t a mattress anymore. It was a plush couch, like the ones in the Mayor’s suite in the Palace.

“You’ve been busy since I’ve been gone,” Lucas said.

Theo nodded. “Tiberius has been hunting me. He’s killing people, imprisoning innocents. He’s out of control.”

“I know. Paul has nobody keeping him in check anymore. He’s free to impose his will however he wants. But then, of course, you’re not going to let him, are you, Theo?”

“I’m trying, sir… Sam. My friends and I. We organized a group… we call ourselves rebels. We found weapons and they are going to attack this prison tonight.”

“I know all about it, Theo. I’ve been watching you. You’ve never shirked your responsibilities nor shied away from the challenges placed before you.” Lucas wiped away a tear forming at the corner of one eye. “You make me very proud, Theo.”

“Thank you, sir.” Theo said. He hesitated before saying, “I’m scared.”

“You should be scared,” said Lucas. “You’re facing huge obstacles. But remember this, Theo, those emotions: fear, worry, care, they ground you and make you human. Paul has forgotten that. That’s why you’ll be a much better leader than him, when all this settles.”

“I… I don’t have any plans to be the leader! I want to let the people decide.”

Lucas slapped Theo gently on the back. “Precisely. They will choose you, Theo. I always knew they would. It’s what I was grooming you for all those months we met together.”

“I don’t understand.”

“I told you my plan was always going to be to reinstate public elections. Now, I didn’t know if you’d be ready the first go-round, but eventually, you would be my natural successor, Theo. Someone with young ideas but a mature sense of purpose, grounded in compassion and true concern for all the people of this island.”

Lucas stood up and began to walk toward the window.

“But… Sam,” Theo began, “I’m just a kid. How can I fight a war?”

Lucas turned to him, no sign of a smile on his face now. “You are no ‘kid,’” he said. “You are the finest young man I have ever had the pleasure to know. You may not be a military mind, but that’s okay. You’ve found a natural general in Kylee. Let her move the troops. You, my friend, are the rallying point. The symbol of hope for the people of Atlantic Island. This war is the people’s war. There is only one battle that you must fight alone.”

“Tiberius,” Theo said. “But, Sam, he’s strong…like supernaturally strong. How can I hope to fight him?”

“If your enemy is too strong, you don’t defeat him with strength. Paul may be strong and quick but he always sees things one way. Use your mind, Theo. Think outside the box. It won’t be easy, but I know that in the end you’ll be the one victorious.”

Lucas was standing back by the window. Theo started to feel his mind slipping, as his body worked its way back to an awake state. “Wait,” he called. “Sam… will I ever see you again?”

Lucas smiled. “I’ll be with you. And remember, there are always other worlds.”

With that, Lucas vanished, and Theo felt his mind race back to the land of the living. He sat up on the mattress and looked around the room. The view through the window told him that the sun was just beginning to set.

“Get your nap in?” asked Tony. “You were talkin’ something fierce for a while there. Must have been some crazy dreams.”

“Must have been.” Theo scratched his head. Had it been a dream? It felt much more realistic than any dream he’d ever experienced. Still, it had the trappings of a dream. Already the memory was starting to fade, as memories of dreams always do.

“Well,” said Jason, “I hope you got your sleep in. Countdown to war is almost over, baby.”

Theo knew this was true, though he had a hunch that somewhere else on the island the war had already begun. This was only his part of the play, but he knew it was an important role and he would see it through.

He stood up. “You guys know what you have to do?”

“Of course,” said Wes. “Beat the hell out of the guard who delivers our dinner, get his weapon and his key. Lock him up. Join the fighting. Oh, and try not to pass out from panic. That about cover it?”

“That should do it.” Theo was pleased. He could trust these guys to do what they had to do. He hoped the other prisoners would fight as hard. There were maybe ten rooms of political prisoners, according to what he’d gleaned in brief conversations in the cafeteria. The rest of the prisoners, maybe another hundred people, were in for a variety of other reasons. He hoped that those people could be trusted. He knew some of them were actually criminals and would have to go back to jail after the fighting was over, and now they would know how to create a riot in this prison.

Well, Theo thought, that was a problem for another time, should he be so lucky as to survive what was coming. After that, the men didn’t speak. Instead, they watched the view out the window as the sun dipped lower in the sky. Theo knew they were all thinking the same thing. This could easily be the last sunset any of them would ever see. They waited, like nervous actors at an audition, waiting for the signal to go up on stage.

Theo thought again of Kylee and the rebel army. Were they engaged in fighting at that very moment? Could she really lead a ragtag band of teenagers, senior citizens and housewives against the fearsome power of the Security Force? If anyone could do it, Theo thought, it was Kylee. From the time she had saved him on the boardwalk during the Event, she had never stopped impressing him with her confidence, her inherent survival skills and her quiet power. Theo had discovered to his surprise that he could lead and inspire people with rousing speeches. Kylee could do it just by her very presence.

The sound of the first lock turning in the door broke his train of thought and snapped him to attention. This was it, then, do or die. Theo had made sure that along with the instructions that had passed around the cafeteria came one urgent warning: silence was key! If guards down the hall heard another guard being attacked, they would all rush one room instead of going to their own assigned rooms, as was the plan.

The door opened slightly, just as expected, and several stacked trays of food were placed on the floor. The door slammed shut in a hurry. The locks turned again, sealing the four men in the room. Theo made eye contact with the other men and they moved swiftly to formation. Theo and Tony stood facing the door a few feet into the room, while Jason and Wes took positions on either side. Jason pressed the small button and waited for the guard to return.

The locks turned until all were open. The door opened a crack. Just as planned, Wes grabbed the edge of the door and pulled it in, much faster than the guard had anticipated. The guard took a stumble step forward, and Jason grabbed the sleeve of the black uniform and tugged. Now the guard fell forward, and Theo and Tony were on him in a flash, pinning him to the ground.

As Theo moved his knees onto the guard’s chest, Wes went for the man’s gun while Jason went for the keys. Tony pulled off the “death mask” and drove it down on the guard’s exposed head, just as the man was starting to scream for help. The guard went instantly unconscious.

Tony shuddered. “I didn’t like having to do that.”

Theo put his hand on Tony’s shoulder. “He’s still alive. Probably just going to have a really bad headache for a while. He gets a chance to decide which side he wants to be on. Now let’s get moving. This is just getting started.”

Theo cautiously poked his head into the hallway. He didn’t see anybody, but several doors were open. It seemed the plan was working. “Okay,” he said. “Let’s go.”

They exited the room. Theo looked back through the doorway. The others had moved the guard onto one of the mattresses. That, he thought, is what separates us from them. That is why we can win this.

He said his goodbyes to the room, just another in a long line of places he had left behind. Wes closed the door and used the keys to turn the locks. “What happens to the guard?” asked Jason. He was pointing the stolen firearm down the hall, looking for signs of the Security Force.

“He takes a night to think about his choices. Tomorrow someone will let him out.” Theo saw the others considering his comment. Someone would certainly be back at the prison by tomorrow. Which side that someone was on remained a matter to be determined.

Just then, he saw other prisoners emerge from doors down the length of the reinforced concrete hall. Tired, shocked faces appeared and Theo waved them over to him. Within a few minutes he had added sixteen more men to his group. They carried a total of five weapons liberated from the Security Force guards. It would have to be enough for now.

“The floor below us should have another twenty men,” he told the group. “We need to meet up with them. Then we work our way toward the exit. I have to believe there’s going to be resistance. Those of you with guns, you need to surround the rest of us.”

Moving in formation, the prisoners travelled down the hall to the stairs at the end. “Be a lot faster to take the elevator, wouldn’t it?” asked one of the men.

“It would split us up,” said Theo. “And if the guards catch on to what we are doing they will stop the elevators and then we’ve got serious problems. Let’s keep moving to the stairs.”

They made the trip down the first flight of stairs in short order. The stairwell was quiet. Either the Security Force didn’t know about the escape attempt, or they were still organizing a response.

On the fourth floor, they met a group of thirteen men, sitting on both sides of the hall. Several of the men had a disturbing amount of blood on their clothes, though none appeared to be injured.

Theo ran to them. “What happened?” he asked, counting the unexpectedly small number as he moved.

“The guards figured out the plan,” one man said quietly. “They came pouring into my room. We fought back but everything was so confusing. They killed everyone in that room but me.”

“What’s your name?” Theo asked the man.

“I’m Dave. Dave Michaels.”

“Dave, where are the guards now?”

Dave turned his palms up. They were covered in blood. “They’re dead. We killed them all.” Then, he burst into tears.

Theo knew that the rest of the men in the room would be watching him, gauging his response to Dave’s emotional outburst. He knelt down. “Dave,” he said, “I want you to listen to me very carefully.” Dave looked up. “You all did what you had to do. I think we are all going to have blood on our hands before this is over. If you didn’t do this, if we don’t keep fighting back, we will all be dead. Every man in this hallway. Your families and friends. Do not think for a second that Tiberius will let what we’ve done here, or what the rebels are doing outside, go unpunished. We’ve made our move, and now we follow this path to wherever it ends.”

Slowly the fourth floor prisoners got to their feet. “What do we do now?” asked Tony.

“We go down to the ground floor and deal with whatever waits for us,” he said. And pray that Kylee is almost here, he thought.

Theo instructed the men to be as silent as possible in the stairwell. As they reached the third floor landing, he heard something. He held up a hand to stop the line of men from descending. Theo listened. There… a footstep on the concrete step somewhere below. He pointed in the direction from which the sound originated, and was about to instruct one of the armed prisoners to take aim, when he heard a gun fire from up above. The bullet whizzed past and lodged in a step below.

Theo heard marching from both above and below. The Security Force had boxed them in. He held out his hand to the man next to him and was handed one of the guns they had removed from the guards. Theo hesitated before speaking but realized there was nothing to lose. “They are coming from both directions,” he called. “I need backup, and I want guns at the top of the line. Now or never, people. Fight!”

He leaned over and saw Security Force agents looking up at him. He fired a quick burst and ducked back as the Force returned fire. Theo was joined by several other men, who continued to exchange volleys with the guards below. He heard shots from above. He smelled gunpowder and could hear screams, some filled with pain, others with aggression.

He saw a Security Force body shoot past down the stairwell and he heard it slam into something down below. Theo knew he had to keep his group moving down to the ground floor. He leaned over again and fired, picking off one of the men below him. He walked down several stairs, registering in the walled-off recesses of his mind the fact that he had taken a life. He was a soldier now, no question about it.

Each fired shot was deafening in the confined space of the stairwell. Theo’s ears were ringing. Still he worked his way down, avoiding shots and firing when he could. There was no way to properly survey the situation down below, but he believed there were only a few guards in each direction. The Security Force had surprised him, but he had a sense that they still underestimated what they were dealing with. Or, perhaps, there was more going on outside the prison.

Passing the second floor, he picked up his pace and heard his men doing the same. The shooting above him had become less frequent. Either the attackers from the higher floors had been incapacitated or they had retreated. The Security Force at the bottom of the staircase had grown quiet as well. Theo didn’t dare lean over to look but he was convinced the Force agents were still lying in wait. This was going to be very difficult.

He gestured and signaled assignments to the nine other weapon-wielding prisoners above and around him. Having the higher ground might be the only advantage they would get. With his men in position, Theo leaned over the rail. He saw flashes of motion below and ducked back without firing. From above him came a chorus of gunfire aimed at the ground. Then all was silent.

Theo ran down the rest of the stairs, his gun at the ready in case there were more agents waiting or reloading. There was nobody left alive at the bottom. A pile of bodies awaited him at the base of the stairs. All but the one agent who had fallen from above were from the lower group that had tried to attack them.

Theo knew how lucky they had been. He was preparing a congratulatory speech when he heard the clump of a body collapsing. He looked up at his men, seeing them clearly for the first time since the fighting began. The group in the middle, forced into hiding while the armed men protected them, looked worn, scared and frightened. Not at all battle-hardened warriors. Several of the prisoners at the top of the group were injured. Worst of all, Theo realized his count was coming up two men short.

“What happened?” he called up.

“We’ve got two down up here,” called one of the men. “They’re dead.”

Chapter 30

Kylee had seen plenty of gun battles on television and in the movies. She had read about them in books, preferring to read novels a shade more violent than those favored by her friends. None of that prepared her for the grisly reality of war.

She fired her gun and heard those around her discharge bullets at the same time. The helmets, fearsome though they appeared, were more for technological superiority than defense against attacks that Tiberius had probably assumed would never come. They proved to be weak spots in the Security Force armor. Two of the three guards dropped instantly with a startling amount of force. The third guard was clipped in the armor protecting his shoulder. He stumbled forward and starting shouting, “We’re under attack! We’re under attack!”

Joseph calmly picked off the screaming guard, silencing his cries. The damage was done. The other guards, alerted to the raid, rushed into action. Kylee heard her soldiers continuing the assault. She dropped to the sand and ran toward the advancing attackers. “Rebels!” she yelled. “Take this camp! No mercy!”

The poor unfortunate people living in the beach camp screamed as they found themselves caught in the middle of two heavily armed groups. The campfires flickered and threw off light in random arcs, making it hard for Kylee to see what was going on. Damn that sniper! His delay had cost them the remaining daylight, and the Security Force could see in the dark.

She saw people running every which way, and saw muzzle flashes to match the noisy bursts that destroyed the tranquility of the beach. She saw bodies fall and knew intuitively that they weren’t all Security Force. She knew she had been an idealistic fool to think her side would make it through unscathed, like some kind of arcade game. This was no shooting gallery. They were taking losses even as they pressed forward and gained an advantage.

Kylee rushed a group of Security Force soldiers, their black suits barely visible in the dim firelight. She fired, taking down one of them, before the others turned toward her. She dove for cover behind a series of tents, seeing the sand tuft up where she had been half a second earlier. The Security Force was hesitant to shoot at the tents because of the civilians hiding there. This made the tents ideal hiding spots, negating the Force’s night vision advantage.

She saw Joseph firing and knew from the lack of return fire that he had taken out his targets. She wondered who he really been in his old life before he was a man in his sixties vacationing at the Jersey Shore. Austrian military maybe? He had never let on, but kind, warm Joseph was a killing machine.

The gunfire continued all around her as she slid down to the end of the clump of tents for a better view. How much of the Security Force was here? The camp had been much better guarded than she had anticipated. She saw several families hunkered down behind the tents. “Stay down,” she said. “We are putting an end to Tiberius tonight.” The people nodded. They were scared but they supported what she was doing. That was enough to reinforce her convictions.

Kylee continued to fire any time she was sure she had Security Force agents in her sights. Shooting went on all around her, gradually diminishing. Was this going to be a total bloodbath, with one side wiping out the other? She regretted that she had yelled “no mercy” in the heat of the moment.

“We surrender!” called out a voice.

“Surrender! Surrender!” called several others. The guns stopped their thundering. Kylee stepped out from behind a tent. She saw four Security Force agents with their hands raised. They had dropped their weapons. She wondered if they had run out of ammo.

She spotted Ryan near one of the surrendering guards. “Ry,” she called, “take his helmet. Scan the scene. I don’t want any surprises.”

Ryan did as he was told, detaching the “death mask” from the nearest guard and placing it on his own head. He panned robotically from side to side, scanning the extent of the beach camp.

“There’s nobody else,” he told Kylee. “These four are all that’s left.”

“Strip their armor and any additional weapons,” she told the rebels. “Cuff them. Jamie, come with me.”

Kylee had a fleeting worry that one of the guards would make some kind of last show of effort, either killing one of them at the expense of his own life, or maybe committing suicide rather than being taken prisoner. Nothing like that happened. That was good. These guards may have done what Tiberius asked, but their loyalty hadn’t reached insane levels.

“What do you want me to do?” asked Jamie.

“Just walk with me. We need to count our losses. Double-check the field before we clean up here.”

Kylee thought if Jamie had pressed her further she would have given some kind of a story about Jamie’s great attention to detail or maybe she would have said something harsh about Jamie needing toughening. The truth was, if she was going to have to find out which of her people she had led to die she wanted her best friend with her for support.

In all, thirty Security Force agents had been guarding the camp. Of those, her rebels had killed twenty-six and taken four as prisoners. The rebels, with less training, less knowledge of the terrain, and poor visibility, had three injuries and no fatalities.

Kylee wondered if she would recognize the faces under the masks from her time at the Security Force headquarters. Probably. Still, these were people who had gone along with Tiberius’s orders no matter how extreme they had become. She knew that Menendez had organized those who would support the rebels back in the city. They wouldn’t be among the dead here.

Kylee ran to the boardwalk and pressed up onto the raised surface with one fluid motion. “Citizens of Atlantic Island, you are safe now. Come here where I can see you.”

Her rebels moved in around her after gathering up the guards’ weapons, except for the few soldiers who were moving the prisoners to the boardwalk. The people living in the camp came out slowly, hesitantly, as if they expected this to be just another Tiberius trick. Gradually, the audience in front of her swelled. Kylee watched, greeting each new arrival with a nod or a smile.

“This battle you found yourselves in the middle of tonight is just the start of what we have planned. You are free for now, but you won’t stay that way if we don’t take further action. The rebels here who have saved your lives are people just like you who were forced out of their homes by Tiberius and the Security Force. Join them. Join us. Help us march on Atlantic City and remove the so-called Supreme Leader from his Palace!”

Kylee didn’t expect that anyone would join. She knew these people were petrified of Tiberius and traumatized by the battle that had been fought around them. Yet a few were moving forward. Twelve men and three women joined her troops on the boardwalk and were handed weapons.

This was a very positive development. Exactly what she needed to be able to continue on to the prison. She hoped Theo was not having too much trouble with his part of the plan. She couldn’t wait to see him again.

Theo found that keeping himself calm for the sake of his men was one of the hardest things he’d ever had to do. With two of their number dead and several bleeding onto the concrete, the men were losing confidence. Theo knew there was bound to be significant opposition in the lobby.

“Guys,” he said, “I promise you we will come back for anybody we’ve lost. By the end of tonight the people of this island will have taken it back from Tiberius. That includes the prison. My friends are coming for us now, and we have to be the distraction that lets them come in guns blazing. If we don’t move now and fight the Security Force down here the rebels won’t have the power to get in and we will die here. Do you understand? We keep on moving.” He hesitated a second to see if anyone would object. Whatever objections or concerns the prisoners had, they kept them to themselves.

Theo waved the men down to the floor, where they took what they could from the guards sprawled on the ground. The door to the lobby had not been modified from the building’s time as a hotel, probably because nobody thought prisoners would get this far. The aluminum door had a small, wire-reinforced glass window. Theo moved his head in front of the window for only a second. He backed against the wall.

“There are Security Force agents running down the hall right now,” he told the prisoners. “Get out of the way of the door. We are going to pick them off as they come in. Won’t get us through everybody but it will thin the ranks a little before we move to the lobby.”

“Like shooting fish in a barrel,” somebody called.

“Something like that,” Theo said.

He moved back in front of the glass and away again, quickly as possible. “They are coming. Guns at the ready. Three, two, one—”

The door slammed open. A procession of armed guards ran in, and the prisoners fired, taking them out one by one. Five guards had entered the stairwell and found death at the hands of Theo’s new troops before the rest caught on and took positions along the sides of the lobby hall.

Theo set up a rotation at the door, moving the line of prisoners up one at a time to keep steady pressure on the guards. He ordered his men to be conservative as they fired. He did not want to run out of bullets. He wished he had had more military training- any training, really. His mind could not develop a strategic way to get through the lobby now that the remaining guards were in position.

After every prisoner had rotated through, Theo told the group to take cover in the stairwell. “Theo,” said Wes, “what the hell do we do?”

“I’ve got a few ideas in mind,” he said, hoping to stall for time. He did not want to admit that he had no clue. Maybe he could buy some time using the protection of the Security Force armor. Allow the men to make a run for it and… wait. He looked down at the bodies of the guards. So many had fallen victim to the prisoners that the bodies had begun to stack up like logs.

“Here’s the plan,” Theo said. “I want ten men to change into the guard’s uniforms. I know some of the helmets were damaged by the killshots, and the uniforms are going to be messy, but this is the only chance we are going to have. The men in guard costumes are going to lead five prisoners, including me, out to the lobby.”

He explained the rest of the plan as the volunteers got changed. He had expected to have to reason with the men or beg them to get them into the bloody uniforms. He could not have been more wrong. The prisoners, amped by adrenaline and motivated by the desire for freedom and the longing for their loved ones, stepped up right away. He ended up with more than enough men for the job.

When the men were dressed, Theo lined up with Tony, Wes, and two other men. They put their hands behind their heads. “Are you sure about this?” Tony asked. “We’re sitting ducks out there.”

“I’m as sure as I’m going to be about anything right now,” Theo said. “This is our chance. I think it can work.”

Tony sighed, the uncomfortable exhalation of a man making his peace with himself and whatever deity he worshipped. “Okay,” he said. “Let’s give it the old college try.”

Theo laughed before he could catch the laughter and rein it in.

“What’s so funny?” Tony asked.

“Nothing, nothing. It’s just…I never got a chance to go to college.”

“Rebellion 101, my friend. You’re the professor now.”

When everyone was in his proper place, Theo gave the order to open the door and proceed.

Jason, wearing one of the less damaged Security Force uniforms, stepped to the front. He pulled the door open and stepped forward, weapon drawn to his chest. A battalion of guards popped out from all sides of the hall.

“Whoa,” Jason called to them, his voice muffled by the helmet, “easy, people. We’re coming out with the prisoners.”

“How many?” asked one of the guards.

“We’ve got five. Rest of them died in the shooting.”

“The hell took you so long?” asked the same guard. He must be someone important, Theo thought.

“We were checking to make sure they were dead, and securing these prisoners here. Now please, drop your weapons and let us do our thing.”

Silence. Theo waited, unsure of what he would do if this became more complicated.

“Stand down,” the guard said. The Security Force agents lowered their weapons.

Jason turned to the rest of the disguised prisoners. “Let’s go.”

The group of them walked out into the lobby, which still bore a much closer resemblance to a hotel than a prison. They noticed with a degree of relief that there were no security doors erected in the lobby to keep them from the front of the building.

Their group moved to the center of the room, and the real Security Force agents came out of hiding, moving closer to them.

“Now!” Theo called. The disguised prisoners leveled their weapons at the Security Force. The remaining prisoners with guns came out of the stairwell, keeping the agents in their sights as well.

“What the hell is this?” asked the lead guard. Several of the agents began to raise their guns.

“Put your weapons down! Now!” Theo shouted. One of the disguised prisoners handed him a rifle and he aimed it carefully. “Drop your weapons to the floor and put your hands up! I’ll give you to the count of three and then we start firing. One..two..”

The weapons fell to the floor in a noisy clatter. The Security Force squadron in the lobby had been defeated without anyone firing a shot.

Kylee led her army down the boardwalk. The construction crews had raced to make repairs after the hurricane, and she could see that the work was not of the highest quality, made as it was from repurposed joists and studs from the demolished homes and commercial buildings throughout town. She feared that the SUV would break through the repaired boards and get stuck, but the tires were wide and the vehicle’s weight was greatly reduced from its old incarnation. All of us here have had our weight reduced from our old incarnation, she thought.

Some of the residents of the beach camp knew the women from the safe house. Kylee realized just how quickly people’s identities had been redefined. She wanted so badly to create a society where people could decide for themselves how they wanted to be classified.

They were not attacked again between the camp and the city limits. Kylee was glad. She knew her soldiers needed the break. Hell, she needed it too.

Two blocks before Ventnor became Atlantic City, Bill and Jamie jogged up to her. “How’s it going, General?” Bill asked.

“Okay,” she said. “It’s been an interesting night so far, hasn’t it?”

“Yeah,” said Bill, a sly smile on his face, “but the good news is soon we’ll be reunited with Theo. Trouble never seems to find him.”

She laughed. “Well, it will be good to see him.”

“Oh, I hear you,” said Bill.

“Do you think he’s doing okay?” asked Jamie.

“He knows what he’s supposed to do,” said Kylee. She knew she wasn’t giving a straight answer, but she wouldn’t know what to say. She didn’t want to tell them how much she feared that they would fight all the way into the prison only to find that Theo was dead.

A block inside the city limits, Kylee directed the rebels off the boardwalk and down to the street. This was the point where they were supposed to rendezvous with Menendez and whatever support he had been able to gather together.

“Be on alert,” Kylee told her troops. “Watch for my signal. We’re expecting to encounter Security Force agents here, and I’m going to find out if they are on our side or not.”

She stepped off the boards and tried to focus her vision on the street ahead. The street lamps illuminated the avenue, but she didn’t expect the Security Force, good or bad, to be out in the middle of the street. Just then, she saw a hand reaching out from the carport of a building near the intersection.

“Kylee!” a voice called. “It’s Carlos! I’m in here.”

She held a hand up to her army, telling them to stand still. Cautiously, she ventured to the side of the carport. “I’m here, Carlos,” she said.

Menendez stepped out and grabbed her in a hug. “Oh, thank God you’re okay. And Theo? Do you have any word?”

She shook her head. “He’s supposed to be leading the fighting inside the prison. I have no way of knowing what’s going on there.”

“Then let’s go find out.” He turned to the carport, put his fingers in his mouth and whistled. “Let’s go, boys. Time to join the good fight.”

Five men dressed in Security Force uniforms walked out. None of them had the “death mask” helmets. Menendez saw the worried look on Kylee’s face. “I’m sorry I couldn’t provide more firepower,” he said. “Tiberius has more influence than I would have thought.”

“That’s okay,” she said. She pointed to her army. “You’d be amazed what can be done with only a handful of willing participants. Now I think we have a prison break to assist.”

She stepped to the front. Menendez, clearly impressed, ordered his men to follow. The growing contingent of rebels trekked on toward the prison, the larger cluster of footfalls mixing with the ever-present squeak of the SUV.

The old hotel quickly approached. “That’s the prison,” said Menendez.

“Really?” said Bill. “And yet it seems so quaint.”

“Shh… we’ve got company.” Kylee saw Security Force in the distance. She turned to Menendez. “Are you sure you want to do this? You cross this line and there’s no chance Tiberius will let you live if he wins.”

Menendez smiled. “No worries. He’s not going to win.”

Kylee’s army took positions around the intersection, making sure to avoid being detected in the bright streetlamps. When she was sure everyone was ready, she called out to the enemy combatants up ahead. “You, Security Force agents, drop your weapons or face the consequences.”

A small part of her thought she could avoid further fighting. Still, on another level she knew there was no chance she would be allowed to enter the prison. On an even deeper, more frightening level, she secretly hoped the agents would fight back.

“Rebel squad, you are under arrest by order of Supreme Leader Tiberius. Submit to us immediately.”

“Um… I don’t think they are going to surrender,” said Ryan.

“And so, my friend, we will show them the consequences,” said Joseph.

Bill grinned, a dark, devilish fire in his eyes. “God, I love this guy.”

Kylee wondered briefly about Andrew, who had moved further and further away as Joseph continued to indulge in the passion of battle. She hoped this wouldn’t drive them apart. Nothing to be done about that now. She straightened up and assumed her leadership pose.

“Rebel army,” she said to her men and women, “take them down.”

Chapter 31

The battle outside the prison lasted nearly fifteen minutes. When the Security Force had fallen to Kylee’s rebels, she led her troops to the front door. The prison looked surprisingly like the hotel it had been. She worried that the unlocked and unshielded front entrance was hiding yet another wave of Security Force agents. Her people were getting tired from being on their feet so long with their adrenaline pumping. Getting tired meant getting sloppy and that was a risk she couldn’t take.

Kylee had seven women and one man with injuries. Several were fairly serious. She wanted to get in, get out with Theo and the other prisoners and get her injured people to the hospital. She worried whether the Security Force would consider the hospital a neutral ground. Still, that was a worry for later. Now she had to face yet another unknown on the far side of the prison doors.

“I need support on both sides of the door. I’m taking point here. We have no idea if Theo’s been able to get the fighting to the lobby. We might be walking into a battle, or we might be walking into a trap. Whatever it is, let’s take the fight to them.”

Menendez organized the troops in positions along the side of the building. They were prepared to wait for Kylee’s signal, whatever she told them to do.

“Okay,” she said. She took a deep breath. “Let’s see what’s behind door number one.”

Two of Menendez’s men pulled the doors open. There was no sound of gunfire. No sounds at all, for that matter. Kylee decided to take a risk. She leaned around the edge of the doorway and looked into the lobby. She pulled away quickly on instinct. Did she really see what she thought she saw? She slowly leaned back in. A motley bunch of men, some of them wounded, appeared to have taken a team of Security Force agents prisoner. Standing in the middle of the group, unharmed, smiling and waving at her, was Theo!

Kylee ran into the building and wrapped her arms around Theo. He lifted her and spun her around. When he put her back on the ground he kissed her passionately.

“I guess you didn’t need my help,” she said.

“Are you kidding?” Theo responded. “We were prepared to stay here all week if we had to. We weren’t about to go out the door and fight whatever was waiting out there.” He hesitated, then indicated the outside. “Are they…”

“Dead,” she said. “Or injured enough that they won’t be any problem for us.” She looked around the room. “How did you take all of these men prisoner?”

Theo smiled. “Long story. We’ll have to swap tales. But now…”

“I know. We’re not done fighting.”

“No. Tiberius has to know about all this by now, and he’s not just going to give up and walk away.”

“Well, I’ll be damned. He lives!” Bill ran across the lobby. Theo put out his hand. Bill shook it and pulled Theo into a hug. The rebels slowly entered the prison. Husbands and wives, boyfriends and girlfriends found each other for the first time in far too long.

Jane and Tony walked over to Kylee and Theo.

“Thank you both for bringing us back together,” Jane said.

“What you did for us made all of this possible,” said Theo. “Without you giving us a place to live and hide there would be no rebellion.”

“That’s what this is, isn’t it?” asked Tony. “A real, full-on rebellion?”

“That’s right,” said Kylee.

“Well… good. That’s damned good.”

“Guys,” called Ryan, running over, “we’ve got a problem.”

They turned and looked where Ryan was pointing. Brian had collapsed to the ground and Liz was holding his unconscious body, sobbing uncontrollably. The prisoners and the rebels had all experienced some very horrible things the past few hours. Liz’s ability to keep all of that inside had reached its limit.

Kylee and Theo ran over. Liz’s hands were soaked in blood where they moved on Brian’s torso. “Oh, God, he was shot,” Kylee said. She looked at Theo. “I didn’t know…”

“He must not have wanted you to know. Brian has wanted a piece of the action for a long time, and I’m sure he was afraid you’d make him stay back.” Theo turned to the group around him. Several of his men were still keeping guns trained on the Security Force agents they had taken prisoner. Others were still standing with loved ones. Everyone had stopped what he or she was doing to watch the scene unfolding as Liz screamed in the middle of the room.

“Who else here was shot?” Theo called. “Raise a hand. Now is not the time to be brave.” More than a few hands went up. Theo counted. “Nine,” he said to Kylee.

“And I’ve got a few more with the women guarding our prisoners. Couldn’t even find the energy to come in here.”

“Okay,” said Theo. “Those of you who are injured, I’m sorry but you need to go get help for your wounds. Officer Menendez—”

“I’m afraid it’s just Carlos now, Theo,” said Menendez.

“Carlos, please lead these brave men and women to the hospital. Take whatever forces you need to escort them safely.”

“Yes, sir,” said Menendez. He called over two of his men and began discussing a plan for moving the wounded.

“We need to move everyone outside,” said Kylee. “The longer we wait here the more time we give the Security Force to plan a counterstrike.”

“You’re right,” said Theo, “but we need to take care of our prisoners first.”

“Okay.” Kylee left the prison and returned shortly after with a contingent of armed women leading their captives.

While Theo and Kylee oversaw the process of locking up the Security Force agents, Menendez and his partners departed for the hospital, using the SUV to transport the wounded. There was no longer a need to use the makeshift wagon for weapons. There were enough soldiers in the rebel army now to carry everything.

They left the prison behind, trying to ignore the sight of the dead Security Force agents in the street. A block down, Theo halted the procession. He wanted to speak to his people. He jumped up on a metal bench that was bolted to the sidewalk. “Can everyone see me?” he called.

The crowd of people standing before him cheered. Theo waited for them to settle, a technique he had picked up while watching Sam Lucas in action.

“Some of you have come to think of yourselves as rebels. That’s okay… we all are rebels here. Some of you have come to think of yourselves as prisoners. That’s okay too… whether we were imprisoned in a facility, in a beach camp, or just on this island, we are all prisoners of a corrupt leadership. Tonight, I want you to realize that you have become something else. You are the hope and salvation of Atlantic Island. Thousands of men, women and children sleep in their beds right now not knowing that we fight so that they will wake up to a brighter tomorrow. You are the future of this land, and together we will make right all that Tiberius has made wrong.”

The crowd cheered again. A voice called out, “Theo is our Supreme Leader!”

“Theo is our king and Kylee is our queen!” said another.

Theo held up his hands. “Please, everyone, we aren’t looking to be royalty. No one person… no two people are more important than everyone else. When this is all said and done you will have a chance to elect whomever you choose to lead you. That time will come, but for now I’m afraid we have more fighting ahead. Kylee will instruct you on the specifics of the mission going forward, but I will tell you this: We are not going to sit and wait for Tiberius to hunt us down. We are taking this war to his doorstep tonight! We are going to knock him off his golden throne tonight! We are going to take back our country tonight!”

His last “tonight” was shouted by everyone in attendance. With the army properly inspired, Theo hopped off the bench and stepped aside for Kylee to explain the plan of attack.

They moved through the streets with no obstacles. It seemed Tiberius had withdrawn the Security Force to the Palace. “Are you okay with this?” Bill asked Theo.

“What do you mean?”

“Kylee’s got people looking for anybody hiding in alleys or sniping from rooftops. There’s nobody here. The whole damned Force is waiting at the Palace. I know that place was built on people taking a gamble but, you know…”

“It is what it is. They know we’ve got a lot of firepower and we could probably pick our way through a series of small squads. They are going to try to outnumber us on their home turf.”

“And you think we can handle that?”

“I do. I hear you brought the bazooka.”

Bill smiled. “You mean Bertha? She’s my baby.”

“Well, don’t be surprised if your baby needs to come out to play.”

Bill gave him a serious look. “Theo, I’m ready for whatever comes. I’ll do whatever I have to do to help you and Kylee win this thing.”

“Okay. Good. Go hang out with Jamie for a few minutes. I don’t know—”

“If she and I will both be alive after to talk. I gotcha, bro.” Bill merged back into the marching army.

The rebels arrived at the wide intersection leading to the Palace. Theo had experienced so much within the golden walls of the Palace. School, private meetings with Lucas, the frightening encounters with Tiberius. He was tired of being afraid of the Supreme Leader, that was for sure. Still, he had absolutely no strategy for facing Tiberius, if and when it came to that. Theo imagined the odds were good he would have to shoot the man at close range. He tried to remember all the horrors Tiberius had committed.

The Palace gleamed majestically before them, its bright lights illuminating the vast complex.

“Okay, we are coming in through the garage,” said Kylee. “It’s very likely we are going to run into some opposition before we even get into the building so—”

She was interrupted by the blinding flash of the giant screens around the Palace flashing to life. Theo saw a distant glow from the beach that told him the screens along the heavily damaged pier mall were also active. He guessed this message was appearing on all available screens throughout the island. The screens showed the emblem of Atlantic Island. A voice boomed across the landscape, loud enough to rouse the city from its slumber. “A message from your Supreme Leader, Paul Tiberius!”

The image changed to show Tiberius sitting at a desk that Theo immediately recognized as the one that had belonged to Mayor Lucas. The Supreme Leader looked calm and confident.

“Citizens of Atlantic Island,” Tiberius began in his cold, serious voice, “it is my unfortunate duty to inform you that we are under attack from a small band of traitors on this island. It disturbs me to think that there are a sad few who do not appreciate all that we are doing to make life better for all of us. Please do not fear these criminals. I assure you that the Security Force is taking care of this problem as we speak.

“A moment before I went on the air, I was informed that a group of the traitors had been injured by our Security Force and were attempting to steal supplies from our hospital. I am proud to announce that our forces were waiting for them. While we wished to simply arrest them, they persisted in a senseless attack on our good soliders. The Security Force had no choice but to eliminate all of them.”

Theo heard screams from among the rebel army. His stomach tied in knots. He looked at Kylee who was biting her lip to keep her emotions contained.

“Among those killed were three traitors from the Security Force, including one highly ranked official, Carlos Menendez. It should go without saying that abandoning the Security Force is considered treason and is punishable by death in all circumstances.”

Theo felt nauseous. Kylee was wobbling as she struggled to keep herself together, and he pulled her to him.

“Some of you are no doubt wondering how these criminals were able to make any kind of progress against the limitless power of my Security Force. I wondered the same. I now present to you the answer.”

The cameras panned abruptly around the room. Sitting in a chair, struggling against two masked agents, was Michelle.

More screaming and yelling from the rebels. Theo knew he heard Ryan’s voice in the mix. His heart broke for Ryan who had been on a horrible roller coaster of emotions with Michelle the past few months. He knew his friend felt powerless at the moment, but so did he. They were all powerless right now to do anything but watch.

“This young woman,” Tiberius said off-camera, “had every opportunity afforded to someone in this country. She became close with some of my highest-ranking men and women. She even got to meet with me several times. But for reasons she refuses to disclose, she chose to throw all that away, betray her Supreme Leader and the people of Atlantic Island, to be a double agent working for the traitors.”

There was a sound as Tiberius rose from his chair and made his way back into the frame. Michelle, her mouth covered with a cloth, squirmed and moaned as he drew near.

“There must be no room for treason in this country,” Tiberius said. “I am the Supreme Leader. I am God in this land, and my word is law!” He stepped behind Michelle’s chair. “To the criminals who even now continue their assault on the lives of everyone in Atlantic Island, I send you this message: Give up your pointless efforts. Lay down your weapons. You will serve life sentences in our fine prisons, where you will able to do work for the good of the country, to make amends for what you have done. If you continue this senseless course of action, there will be only one response.” He reached forward so fast the cameras only showed a blur, and snapped Michelle’s neck with both hands. The cameras briefly showed her twitching form and then panned up to Tiberius who looked directly forward.

“Life or death, traitors. The decision is yours.”

The image faded and was replaced once again by the Atlantic Island flag.

Theo looked at Kylee, expecting her to completely fall apart. What he saw disturbed him even more. Her face was expressionless. When she spoke, her voice was flat and serious in its tone. “He dies tonight, Theo. He dies. They all die. I want to burn this place to the ground.”

Theo nodded and turned to the army. He knew their confidence was shattered. “We will not stand here and let it be that our friends died in vain,” he told them. He looked at Kylee again. She stared at him with calm, almost frightening conviction. “Those of you assigned to the garage, head down there now. Bill, Ryan, to me.

His lifelong friends joined him. Ryan was in tears and clinging to Bill for support. “Bill,” Theo said, “is Bertha ready to go?”

Bill’s voice shook with anger. “Ready, willing and able.”

“Good. Then follow me.”

“What are we going to do?” Bill asked.

“We’re going to knock on the front door.”

Chapter 32

Before splitting away from the rest of the army, Theo pulled Kylee in front of him. “Ky, babe, are you okay? Can you handle this?”

She nodded, unconvincingly.

“Kylee, these people need to know they can count on their leader. If you need to step aside—”

“I’m fine,” she said.

Joseph walked up to them. “I’m here to help you, Kylee.”

This seemed to grab her attention. “Hi, Joseph, where’s Andrew?”

“He’s with Jamie and Liz. They need comforting, and…well, I’m not as much with the comforting. I want to help you fight, Kylee.”

“Okay,” she said. “Okay. We’ll fight.”

Joseph took her face in both his hands. “I need you to focus. Your army needs you to focus. We will kill the bad guys, yes? Kill them all.”

“Kill them all,” she repeated. “Okay, Joseph.”

Theo was not at all convinced. “You’ll watch out for her?” he asked Joseph. “You won’t let her do anything stupid?”

“I will protect her with my life. Now you go and do what you need to do.”

Theo walked over to Bill and Ryan. Ryan was still clinging to Bill like he might blow away if the wind was to gust. None of this was good. How had their fortunes shifted so suddenly and dramatically?

Theo pointed at several of the rebels. They did not hesitate but walked over to him. “We are going to mount an assault at the front of the building,” he said. “I don’t think they would expect us to be so bold, and I don’t think they would expect us to split into groups so soon after coming back together. Keeping them confused, outsmarting them, this is the way we will win. We’re going to hit them with a big blow right up front, and I need all of you to move right in and start firing. Catch them while they are disoriented…whoever ends up being there. Does that make sense?”

“Theo,” said Wes, “man if you told me to run into the ocean and keep my head underwater for an hour I’d say it made sense cause it came from you. I’m with you.”

“Thank you, Wes.”

He took Ryan by the shoulder. “Ry… I’m so sorry. You can sit this out if you want.”

Ryan shook his head. “No. I’m not sitting anything out. Those bastards are going to pay for what they did.”

Theo stretched his tired muscles. It was time to move. Now, while Tiberius and his men thought that the rebels were demoralized and wouldn’t possibly stage an assault. He took off at a brisk pace toward the front of the Palace, following the ramp where cars had once pulled up for valet service in a very different world. His people trotted behind him, all armed and armored from what they had stripped from the Security Force. Bill carried the massive bazooka. Wes was carrying a small box of grenades Theo had removed from the SUV. Kylee’s group was going to rely on stealth and manpower. Theo’s was going to be the distraction, and that meant explosive destruction.

They stood in front of the massive doors. They could see a contingent of the Security Force in the lobby. It was only a matter of time before they were spotted. Theo ordered them into positions. He raised his gun, as did the others with similar weapons. Wes carefully removed a grenade from his box while Bill knelt with the big rocket launcher.

“Everybody understands what to do?” Theo asked. They all nodded. “Okay, Bill, time to wake some people up.”

“With pleasure, fearless leader.” Bill steadied his aim and fired a rocket across the car lanes and directly into the front door. The door exploded with a force far greater than Theo had anticipated. Fires licked at the flammable portions of the entrance.

For a moment, Theo and the rest simply stared in shock. “Whoa,” said Bill.

Finally, Theo snapped out of his trance. “Let’s go!” He ran the distance to the smoking entrance and darted in to the fray. The Security Force agents had been thrown into disarray by the explosion. Theo fired his gun and dropped two of them before they had a chance to raise their weapons.

Theo heard the gunfire erupting around him and he ran as fast as he could through the lobby to the nearest hallway he could find. He knew the others would follow him. Just before he reached the edge of the lobby he felt a powerful stinging sensation in his right shoulder. He ducked into the hallway. “Get as far down as possible,” he yelled to the others. When they reached the far end of the hall he shouted, “now, Wes!”

Wes launched a grenade down the hall where it landed perfectly, rolling just into the lobby. With an eardrum pounding explosion the grenade destroyed the passageway between the lobby and the hall. Debris fell as the ceiling in that section collapsed. They had successfully sealed off whatever part of the Security Force that was trying to come through the lobby.

“Theo…aw crap, you’re hurt.” Bill came rushing over.

“No, I’m fine,” Theo said, but then he saw the blood spreading on his shirt from where he had been shot in the shoulder. “Oh.”

“Does it hurt?” Ryan asked.

“Not as much as I would have thought,” Theo responded. “Maybe it’s the adrenaline or something. I don’t know. My arm is feeling a little weak though.”

Bill pulled off his own shirt and tied it tight around Theo’s upper arm, applying pressure to the wound. “You’re going to need to get that looked at.”

“Later. Let’s keep moving.”

Kylee’s mind was spinning. The image of Michelle’s death, captured on the enormous screens outside the Palace, was plastered on her retinas. She had tried so hard to understand Theo’s loss when Mark died. She thought at the time she really got what he was going through but now she knew: she hadn’t had a clue. This pain, this confusing jumble of memories of a decade of friendship, threatened to overwhelm her completely.

And Carlos… was it true? Had the Security Force murdered three of their own and a handful of severely injured civilians? Anything was possible with Tiberius in control. Kylee felt horrible pangs of guilt. She had allowed Carlos to go with only a small support contingent. She hadn’t made any effort to get Michelle out of danger, instead choosing to assume that she would be safe as long as she seemed loyal to Tiberius.

The rebels marched down to the garage entrance to the Palace. Under normal circumstances there would be two guards at the gate. Kylee didn’t know if Tiberius would be ramping up protection around the building. If anything, he seemed to think he’d effectively defeated the rebels through demoralization. He would realize how wrong he was when she shoved the barrel of her gun down his throat.

“Kylee,” said Joseph, “we have one small problem.” He pointed up in the distance. A sniper was positioned in a tower overlooking the spot they would have to pass to make their way to the garage. “I’d take him out but we don’t have guns with silencers. As soon as we fire we lose the secrecy of our approach.”

Kylee thought about it. Her mind was surprisingly eager to have a problem to solve. “Hold the troops in position until I get back.” She ran through the line of rebels until she found what she was looking for.

In the dark where the glaring lights of the Palace could not reach, Kylee scaled an emergency ladder mounted to the side of the building. She entered the garage on the third floor above ground and moved to the stairwell, on the lookout for Security Force agents. There was no opposition here. Tiberius might still have precautions in place to intercept the rebels, but he did not anticipate any maneuvering through the upper levels of the parking deck.

She leaned out the side of the fifth level. There, only maybe a hundred yards away, was the sniper’s perch. She pulled out the bow she had borrowed from one of the other women. She took careful aim, and felt sadness as a memory of summer camp took her by surprise: she, Michelle and Jamie goofing around at archery lessons. Kylee pushed the memory away. This wasn’t a game, and now was not the time to be sentimental. She could take all the time she needed to reflect, remember and mourn after this war ended. Slowing her breathing, she released the tension on the bow. The viciously sharp arrow flew silently through the air and impaled the sniper who tumbled forward into the half wall in front of him and then backward to the floor.

Kylee was disappointed she hadn’t seen the guard fall out of his tower to the ground below. As soon as she had that thought she regretted it. What was wrong with her? What was she letting Tiberius do to her mind? She hoped with everything in her that with Tiberius’s demise she would be able to get some of her old self back.

Just then, she heard an explosion in the distance. Theo. She smiled. She hoped that Theo, Bill and Ryan were raising hell.

She worked her way back to the ground and reunited with the troops. “Are we in the clear?” asked Joseph.

“For now,” she said. “We still don’t know what’s down by the garage opening. Let’s be careful.”

Joseph watched her carefully as she spoke. When she finished, he nodded, looking satisfied. She thought he was reading her mental state as much as he was listening to what she was saying.

She led the rebel army to the entrance. There were two guards positioned on either side of the opening. Her people dispatched them with almost no hesitation. The rest of the garage looked empty. The army proceeded in and Kylee began to strategize the next part of the mission. Suddenly, she heard doors opening throughout the garage. She heard running feet. “Down! Take cover!” she shouted to her army.

The Security Force was swarming the garage. Tons of them. More than she had time to count. They were firing wildly as they took positions behind concrete pillars and barriers. Kylee started shouting orders to her troops, instructing them to fire in bursts from the limited cover they had found. She wished the garage had been full of cars, but she would make do with what she had. That method had brought her this far.

She saw a door across the expanse of the garage deck. That was going to be her goal. It was not going to be an easy task. She saw very little opportunity to get past the Security Force without taking the majority of them down, if not all of them. She knew it could be done. She’d seen what her soldiers were capable of accomplishing, and she knew that the men Theo had led to freedom and the refugees from the camp were just as willing, if not as trained as her women.

She moved her people little by little, one barrier at a time as the Security Force fell. She saw some of her troops get hit and collapse, but that was in the periphery of her vision. She would identify them after. Now her goals were the door in the distance and each successive agent of evil in her sights.

Theo and his small group continued to face opposition as they moved through the building. Tiberius was hiding out in the executive quarters, Theo knew. The access, which he had used several times, was in the center of the building and not easily located.

They worked their way down hallways, through vast rooms that still resembled the majestic casino of the past, through the school where Theo and his friends had spent such a short, but important time. In every new area, they were presented with two or three Security Force agents. The bulk of the Force was somewhere else. Theo worried that “somewhere else” was wherever Kylee was right now.

They continued to kill the agents as quickly as they encountered them. Wes was prepared with additional grenades, but Theo saw no sense in continuing to demolish the path behind them. They weren’t leaving anyone alive to follow. He didn’t want to risk damaging the structure too greatly, now that the entire rebel army was likely in the building.

“How much farther to the executive wing?” asked Bill.

“Not too much farther, but I don’t think the elevator is going to work. That means going up the stairs. I don’t feel great about it.”

“So we fight to the top and confront Tiberius?”

“We fight to the top and then Ryan gets to work on setting up a broadcast to Atlantic Island, to let everyone know that we have taken the Palace and will be running the show from now on.”

“And Tiberius?”

“He’s mine.”

Though Theo’s voice came out strong and confident, he was anything but. As he had protested to the vision of Sam Lucas, he was scared of Tiberius. Scared of the man’s bizarre strength. To make matters worse, his dominant arm was feeling numb and when he tried to lift it he felt as if he had a hundred pound weight attached to his wrist.

They came around to a section of the Palace that had been a gaming floor of the casino. The machines were all gone. Perhaps they had been melted down to provide material for construction. He really didn’t know. In the back he saw glass doors that had once led to the boardwalk. That section of the boardwalk no longer existed, demolished by the leadership to prevent civilians from being able to approach the Palace from that side. The skywalk above that was also gone, though that connection between the casino and the mall had fallen victim to the Event.

“We need to come back around on the far side of this room,” Theo said. “I think there are stairs there that will get us into the upper levels, if not all the way to where Tiberius is. I think we should sit for a minute and catch our breath.”

“You boys tired of fighting?” a voice said.

“Bertier,” said Bill. “Just the guy I was looking to kill.”

“Don’t be cute, princess. You may have killed some of them Security boys, but me? I’m the real deal. The Supreme Leader didn’t put me in charge of all this for nothin’.”

Theo looked around. He couldn’t see Bertier anywhere. Where the hell was he hiding?

“Really,” said Bill, “I thought he promoted you to show people he had a sense of humor.”

“You keep talkin’, loser.” Bertier’s voice said. “I’m gonna knock out them pretty teeth and wear them for a necklace.”

“And what are you going to do with the rest of me?” Bill asked.

“Bill, enough!” Theo whispered.

“I’m gonna mount your head above my desk,” said Bertier.

“Show yourself, Bertier.” called Theo.

“King Crap!” Bertier laughed. “I dunno how you got out before, but I’m gonna enjoy taking care of you for good this time. The only question… do I kill your ass now or do you get to see the Supreme Leader in person?”

Theo heard a series of clicks. He felt a barrel pressed to the back of his head.

“On your knees, King Crap.” Bertier came walking around to the front of them. Theo saw that a squad of Security Force agents had guns to all of his men. They dropped to their knees.

“You,” Bertier said to Bill. “You come with me, princess. I’ve been waiting for this.” Bertier had a pistol in his hand. He gestured toward the glass doors. Bill got up and walked in that direction as Bertier followed, his gun trained on Bill’s back.

“Ima figure out whatta do with all them others in a minute… but I’m gonna kill your ass right now, son.” Bertier said. “Your friends can watch.”

He made Bill kneel down in front of them. The moonlight illuminated their silhouettes through the glass.

Theo didn’t know what to do. He couldn’t sit back and watch Bill die, but he was completely helpless.

“Time to die, loser,” said Bertier. He aimed the gun at Bill’s head.

“Oh crap, Bertier, look! It’s Tiberius!” Bill pointed behind Bertier.

The big teen turned around. Like a giant cat, Bill pounced, catching Bertier around the legs. Bertier fired his gun but the shot went wild, hitting the ceiling. He stumbled back as Bill drove forward in one smooth motion. Bertier’s back smashed through the glass door, and the two of them disappeared, dropping the several feet to the beach.

Theo didn’t waste any time. His weapon was still in front of him. While the guards were distracted, staring at the space where Bertier and Bill had vanished, he fell forward, grabbed his gun in his left hand and rotated onto his back. He shot the guard who had held him captive and shifted to take out the next. He rolled onto his bad shoulder and screamed in pain.

The others had taken his lead in the commotion. Within seconds, the guards were dead. The entire scene beginning with Bill’s move against Bertier had happened in a flash. Theo realized this night had been a succession of incredible good luck followed by horrible misfortune. This nightmare had to end.

His men stripped the Security Force agents of their weapons.

“Would you look at this,” Ryan said, “all of Bertier’s buddies were here. This was his elite squad? Man, did Tiberius botch this one.”

Theo smiled. Ryan sounded much better, at least for the moment.

“What do we do now?” asked Wes. “We should follow after Bill.”

Theo shook his head. “We can’t.”

“Theo!” exclaimed Ryan. “We have to help him!”

“I wish we could. If we drop down to the beach we’d have to come all the way back through the garage. We can’t afford to start over, not after making all this progress. It kills me, Ry, but Bill’s got to handle this himself. We need to get to the executive floor.”

Chapter 33

Bill and Bertier fell to the sand, eight feet below the doors to the casino. Shattered glass rained down around them as they plunged into deep dunes. Bill tried to spring to his feet but the slipping sands kept him off balance. He moved laterally instead, trying to fight out of the side of the dunes. He had just made it out when Bertier tackled him sideways. They sprawled onto the beach in the shadow of the massive screens that not much earlier had shown Tiberius’s murder of Michelle.

“I’m gonna make you die slowly,” said Bertier. He punched Bill in the face. Bill grabbed onto him and rolled him over. He went to deliver punches of his own but Bertier grabbed a handful of sand and tossed it at him. Bill covered his eyes with his arm and Bertier pushed him off.

The leader of the Security Force scrambled to a safe distance and back to his feet. Bill got up slowly, rubbing sand off his face. A small cut had opened above his right eyebrow, where Bertier’s wild haymaker had glanced off his face.

Bill cracked his knuckles and rotated his neck, loosening up his muscles. “You sure you want to do this, Bertier?” he asked. “Why not just give up? Admit that you’re an inbred skinhead and you’ve got nothing productive to offer society. I’m sure the new regime will go easy on you after Daddy Tiberius falls.”

“You don’t get it,” said Bertier. His eyes were wide and wild. “The Supreme Leader isn’t going anywhere. He’s our lord and savior!”

“Oh, Berty, Berty, Berty, have you been fed a load of malarkey. That gunfire we heard just a minute ago? I bet you ten bucks that was Theo and the rest killing your goofy friends. Guess who they are going to kill next? Your false messiah.”

Bertier let out a scream of rage like a mindless beast. He rushed at Bill, who connected with a powerful right hand. Bertier buckled and fell over. In a second, Bill was on top of him, unloading shot after shot. He hadn’t known he had so much anger in him but here, now, every wrong thing he had experienced: his arrest, Mark’s death, Dale, Menendez, Michelle, everything that had happened to his friends and to him since they had made the mistake to come to the shore, all of that went through his mind. He took all that rage and frustration and channeled it into his fists. Bertier’s face, never much to look at, dissolved into a bloody, misshapen mess.

Bertier reached into his pocket. Bill felt a sharp pain on his arm. He stopped his onslaught. His arm was bleeding from a shallow cut where Bertier had slashed him with a knife. Bertier went to stab at him and Bill knocked the knife away. Bertier brought his other hand up and hit him in the temple. He saw flashes of light in his vision. His own, private Event. Bertier rolled him and got back on top, and now it was Bill who was trying desperately to cover up.

They rolled over and over, each landing shots to the face and body. Bill felt cool water and knew they were at the edge of the ocean. Bertier flipped him into the water and grabbed him by the throat, pushing his head under the waves.

Bill had just enough time to take a breath and now he held it as best he could, as Bertier’s beefy hands squeezed at his throat. No, he said to himself. You didn’t come all this way to drown in a foot of water.

He thought of Mark, whose body had fought for so long after he sustained his injuries. Bill had promised to make his life count for something, to live on so that Mark’s memory would live on through him. He wasn’t going to let it end here. Bill grabbed Bertier’s wrists in his hands. With every bit of strength he had left, he squeezed, cracking the small bones in the thug’s wrists. Bertier’s hands relaxed on Bill’s throat, and the large teen fell backward clutching his broken wrists to his chest.

Bill rose from the water, coughing and sputtering as he reclaimed his footing. Now he was towering over Bertier, who tried an awkward crabwalk away from the edge of the tide.

“Get away,” said Bertier. “Get away from me! The Supreme Leader will make you pay! You’re gonna die, and all your friends. Your girl. Everybody you love. You’re all dead, man.”

“No,” said Bill. He dove on top of Bertier. The Security Force’s young leader made one last thrust backward, and scooped up the knife. His broken wrist moved at a strange angle as he swung at Bill. Before he could think what he was doing, Bill grabbed the knife out of the air and redirected its trajectory down into Bertier’s chest. Bertier continued to struggle for a few seconds and then he was gone.

Bill rolled onto his back in the cold sand. He watched the stars as he struggled to catch his breath. His arm hurt like hell but he was alive. He thought maybe he’d sleep for a while here on the beach. He had been running on pretty close to empty most of the night and sleep seemed like a great idea. But that wouldn’t be right. Not when his friends were still fighting this war.

Bill rolled to a sitting position and slowly dragged himself to his feet. Sleep would come later. “I’ll sleep when I’m dead!” he shouted to the wind. He didn’t like the hint of madness in his voice. Better just get back to the fight. He walked up the beach and found Bertier’s gun. Checking to make sure it was still loaded, Bill walked toward the street, where he would follow the rebels’ steps into the building.

Chapter 34

Theo and his group took the staircase as high as they could. Floor by floor the exhausted men climbed. Periodically they heard distant bursts of gunfire. The rebel army was fighting the Security Force. Of that he had no doubt. Each new wave of shooting energized him as he scaled the floors. It meant Kylee’s group was still fighting. Still alive, some of them anyway. He looked at the floor number. Twenty-four. “We’re almost there,” Theo called. Then, suddenly, a wall appeared in his path.

“They built a wall to block the way to the executive floor?” Ryan asked.

“Looks like it,” Theo said. “They wanted to limit access, probably for situations like this.”

“Where do we go?” asked one of the other men… Seth, was it? Theo was struggling to remember the names of all the new people he was meeting. He felt ashamed, asking people to die for his cause when he didn’t even know what to call them.

“We go down there.” He pointed to the door leading to the highest accessible floor.

“But won’t they know we’re coming?” asked Wes. “They’re going to herd us down a chute like cattle going to slaughter.”

“They’re going to try,” Theo agreed. “But we have no choice. If that wall blocking the stairs was drywall I’d say we could tear it down. We don’t have the time or the equipment to get through concrete block. The main elevator is in the middle of the hall and I have to imagine there’s a stairwell there that goes all the way to the top. There’s no other move we can make.”

Theo hoped his voice still sounded calm and confident. His arm was completely useless now, tingling and numb. He wondered just how much damage that bullet had done to him. His head was starting to swim from the slow loss of blood. There was a very good chance that Wes was right. There was only one way for them to get to Tiberius and this was it. The Security Force, what was left of it anyway, would be blocking their path, he had no doubt.

He sat down on the step, trying to reorient himself physically and mentally. He hadn’t feared dying for a worthwhile cause, and he still didn’t particularly worry about it now. What frustrated him was the thought of failing his friends, of dying this close to his goal.

“Are you okay?” asked Ryan.

“I’m going to be,” Theo said. “This will be over soon.”

“I want you to know something,” said Ryan.

“What’s that?”

“Despite… despite everything that’s happened, all the hardships, all this madness… you’ve been spectacular, Theo. I’m honored to be your friend.”

Theo didn’t know what to say. He wrapped his good arm around Ryan’s shoulders and pulled him into a hug right there on the stairwell. He stepped back, ready to see the war come to an end one way or another. Somehow, his friend had given him the strength to carry on.

“Guys,” he said, “I have to be honest. I can’t use my right arm. I’m going to try to keep shooting with my left but my aim may be terrible. I will stand with you to the end but you can’t rely on me to make a shot. I’m sorry.”

“Not a problem, Theo,” said Wes. “We’ll just have to kill a few for you.”

Theo smiled. “Okay, then. Let’s go.”

One of his other soldiers (was it Hugo?) reached for the door and whipped it open. A thunderous round of gunfire sounded and the man went flying backward in a hail of bullets.

“Damn it!” Theo yelled. “Take them!” He led his team in low while the Security Force reloaded. They fired as many shots as they could. He thought they might have hit one or two agents, but he couldn’t be sure. He pulled his men back quickly to the relative safety of the stairwell. Theo looked at the others. They had no way forward. The Security Force was prepared. There was nothing to hide behind in the hallway. All they could do was take potshots through the doorway until they ran out of ammo.

“What do we do?” asked Wes.

“We don’t do anything, not yet.” Theo scratched his head. He knew Kylee’s troops were working their way up but he didn’t know what condition they were in. If Kylee had been hurt or killed they would be in disarray. They might very well be coming up right underneath his group in the stairwell, which would do no good.

He considered Wes’s grenades. He wished there was some kind of flash bang, something that would give them an advantage without being so destructive. If they took out the hallway the top floor could collapse in on them. It might not be pleasant for Tiberius but it might also kill Theo and everyone with him.

Just then he heard sounds of motion coming down the hall. “Someone’s coming,” he said. “Be ready.”

There was a grunt of exertion and then Michelle’s body came flying through the door landing on the floor in a heap. Ryan screamed, a sound that chilled Theo to the bone. He saw his friend go running for the door, gun drawn. Theo moved as quickly as he could, but Wes got there first, tackling Ryan and pinning him to the ground.

“Let me go!” Ryan screamed. “Let me go!”

“You’ll die out there!” Theo yelled.

“I don’t care! I want to kill them all.”

Theo turned to Wes. He was trying hard not to see Michelle’s twisted body in his peripheral vision. “Wes, keep him down. He’s no good to us like this.”

What the hell was he going to do? Theo was completely out of options. Throwing Michelle’s body at them like that… Tiberius wanted to disarm them emotionally, and remind them that he was in control. Maybe he was. Maybe this had been a giant fool’s errand. For the first time in a while, Theo thought of his family. His real bed in his real room in his real home. He sat down on the step and stared at the blank wall across from him while Ryan kicked and struggled.

He was just so tired. Tired from being awake for so many hours, but even more tired on a deeper level from everything he had experienced the past year. He’d had enough.

A new spate of gunfire caught Theo’s attention. It was like those he’d heard periodically, but this one was much closer. He could hear the sound coming through the open door. Curiosity motivated him to his feet. “Can someone get me a visual?” One of the men crawled to the opening and moved his head out and back.

“It’s Kylee, Theo, sir,” the man said. “It’s the army! They’re fighting the Security Force!”

Theo snapped back into action. “We can’t go into the hall without risking hitting the other rebels or them hitting us. I want careful shots taken at the floor between the Security Force and us. Draw their attention. Let’s help our army win this.”

Theo’s men did as he ordered. Ryan had collapsed into a weeping mess draped over Michelle’s body. That was fine for now. At least he wasn’t getting himself killed, and Wes was now free to keep shooting.

It was a confusing few minutes. His men fired sporadic shots at the floor. The Security Force and the rebel army exchanged far more gunfire. Finally, the shooting sounds slowed, becoming less frequent and less intense, before they ceased altogether.

Silence surrounded them like a heavy blanket, deadening thought and emotion. Time slowed. Finally, Theo dared speak. “Kylee?” he shouted. “Kylee!” We’re across the hall in the stairwell. Can we come out?”

He froze, petrified that he might not hear Kylee’s voice in response. Then there it was: “Theo! Come on out here!”

He walked out. He still felt a little dizzy from his wound, but nothing would stop him from seeing Kylee again. There she was, at the opposite end of a hall filled with smoke, dust and bodies. They ran to each other, past the shredded carpet and chunks of violated concrete from his team’s contribution to the fight, and embraced in the center.

“You’re hurt!” she cried.

“It’s nothing,” he said.

“Bull. You’re bleeding. Your arm is hanging there. We need to get you help.”

“I can’t. Not yet. There’s one more thing to do. You know that.”

She nodded. “I know.”

“How did you get here?” he asked.

“It wasn’t easy,” she said. “We were pinned down for a while in the parking garage. Outnumbered, for a while, at least.”

“How did you make it through?” Theo asked.

“We won, I think, through sheer grit and force. Thank God for Joseph.” She indicated the big Austrian, who was standing and talking with Andrew. He was wounded, but it looked superficial. Kylee cast her eyes downward. “We lost a lot of people.”

“We had losses too.”

She looked up suddenly, worried. “Where are Bill and Ryan?”

Theo sighed. He explained what had happened with Bertier and how Bill had knocked them both down to the beach and out of sight. “I don’t know if he’s okay,” Theo admitted.

She brushed back her hair. “And Ry?”

Theo opened his mouth to speak, to tell her about the horror that had transpired, when he was interrupted. “Oh hell,” said a weary voice, “did I miss all the fun?”

Bill was leaning against the door at the end of the hallway from which Kylee’s army had arrived. He was bleeding from several places. His face was, once again, a puffy mess. He had dark bruises on his throat.

“Oh, God, Bill.” She and Theo ran over to him.

“Hey, hey, don’t worry about me! I’m fine. Just a few… horribly painful scratches is all.” He winced.

“And Bertier?” Theo asked.

“Dead as a doornail, my friend.” Bill’s voice was jovial, though tired, but he did not smile. Just then, Jamie saw him and came running over. She threw her arms around him. “Easy, easy, baby!” he cried out. “I’m not a well man!” Finally a crack of a smile showed.

Kylee turned back to Theo. “You were starting to say about Ryan?”

Theo’s shoulders slumped. His eyes watered. “Follow me.”

He led the three of them to the stairwell. There, Ryan continued to weep over Michelle’s body.

“Oh, no.” said Jamie.

She and Kylee moved closer to Michelle. Bill came around and tried to gently move Ryan off.

“Come on, Ry,” he said. “Come on, buddy. It’s okay man.”

“It’s not okay!” Ryan screamed. “Look what they did to her!”

“Pretty much all of the people who were responsible for this are dead now, Ry,” Bill said. “Come with us. She’ll be okay here. When this is over, I promise we’ll come back and take her out of here. Now we’ve gotta go face Tiberius.”

“No,” said Theo.

“What do you mean no?” asked Kylee.

“I mean, no. You’ve all done enough. This is my job now.”

“Theo,” said Bill, “don’t be ridiculous. You can barely stand. Let’s bring the army up there and shoot the devil in his big, fat head.”

“It has to be me,” said Theo. “You need to get these people out of here and to safety. You know Tiberius’s power. If you all come with it will be a massacre.”

“I don’t understand,” said Kylee. “How can you win if you’re so sure we’d all lose?”

“I don’t know,” he said. “I just know that this is a fight for me and me alone. Just give me one last chance to speak to the people.”

“One last…” Kylee gasped. “You don’t think you’re going to survive this, do you? This is insane, Theo. Insane.”

“This army needs its leader,” he said. “I can’t risk any of you. If I don’t come back in an hour…Wes has grenades. Take this place down.”

He walked back down the hall. The eyes of the army followed him. Standing by the door he knew would take him to the staircase to the top floor, Theo spoke.

“People of Atlantic Island, you have done an amazing thing tonight. You have made it possible for this country and its people to be free. You have done right by the people who died in the tragedy of the Event, like my friend Mark, and you have done right by all those who died in the avoidable tragedies brought about since by Paul Tiberius and his men.

“You have helped me to avenge the deaths of Sam Lucas and so many others who died in the gladiatorial arena, in the prisons, the camp, or here in this Palace. I thank you from the bottom of my heart. Now, I want you to go. Go out and be my representatives in the world. Let the people know as they awaken that they don’t have to be afraid anymore.”

He pulled Kylee to him and kissed her. When he pulled back, her eyes were full of tears. “I love you,” he said to her.

She hesitated, preparing a plea, then stopped herself. “I love you, too,” she said.

“Listen to Kylee as you have done so far, and as you have done for me,” he said. “Listen to my friends.” He looked at Bill and Ryan and smiled. “Listen to each other. You are the future of this nation.”

“What about you?” someone shouted. “Won’t you lead us?”

“I hope so,” Theo said. “I guess fate will decide. Now I have a dictator to overthrow. Thank you all for everything… Thank you for giving me a purpose.”

With that, before there could be more protests, he turned and opened the door behind him. He looked back one last time, making eye contact with Kylee. Then the door shut, cutting him off from his people.

Kylee took a moment to compose herself. “Alright people,” she said, “It’s time to go. We’re going to retrace our steps down and collect those we’ve lost.”

“What about Theo?” a voice called out. “Will he be back?”

“I don’t know,” she said. “We have to move now.”

Chapter 35

Theo heard the door close behind him. One flight of stairs separated him from the small lobby that had once divided Tiberius’s and Lucas’s offices. He thought there was a chance that he would be killed as soon as he stepped into the lobby. If that was how it was going to be, so be it. He had come too far to turn back, and he was out of options. This part of the script couldn’t be written in advance. It had to play out in real-time, come what may.

He wasn’t positive he had any ammo in his gun. He’d forgotten to check before he left the others. The firearm was held in his left hand. His right arm was as useless as if it had been amputated. Maybe eventually it would be. He certainly didn’t think it would ever work the way it had.

Black shadows danced in and out of the edges of his vision. Theo knew he was tired, but there was something more than that wrong with him. The shirt wrapped around his wound was drenched with blood. He wondered how long he would be able to stay on his feet.

Theo took the stairs slowly, conserving his energy. He was prepared for the possibility of Tiberius or one of his soldiers bursting out of the door at the top of the stairs and coming after him. If that happened, he’d run straight up, and maybe toss them down to the bottom. It wasn’t much of a plan but his addled brain refused to give him anything else. Conserve your energy, it said. Take your time. All in good time, Theo.

He thought maybe that was Sam Lucas’s voice speaking to him, or at least his own construction of the mayor. It was nice that he still had a friend with him. This made him think of Kylee and the rest. He hoped they were on their way to safety. Even with Bertier defeated, he knew a portion of the surviving Security Force would continue to fight as long as Tiberius remained in control. The rebels were tired and injured. They needed a break. They needed a victory, and Theo wanted more than anything to give it to them.

Three more steps to the top. So nobody was going to attack him here after all. Theo was confused. Tiberius must know he would be coming. Why give him the chance to get situated in the lobby? None of this made any sense, but then again he was dealing with a man whose ego and one-sided sense of right and wrong had driven him insane.

Two more steps remaining. Theo tightened his grip on the gun. Climbing had been so difficult with his right arm throwing him off balance and the gun in the hand that should be gripping the rail. Now, if he didn’t trip and send himself back down the stairwell in a heap, he needed to have his weapon at the ready.

On the final step, Theo took a deep breath. He was ready, as ready as one could be. Doing the best one could do in impossible circumstances. That’s what he had come to believe defined a hero, and it was the code he would continue to live by now, even if he might not live much longer. He let out the air he had been holding. He went to reach for the door with his right hand, and laughed when his arm didn’t move. So much for preparing his gun. He maneuvered the weapon under his left arm, pinning it to his side, and turned the knob with his left hand.

He opened the door and walked out into the small lobby. It looked like he remembered it, though of course he had never been there that late. No receptionist worked at the desk. Nobody was there at all. The door to the mayor’s office was partially open. Well, it was not the mayor’s office anymore, was it? Tiberius’s office.

Theo looked around. He knew these circumstances had been arranged for him, but he didn’t see an alternative. He had become a cow in a chute after all.

“The great and powerful Theo Essex returns to grace us with his presence!” Tiberius’s voice came from behind the open door. Theo felt a chill go through him. He was frozen where he stood, caught between conflicting impulses to move forward and to turn and run.

“Do come in, Mr. Essex,” said Tiberius. “We will talk of many things. Cabbages and kings, am I right?” The voice tittered.

He’s completely mad, Theo thought. Despite his reservations, he took a few cautious steps forward, raising his weapon.

“You have caused me a tremendous amount of trouble, Mr. Essex,” Tiberius said. “The least you can do is sit with me like two gentlemen. We can discuss our differences.”

Theo reached the doorway. He knew he only had one small chance to end the nightmare. He brushed the door against his shoulder and pushed forward, entering the inner office.

“Ah, Mr. Essex.” Tiberius was standing in the center of the room. Theo didn’t see anyone else there. “Come in. Take a seat. Your friend Michelle was using one of them but I believe you’ll find that seat is no longer occupied.”

That was the push Theo needed. “Die!” he yelled. He fired the gun as close to Tiberius’s direction as he could manage in his condition. He discovered there had been three bullets left, and he fired them all. Two struck Mayor Lucas’s large desk on either side of Tiberius, piercing and splintering the expensive wood. The third bullet tore through the side of Tiberius’s left arm and buried itself in the wall.

Tiberius looked at the wound, which was bleeding freely onto the carpet. He frowned. “I wish you hadn’t done that,” he said. “I really liked this shirt.” He reached up with his right hand, grabbed the torn sleeve and yanked, ripping the shirtsleeve off below the bullet wound.

Theo stood silent, watching Tiberius. His one attempt to win through force had failed him. Now Tiberius studied the wound in his pale flesh. He made a clicking, disapproving sound with his tongue.

“Theo, Theo, Theo,” Tiberius said. He seemed sad. Theo noticed the bullet wound was not bleeding much at all anymore. “You think to stop me with bullets? Poor boy. You are out of your depth.” Theo stared in awe. Tiberius’s wound, deep if not life-threatening, was closing before his very eyes. Within thirty seconds after the gun had fired, the wound was just a scar, and even that was fading.

“I’ll ask you again,” said Tiberius, walking around to the far side of the desk, “won’t you sit and talk with me? Violence won’t get you anywhere with me, you see.”

“Why don’t you just kill me?” Theo asked.

Tiberius sat in Lucas’s chair. “I may. I haven’t decided yet. You fascinate me, Theo. Can I call you Theo?”

Theo didn’t respond.

“Very well, Theo. As I said, you fascinate me. You are like a cancer given life. A series of wrong ideas given voice and sent to inspire other people of limited mental faculties. And inspire them you have! Do you even know how many have died in your name tonight?”

“You and your men killed them,” Theo said.

“True. But this is where you forget your place in the world. I am the Supreme Leader. The Security Force represents the law. What we have done tonight is punish those who would commit treason against our country. We have done this at great cost, as I’m sure you know.”

Before he knew what he was doing, Theo found himself taking a seat.

“There you go,” said Tiberius. “Make yourself at home. Now, Theo, you have come so far to achieve this audience with the Supreme Leader. You must have some questions for me.”

“Why so much senseless death and violence?” Theo asked. “The gladiator battles. The rounding up of innocents. Taking people’s homes. There was a better way.”

“What better way?” asked Tiberius. “The way of Sam Lucas? Your beloved mayor believed too strongly in the inherent good of the people. For years, he and I argued over a city so violent, so broken that nothing could save it. Not the money from the casinos, not the influx of high-end shops and new condos. There was a sickness at the core of Atlantic City. The Event gave us a chance to change all that. To finally take action and eliminate crime across the island.

“And that is what I did. Sam Lucas fought me every step of the way, because he always thought the people, left to their own devices would do the right thing.”

“And you disagreed?” Theo asked.

“Of course! Human beings are an evil species, prone to violence and greed. Just look at what has happened tonight. What are your ‘rebels’ if not a group of randomly picked civilians who suddenly found they had it in them to murder other people in cold blood.”

“They are fighting for freedom. For a world where they don’t have to live in fear of their homes or their loved ones being taken from them.”

“So you question my methods. Fine. Where you, and Lucas before you, are wrong is that you don’t see that those methods are a means to an end. Lucas only thought about and saw the short term. Happiness for everybody! A chicken in every pot. A beachfront penthouse for every family. It was a mad, shiny notion that led him to the point where I had no choice but to remove him from the playing field. We always lived in a world of limited resources, Theo. Atlantic Island doesn’t improve that but complicates it to an exponential degree. If you had your way, we would all starve within a year.”

“It still doesn’t give you the right to kill people,” Theo said. He leaned forward. “It didn’t give you the right to kill the mayor.”

“I make the rights on this island!” Tiberius said. He slammed his fist on the desk, which Theo saw no longer had its glass top. The force of the impact shook the room. Theo could feel the vibration through his chair. “You are an ant, a worm, and you have no place to question me!” Tiberius’s face shifted suddenly, and he smiled again. “Forgive me, Theo, I seem to have lost my temper. I hold this all very close to my heart, you see.”

Theo gripped the arm of the chair with his good hand. He was in the presence of a profoundly dangerous person.

“Were there any other questions?” Tiberius asked.

Knowing that his inquiries might be the only thing prolonging the time before his death and delaying Tiberius from going after Kylee and the rebels, Theo asked perhaps the most obvious of questions.

“How…how did you get like this? How do you have so much strength…how do you heal from bullet wounds?”

Tiberius laughed heartily. It was a horrible sound. “I have to tell you Theo, not many have asked me that question. The few who did… well, they aren’t around to talk about it. Seeing as how you probably won’t be around much longer either…why not?”

Theo couldn’t believe it, but he found he was intrigued to hear what Tiberius had to say.

“A while back, a team of archeologists made a fascinating discovery. They sent robotic vehicles into underground caverns in Mexico, beneath an ancient temple. What they found was bizarre: a metallic orb. Thousands of years old. They could only speculate at its purpose.”

Theo began to think the man’s insanity had drawn him far off-topic, but he listened on.

“The bidding on such an artifact went on and on. Every museum wanted to display it. Every science lab wanted to analyze it. The orb remained carefully preserved away from prying eyes. Nobody dared handle it by hand in case it were to fall to pieces. For months, its future remained unknown. Finally, an inspired entrepreneur developed a strategy that appealed to numerous parties. The orb would go on a… road show. It would appear on display in one place, then move to the next to be analyzed for a while, and on and on.

“Well, the government of Atlantic City got to take its turn with the orb. Some people wanted to organize a huge tribute to the origins of Mexican culture at the Convention Center, and the orb would be the centerpiece. I was not directly involved in any of these discussions. I did not see the purpose of the whole idea. And then, fate smiled upon me, as I had always known it would. A package, incorrectly marked, arrived at my office in the old city hall.”

Tiberius left his chair. He walked over to the wall and removed a painting. A digital keypad was mounted on the wall. “I had this installed when I assumed command of this office after Lucas was no longer around,” he said. He typed in a code, and after a series of beeps a section of the wall slid back. On a wooden shelf was a small metal box. Tiberius removed the box and walked back to his desk. He placed the box on the desk with its front latch facing Theo.

“When I opened the package, I found this box,” Tiberius said. “Not knowing its contents, I opened it.” He unlatched the lid and raised it up. “I saw… this.” Inside was a sphere. It was not perfectly round, and Theo couldn’t make sense of what material it was made from. It appeared both metallic and ceramic.

“Now, if you ask me,” Tiberius said, “I do believe those ancient Mexicans did not invent this orb. I think it came from somewhere else. In any event, I kept the box with me as I attended a meeting that night in the heart of the island. I didn’t know that it was part of the Mexican exhibit and I didn’t know yet what I wanted to do about it. As I walked out of the limousine, the driver tried to help me out of the car. The box fell and the contents rolled onto the ground. I bent down to pick it up, not knowing, of course, that I was the first living being in modern history to touch the orb’s surface. And that’s when it happened.”

“When what happened?” asked Theo.

“The orb began to glow, hot against my skin. I grabbed it with both hands as it tried to pull away from me. Much like the reverse polarity of a magnet. A massive pulse of energy came out of it in all directions. It washed through me and knocked me unconscious. When I came to, the world had changed.”

“The world had… you… you mean the Event, don’t you?”

Tiberius snickered. “Ah, so you are not completely lacking brain power! That’s right. The orb triggered what I thought was a natural disaster, but what we both now know was a portal to another universe. When I woke up, the limo driver was standing over me, trying to rob me. In the course of protecting myself, I learned what gifts the orb had granted me. It has remained with me ever since.”

Tiberius came around the desk. “And now, I think this question and answer session is over.” The man’s eyes flashed with violent intent. “The only thing that remains to ponder is what to do with you.”

Theo stood up as Tiberius came closer. “Your army is destroyed, Tiberius. It doesn’t matter what you do to me. You’re just one man, and it’s over for you.”

Tiberius moved faster than Theo had imagined was possible. The Supreme Leader moved forward and slammed his palm into Theo, catching him on his bad shoulder, which shattered instantly. Theo had a moment to feel glad that his arm was numb as he was thrown backward, twisting in the air and knocking the chair over.

“I am the light that shines in the darkness!” yelled Tiberius. He walked over to Theo and kicked him. Theo lifted off the ground and crashed to the floor on the other side of the room. There was a horrible pain in his side and he knew that several of his ribs had broken.

“I am the future of this world!” said Tiberius. “You and your miserable followers are done here.” Somehow, impossibly, he was standing over Theo again. He grabbed Theo by the shirt and lifted him off the ground. He slammed Theo into the wall. Theo felt the drywall crush behind him as the wind left his lungs. Tiberius tossed Theo across the room. He fell over the desk knocking everything onto the floor, including the metal box. The orb rolled onto the carpet.

Theo tasted something bitter in his mouth. He wiped his lips and his hand came away covered in blood. Tiberius had damaged more than his ribs. He was now certain: he was going to die here.

Tiberius was approaching again. Theo realized the only reason he was still alive was because Tiberius was too angry to think clearly. That would only last him so long.

“You are a fool, Theo Essex,” yelled Tiberius. Theo heard crashing all around. The man was throwing furniture into the walls. Theo tried to make a run for the door, but his body wouldn’t respond to any requests to move fast. His running days were behind him. Instead, he crawled in the direction where he had seen the orb roll.

“I’m going to kill you, Theo, and your death will be the message I send to your pathetic rebels. I am the Supreme Leader! I am God and you shall not defy me!”

Theo folded himself over the orb just as Tiberius grabbed the back of his shirt with both hands. He hoisted Theo from the ground effortlessly, as if he was lifting a sack of flour. Theo clutched the orb to his aching abdomen in his left hand. He felt a strange sense of warmth down there.

“Goodbye, Theo,” said Tiberius. He tossed Theo head first through the large glass windows that showcased the beach and the ocean. Theo felt the glass slice his face to ribbons. His right arm could not protect him and his left was holding on to the orb. He began to fall, and then suddenly he felt something else. The warmth in his midsection spread rapidly. Though his eyes were closed he saw a burst of light. He felt unconsciousness take over, and he embraced it. He had nothing left with which to fight.

Theo tumbled as the orb activated. The pulse extended out a hundred feet in every direction. The golden ball slipped from Theo’s unconscious hand and immediately everything in the range of the pulse vanished, including the orb, Theo and a massive semicircle comprising part of nearly ten floors of the Palace below the spot where the Supreme Leader stood, a look of disgust on his face.

Tiberius stood at the broken window, and for a brief moment it seemed the structure might stay just as it was, even without all the supports below. Then, the remaining structure cracked, crumbled and collapsed. Tiberius was dropped into a maelstrom of debris as the Palace fell to the beach.

Epilogue 1

One month later

“Are you ready?” Bill asked.

“I will be,” said Kylee. “Public speaking was never really my thing.”

“I think it’s going to have to become your thing,” he said. “You’re pretty much the ‘it’ girl around here.”

She laughed. “Did Ry make it?”

“Yeah, absolutely. He’s sitting with me and Jamie.”

“How’s his…you know.”

“What? Frame of mind? He’s getting there, Ky. Little by little. I know you want him to be involved with the nerd patrol again and he will be. Just give him time.”

Bill escorted her down the hall. She could see the door through which she would enter the stage. Already she could hear the excited chanting of the crowd. How she wished Theo could be here with her. The thought saddened her.

When the Palace fell, she had known immediately that Theo was gone. All she wanted was to recover his body. In the weeks that followed, as the rebels rounded up the rest of the Security Force and secured the island, Kylee’s attention became more and more focused on digging through the rubble of the Palace.

Though many bodies were uncovered, she didn’t find either Theo or Tiberius. Gradually, Kylee started to believe it was possible that Theo was still out there somewhere. “Where could he go on an island?” Jamie had asked her. Maybe she was right. Maybe he really was dead. If so, she was determined to honor him.

Bill wished her luck and went to take his seat. It was all on her now. The direction of the country from this day forward would grow from what she was about to say. Andrew told her this was the kind of speech that would find its way into history books. Would there be history books of Atlantic Island one day? She thought it was possible. A full world of possibilities waited. She took one final second to compose herself and she stepped through the door and out on the stage.

The crowd applauded and cheered. The sound reverberated through Boardwalk Hall and energized her. Kylee stepped to the podium. The notes that she had revised a hundred times waited for her. Two of her soldiers guarded her on each side of the stage, wearing uniforms similar to those of the Security Force, minus the fearsome helmets and masks.

She waited at the podium while the crowd hooted and hollered. Finally, the sound began to diminish. She held up a hand and the crowd continued to quiet. She looked around. It seemed like everyone in Atlantic Island was here. Men, women and children filled the stands.

“People of Atlantic Island,” she began, “today marks the end of a long, frightening period in all of our lives and the beginning of something bright, new and promising. Today I can officially say that the forces of Paul Tiberius have been defeated. The country is once more in the hands of its people!”

The crowd applauded heartily. She allowed them their time. When they had once again grown silent she continued. “Next week we will be holding elections, to allow you, the people to decide who it is you want to lead you. We plan to put your newly elected leaders in office within the month so that they can continue the work of rebuilding this island.” She paused. “We fought a difficult war for this independence, and I would be remiss if I ignored the sacrifice of so many. I lost loved ones just as many of you did. I want you to know that I will do everything in my power to make sure that a monument is built on the site where the Palace once stood. A monument that will contain all the names of the brave men and women who died to make a future for all of us.

“I believe in all of you, just as Theo Essex and Sam Lucas believed in you. We have overcome so much and I know that we will all work together to overcome the challenges ahead. It is time for all of us to rise up and make of ourselves a great nation. I know you will make us proud. All hail the people of Atlantic Island!”

Epilogue 2

He had a brief sense of cold water rushing over him, filling his nostrils, pouring into his lungs. The next thing he knew, he was being pulled out of that same water. In the next flash of consciousness, he was on a hard surface, a table, with a bright light in his eyes. Concerned faces all around him. Then there was darkness.

Theo awoke some time later in a small room. He was lying on a cot. He stretched his arms. Stunned, he pulled both arms in front of him. His right arm was completely healed. It seemed his ribs were better as well. All told, he felt great. He sat up and looked at his body. He was dressed in loose fitting grey sweatpants and a white tank undershirt.

There was a knock at the door. A man dressed in some kind of military uniform came in carrying a tray with food: a turkey sandwich, an apple and a glass of water. Theo couldn’t remember having ever been so hungry.

“How are you feeling?” the man asked.

“Great, actually. Who are you? Where am I?”

“I’m Chief Petty Officer Gardiner. You are on a vessel belonging to the United States Coast Guard.”

Theo jumped backward. “What? How?”

“Why don’t you come sit here and eat.”

Theo came over to the little table and sat in a chair that Gardiner held for him.

“That’s better,” Gardiner said. “Can you tell me your name?”

“I’m Theo. Theo Essex.”

Gardiner typed his name into a computerized tablet. He paused for a second, maybe waiting for a response, and then his eyes grew wide.

“Mr. Essex, can you tell me how it is that you were discovered in a mass of debris in the middle of the Atlantic Ocean?”

“I… you found me?”

“We did. You were delirious, ranting about war and an island.”

Theo didn’t respond. His memory was starting to flood back, but it felt cloudy, like a dream.

“Well… Mr. Essex,” Gardiner said, “I’ll let you eat, but there are going to be plenty of people with a lot more questions for you. Some very important people are going to be wondering how a survivor of one of our nation’s greatest tragedies just appeared in the middle of the ocean, not a scratch on him. Eat well, now”

With that, Gardiner left the room. Theo heard the familiar sound of a lock being turned in the door. He sat quietly. Though he was starving, he did not eat anything. The memories washed over him. Kylee. Lucas. Mark. All of his friends. All the people he’d lost. He cried then, weeping for everyone…weeping for himself. He wanted to go home, but where was home anymore? If he really had returned…

Theo sat up with a start. The orb. He grabbed the edge of the metal table with his formerly useless right hand and clenched his fist. The metal bent easily under the strength of his fingers. Theo smiled. He had been wrong to think he was meant only to sacrifice himself for the survival of everyone else. It wasn’t about freeing the people of Atlantic Island to live their own lives stranded in a foreign universe. His purpose was to bring them all home. To do that, he had to find the orb. He had to go back. Theo ate his food then, with a pleasure reserved only for one who knows exactly who he is and what he is meant to do.

August 12, 2012 – July 13, 2013

Wellington, Florida

Afterword

The book you have just finished reading was originally released in three separate installments. All told, this was a year long project, but it has been in my head for much longer than that. I spent much of my life visiting the New Jersey shore every summer. Two things always fascinated me: the feeling that the shore was completely removed from real life, with barely a recognizable store to be found (this has changed in recent years), and the sense that the ocean could go on forever, at least as far as my eyes could tell. From those reflections grew this idea—what if something happened and the shore was all that was left? The very nature of an event (or Event!) that could make something like that possible moved the book into the realm of science fiction. I ran with that, but always tried to stay true to my characters. This story is as much about them, their thoughts, feelings, worries and fears as it is about the struggle for power on the island or the supernatural things that set all of it into motion.

I’d like to quickly thank my beta readers who helped make this a stronger story by calling me out when the plot needed reworking.

Every good thing that has happened to me since I began self-publishing on Amazon can be tied to another work I did this past year. Angels of the Earth is a novella written in Hugh Howey’s Silo Saga world. This is an extension of his novel Wool which I highly recommend. Hugh allowed authors to write stories in his world without charging us for the privilege. Doing that helped me gain valuable experience as an author, and gave the rest of my work credibility. It also positioned me so that when Amazon made projects in Hugh’s world official through Kindle Worlds, I was able to be signed as the first author in the program.

What does this mean for Atlantic Island? Well, I think it’s only fair that I give as well as I got. I’m happy to allow people to write and publish stories set in the universe (universes?) I’ve created here. Run with it. Expand on it. Reimagine it. Just be sure to let people know about the original story!

Will I revisit this tale with a sequel? Time will tell. I love my characters and this bizarre world. I think the stage is set for a future adventure. In the meantime, I have some other projects I want to explore. You can follow all of that at www.fredricshernoff.com or my Twitter @fredricshernoff, or the Fredric Shernoff FaceBook fan page.

One last thing. If you enjoyed this story, please take a moment to rate it on Amazon, or a few moments to write a review. I love hearing readers’ thoughts on my work, and other readers really take your opinions into consideration. That’s all. Thanks for reading!

FS

ALSO BY FREDRIC SHERNOFF

Galaxi (Atlantic Island Chronicles)

Angels of the Earth (A Silo Saga Novella)

Doing the Job (Nonfiction)

Copyright

Copyright © 2013 Fredric Shernoff

All rights reserved.

www.fredricshernoff.com

Content

Fredric Shernoff
ATLANTIC ISLAND

Book 1: The Event

Chapter 1

Chapter 2

Chapter 3

Chapter 4

Chapter 5

Book 2: The Leadership

Chapter 6

Chapter 7

Chapter 8

Chapter 9

Chapter 10

Chapter 11

Chapter 12

Chapter 13

Chapter 14

Chapter 15

Chapter 16

Book 3: The War

Chapter 17

Chapter 18

Chapter 19

Chapter 20

Chapter 21

Chapter 22

Chapter 23

Chapter 24

Chapter 25

Chapter 26

Chapter 27

Chapter 28

Chapter 29

Chapter 30

Chapter 31

Chapter 32

Chapter 33

Chapter 34

Chapter 35

Epilogue 1

Epilogue 2

Afterword

ALSO BY FREDRIC SHERNOFF

Copyright